Manual 7ss52 V17a3 en

,QWURGXFWLRQ 'HVLJQ DQG &RQQHFWLRQ 6\VWHP
SIPROTEC Distributed Busbar/Breaker Failure Protection 7SS52 V 1.71

Manual
*HWWLQJ 6WDUWHG 0RGH RI 2SHUDWLRQ &HQWUDO 8QLW %D\ 8QLW ,QVWDOODWLRQ DQG &RPPLVVLRQLQJ 0DLQWHQDQFH DQG 5HSDLU 7HFKQLFDO 'DWD $SSHQGL[
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Document No. E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Preface
Aim of this Manual This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and commissioning of the device. In particular, you will find: Description of the device functions Chapter 4 Settings of the central unit Chapter 5 Settings of the bay unit Chapter 6 Instructions for installation and commissioning Chapter 7 List of the technical data Chapter 9 Summary of the most significant data for the experienced user in the Appendix Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioners, persons who are involved in setting, testing and maintenance of protection, automation, and control devices, as well as operation personnel in electrical plants and power stations.
Indication of Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 73/23 EEC). Conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081 and EN 50082 (for EMC directive) and the standards EN 60255-6 (for low-voltage directive). The device is designed in accordance with the international standards of IEC 255 and the German standards DIN 57 435 part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435 part 303).
Additional support
For any questions concerning your SIPROTEC system, please contact your Siemens representative. Individual course offers may be found in our Training Catalog, or questions can be directed to our training center.
Training courses
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Instructions and Warnings
The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for an appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them! The following terms and definitions are used:
DANGER
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. This is especially valid for damage on or in the device itself and consequential damage thereof. Note indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual which is essential to highlight.
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property damage. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the applicable safety regulations. The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, installation, operation, and maintenance by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings and hints contained in this manual. In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear must be observed. Nonobservance can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. QUALIFIED PERSONNEL For the purpose of this instruction manual and product labels, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. In addition, he or she has the following qualifications: Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices. Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices. Is trained in rendering first aid.
ii
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Typographic and Symbol Conventions
The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the device appear in the text flow: 3DUDPHWHU QDPHV, i.e. designators of configuration or function parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with DIGSI), are marked in bold letters of a monospace type style. 3DUDPHWHU RSWLRQV, i.e. possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with DIGSI), are written in italic style, additionally. This applies also for options in menus. $QQXQFLDWLRQV, i.e. designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotes. Deviations may be permitted in drawings when the type of designator can be obviously derived from the illustration.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
iii
iv
Contents
1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Mode of operation ............................................................................................................... 1-2 Application scope ................................................................................................................ 1-4 Features .............................................................................................................................. 1-6 Scope of functions ............................................................................................................... 1-7
Design and Connection System .................................................................................................... 2-15 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.3.1 2.3.3.2 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.2.1 2.4.2.2 2.4.2.3 2.4.2.4 General.............................................................................................................................. 2-16 Central unit ........................................................................................................................ 2-17 Front view .......................................................................................................................... 2-17 Fitting of the modules ........................................................................................................ 2-18 Versions ............................................................................................................................ 2-19 Subrack ES902C (SIPAC)................................................................................................. 2-19 Wall-mounted casing ......................................................................................................... 2-19 Bay unit ............................................................................................................................. 2-20 Front view .......................................................................................................................... 2-20 Fitting of the modules ........................................................................................................ 2-20 Versions ............................................................................................................................ 2-21 Panel surface mounting..................................................................................................... 2-21 Panel or cubicle flush mounting......................................................................................... 2-21 Connection system ............................................................................................................ 2-23 Device connections .......................................................................................................... 2-23 Types of connections ........................................................................................................ 2-26 Screw-type terminals ......................................................................................................... 2-26 Double leaf-spring-crimp contacts ..................................................................................... 2-27 Fiber-optic cable connections............................................................................................ 2-27 D-SUB female connectors ................................................................................................. 2-27
Getting Started.................................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Unpacking and repacking .................................................................................................... 3-2 Check of the rated data ....................................................................................................... 3-3 Matching of the control voltage for the binary inputs ........................................................... 3-4 User interface ...................................................................................................................... 3-8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
3.4.1 3.4.2 3.5
Setting the central unit ......................................................................................................... 3-8 Setting the bay unit ............................................................................................................ 3-11 Storage .............................................................................................................................. 3-15
Mode of Operation ............................................................................................................................ 4-1 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.2.1 4.1.2.2 4.1.2.3 4.1.2.4 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.6.1 4.1.6.2 4.1.6.3 4.1.6.4 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.1.1 4.2.1.2 4.2.1.3 4.2.1.4 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.1.1 4.3.1.2 4.3.1.3 4.3.1.4 4.3.1.5 4.3.1.6 4.3.1.7 4.3.1.8 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.5 4.5.1 Busbar protection................................................................................................................. 4-2 Basic principle...................................................................................................................... 4-2 Algorithm with instantaneous values ................................................................................... 4-4 Stabilization ......................................................................................................................... 4-4 Characteristic....................................................................................................................... 4-4 Separate evaluation of half-cycles....................................................................................... 4-6 Weighted evaluation of the initial values.............................................................................. 4-9 Algorithm with filtered values ............................................................................................. 4-10 Summary of the measuring method................................................................................... 4-10 Special treatment of the stabilizing current for the check zone ......................................... 4-12 Bus coupler variants .......................................................................................................... 4-13 Bus coupler with one current transformer.......................................................................... 4-14 Bus couplers with two current transformers....................................................................... 4-14 Bus couplers without circuit breaker .................................................................................. 4-14 Bus couplers with more than 5 isolators ............................................................................ 4-14 Isolator replica ................................................................................................................... 4-15 Treatment of the isolator status indications ....................................................................... 4-15 Preferential treatment during busbar coupling via isolators............................................... 4-15 Processing of the isolator running status........................................................................... 4-15 Auxiliary voltage supply failure .......................................................................................... 4-16 Wire breakage ................................................................................................................... 4-16 Bypass transfer-busbar operation...................................................................................... 4-17 Recognition of the feeder isolator status ........................................................................... 4-19 Circuit-breaker failure protection........................................................................................ 4-20 Circuit-breaker failure protection during a feeder short-circuit........................................... 4-21 I>query............................................................................................................................... 4-25 TRIP repeat / I>query ........................................................................................................ 4-25 Unbalancing....................................................................................................................... 4-26 TRIP repetition / unbalancing ............................................................................................ 4-27 Initiation by external CBF................................................................................................... 4-27 Low-current mode.............................................................................................................. 4-27 Pulse mode........................................................................................................................ 4-28 Initiation by feeder protection............................................................................................. 4-29 Circuit-breaker failure protection for busbar faults............................................................. 4-29 Failure of the bus coupler circuit breaker........................................................................... 4-30 Initiation by the backup protection function in the bay unit ................................................ 4-31 Backup protection in the bay unit....................................................................................... 4-33 Definite time overcurrent protection................................................................................... 4-35 Inverse time overcurrent protection ................................................................................... 4-35 Ancillary functions.............................................................................................................. 4-36 Further conditions for the TRIP command......................................................................... 4-36
ii
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4.5.1.1 4.5.1.2 4.5.1.3 4.5.2 4.5.2.1 4.5.2.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.4.1 4.5.5 4.5.5.1 4.5.5.2 4.5.5.3 4.5.5.4 4.5.5.5 4.5.6 4.5.6.1 4.5.6.2 4.5.7 4.5.7.1 4.5.7.2 4.5.8 4.5.9 4.5.9.1 4.5.9.2 4.5.9.3 4.5.9.4 4.5.9.5 4.5.9.6 4.5.9.7 4.5.9.8 4.5.9.9 4.5.9.10 4.5.10
Overcurrent controlled TRIP command ............................................................................. 4-36 Feeder-selective trip release ............................................................................................. 4-36 Minimum duration of the trip command ............................................................................. 4-36 Protection in the dead zone of the bus coupler............................................................... 4-37 Status OPEN of the bus coupler circuit breaker ................................................................ 4-39 CLOSE command of the bus coupler circuit breaker ........................................................ 4-40 Interrogation of circuit breaker........................................................................................... 4-40 End fault protection ........................................................................................................... 4-42 CB not ready function...................................................................................................... 4-43 Control functions ............................................................................................................... 4-44 Trip test with circuit breaker............................................................................................... 4-44 Bay out of service .............................................................................................................. 4-45 Maintenance mode ............................................................................................................ 4-46 Blocking of the BZ trip commands..................................................................................... 4-46 Blocking of the breaker failure protection .......................................................................... 4-47 Event logging..................................................................................................................... 4-47 Alarm relays and indications.............................................................................................. 4-47 Operation and indication ................................................................................................... 4-48 Fault recording .................................................................................................................. 4-49 Central unit ........................................................................................................................ 4-49 Bay unit ............................................................................................................................. 4-49 Clock management............................................................................................................ 4-50 Supervisory functions ........................................................................................................ 4-50 Hardware monitoring ......................................................................................................... 4-50 Software monitoring........................................................................................................... 4-52 Monitoring of external CT circuits ...................................................................................... 4-52 Isolator supervision............................................................................................................ 4-54 Monitoring in maintenance mode ...................................................................................... 4-55 Supervision of CB failure protection initiation and release ................................................ 4-55 Current-controlled reset of the TRIP command................................................................. 4-57 Differential current supervision for linearized current transformers ................................... 4-57 Cyclic test .......................................................................................................................... 4-58 Summary of the supervisory functions .............................................................................. 4-59 Zone-selective blocking ..................................................................................................... 4-60
Central Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.4 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 5-2 Station configuration............................................................................................................ 5-5 Read out of design data ...................................................................................................... 5-5 Changing of station data ..................................................................................................... 5-5 Station configuration............................................................................................................ 5-5 Configuration of the busbar ............................................................................................... 5-12 Configuration examples..................................................................................................... 5-13 Marshalling information ..................................................................................................... 5-20 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 5-20 Binary outputs and LED indications................................................................................... 5-21 System settings and interfaces.......................................................................................... 5-25
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
iii
5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.8 5.9
Functions settings.............................................................................................................. 5-28 Settings for the busbar differential protection .................................................................... 5-28 Circuit breaker failure protection........................................................................................ 5-32 Supervisory function .......................................................................................................... 5-32 Read out of information ..................................................................................................... 5-36 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 5-36 Operational events............................................................................................................. 5-37 Fault events ....................................................................................................................... 5-40 Isolator replica ................................................................................................................... 5-41 Operational measured values............................................................................................ 5-42 Fault recording................................................................................................................... 5-44 Control in operation ........................................................................................................... 5-46 Release of control by bay units.......................................................................................... 5-46 Control functions................................................................................................................ 5-46 Setting and reading the real-time clock ............................................................................. 5-49 Test functions .................................................................................................................... 5-50
Bay Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 6-1 6.1 6.1.1 6.2 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.4 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 6.5.6 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 6-2 Integrated operation ............................................................................................................ 6-5 Defining the scope of protective functions ........................................................................... 6-6 Marshalling information........................................................................................................ 6-7 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 6-7 Binary inputs ........................................................................................................................ 6-7 Alarm relay......................................................................................................................... 6-10 LED indicators ................................................................................................................... 6-13 Trip relays .......................................................................................................................... 6-14 Serial interfaces ................................................................................................................. 6-17 Function parameters.......................................................................................................... 6-20 Substation data.................................................................................................................. 6-20 Phase fault overcurrent protection (option)........................................................................ 6-20 Earth fault overcurrent protection (option) ......................................................................... 6-23 Delay times for user-defined annunciations....................................................................... 6-25 Circuit breaker failure protection (option)........................................................................... 6-26 Fault recordings ................................................................................................................. 6-27 Read out of information ..................................................................................................... 6-29 Operational annunciations ................................................................................................. 6-30 Fault annunciations............................................................................................................ 6-30 Annunciations for circuit breaker operating statistics......................................................... 6-31 Read out of operational measured values ......................................................................... 6-32
iv
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6.7 6.8 6.9
Control in operation ........................................................................................................... 6-35 Setting and reading the real-time clock ............................................................................. 6-37 Test functions .................................................................................................................... 6-38
Installation and Commissioning ..................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.5.1 7.1.5.2 7.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.2.1 7.3.2.2 7.3.3 7.3.3.1 7.3.3.2 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.5.1 7.3.5.2 7.3.6 7.3.6.1 7.3.6.2 7.3.6.3 7.3.6.4 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 Installation and connection .................................................................................................. 7-2 Version for panel surface mounting (BU, CU) ..................................................................... 7-2 Bay unit for panel or cubicle flush mounting........................................................................ 7-2 Subrack version of the central unit ...................................................................................... 7-3 Cubicle version of the central unit ....................................................................................... 7-3 Connection of two bay units to one bus coupler bay ........................................................... 7-4 Connection .......................................................................................................................... 7-4 Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 7-5 Checking the connections ................................................................................................... 7-6 Testing................................................................................................................................. 7-7 General................................................................................................................................ 7-7 Testing the pick-up values of the busbar protection ............................................................ 7-8 Bus section-selective measuring ......................................................................................... 7-8 Check zone ....................................................................................................................... 7-10 Checking the differential current limit for differential current supervision .......................... 7-11 Bus section-selective protection ........................................................................................ 7-11 Check zone ....................................................................................................................... 7-12 Testing the pick-up values for controlled tripping .............................................................. 7-13 Functional testing of circuit-breaker failure protection ....................................................... 7-14 Pick-up characteristic in mode of operation forced bus zone unbalance ........................ 7-14 Checking the time delay with mode of operationforced bus zone unbalance or I>query . 715 General recommendations for setting the protection......................................................... 7-15 Busbar protection .............................................................................................................. 7-15 Breaker failure protection .................................................................................................. 7-17 Supervisory functions ........................................................................................................ 7-18 Overcurrent release of the bay trip command ................................................................... 7-19 Commissioning with primary values .................................................................................. 7-20 Checking the current transformer polarity with the load current ........................................ 7-20 Checking the connections of the inputs for initiation of the circuit-breaker failure protection7-21 Checking the alarms and trip signals................................................................................. 7-21 Switching the protection into service ................................................................................. 7-22
Maintenance and Repair .................................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1 8.2 8.3 General................................................................................................................................ 8-2 Recommendations for maintenance.................................................................................... 8-3 Fault analysis ...................................................................................................................... 8-5
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.4 8.5 8.6
Analysis of operational events ............................................................................................. 8-5 Checking the auxiliary voltage supply.................................................................................. 8-6 Replacement of fuses .......................................................................................................... 8-6 Check of the LEDs on the modules ..................................................................................... 8-8 Fault indication and analysis of the fault buffer.................................................................. 8-10 Analysis of failures in the communication.......................................................................... 8-15 Repair ................................................................................................................................ 8-18 Service conditions.............................................................................................................. 8-19 Interchangeability............................................................................................................... 8-20
Technical Data................................................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.8.1 9.8.2 General data ........................................................................................................................ 9-2 General device data............................................................................................................. 9-3 Busbar protection................................................................................................................. 9-6 Circuit breaker failure protection.......................................................................................... 9-7 Overcurrent protection ......................................................................................................... 9-8 Standards and guidelines .................................................................................................... 9-9 Ancillary functions.............................................................................................................. 9-13 Dimensions ........................................................................................................................ 9-14 Bay unit.............................................................................................................................. 9-14 Central unit ........................................................................................................................ 9-17
Appendix........................................................................................................................................... A-1 A.1 A.2 A.2.1 A.2.1.1 A.2.1.2 A.2.1.3 A.2.2 A.2.2.1 A.2.2.2 A.3 A.3.1 A.3.2 A.3.3 A.3.4 A.3.5 A.4 Data for selection and ordering............................................................................................A-2 Operational and fault events................................................................................................A-6 Alarms from the central unit.................................................................................................A-7 PC, LC display and relays/LED ...........................................................................................A-7 Binary inputs of the central unit .........................................................................................A-13 Group alarms of the central unit ........................................................................................A-14 Annunciations of the bay unit.............................................................................................A-18 PC, LC display and binary inputs/outputs..........................................................................A-18 Communication interface to control center (LSA) ..............................................................A-23 Tabular overview of direct addresses - Central unit .........................................................A-28 System and design data ....................................................................................................A-28 Parameters ........................................................................................................................A-31 Annunciations ....................................................................................................................A-33 Control / test ......................................................................................................................A-36 Date and time ....................................................................................................................A-38 Tabular overview of direct addresses - Bay unit................................................................A-39
vi
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A.4.1 A.4.2 A.4.3 A.4.4 A.4.5 A.4.6 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.7.1 A.7.2 A.7.3 A.8 A.8.1 A.8.2 A.8.3 A.9
Parameters of the 7SS521 ................................................................................................A-39 Tests and Commissioning Aids 7SS521 ..........................................................................A-41 Addresses for annunciations and measured values of the 7SS521 ..................................A-42 Marshalling of the 7SS521 ................................................................................................A-43 Configuration of the 7SS521 .............................................................................................A-44 Operational Device Control Facilities 7SS521...................................................................A-47 Basis for selection of the stabilization factor k...................................................................A-48 Connection diagrams.........................................................................................................A-49 Jumper settings (central unit) ............................................................................................A-52 Settings of the ZPS modules .............................................................................................A-52 Settings of the EAZ module...............................................................................................A-54 Jumper settings of the LMZ module ..................................................................................A-55 Jumper settings of the bay unit..........................................................................................A-56 Settings of the PFE module...............................................................................................A-56 Settings of the SAF module...............................................................................................A-58 Settings of the EFE module...............................................................................................A-59 Abbreviations.....................................................................................................................A-60
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
vii
viii
Introduction
1
The SIPROTEC 4 devices 7SS52 are introduced in this chapter. An overview of the devices is presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Mode of operation Application scope Features Scope of functions 1-2 1-4 1-6 1-7
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
1-1
Introduction
1.1
Mode of operation
The digital busbar and breaker failure protection 7SS52 consists of compact bay units which are connected to the central unit by fiber-optic cables. Figure 1-1 shows the basic structure of the protection system. The protection system is equipped with powerful 16 bit (bay unit) and 32 bit (central unit) microprocessors. All tasks from acquisition of the measured values up to the commands to the circuit breakers are exclusively processed in a digital manner. In the bay units the feeder or coupler currents are measured time-synchronized, digitalized, preprocessed and transmitted to the central unit via the fast serial interface. The input nominal current can be 1 or 5 A depending on the main current transformer design. The measuring inputs are completely galvanically isolated and low-capacitive by transducers. Suppression of disturbances is achieved by filters which are optimized for the measured value processing with regard to bandwidth and processing speed.
Bay unit
The bay unit captures the isolator positions and bay-related binary signals, processes functions of the breaker failure protection and fulfils autodiagnosis tasks. Heavy-duty command relays take the protection systems trip commands directly to the circuit breakers. Alarm relays and indications (LED; LC display) allow event indication. In addition operational measured values are displayed.
Central unit
The central unit is designed as a multi-processor system. The measured currents are read in from the connected bay units time-synchronized and are processed together with binary information from the protection functions (differential protection, breaker failure protection). The central unit transmits the results of the calculations as well as logical combinations cyclically to the bay units. Freely marshallable alarm relays and LED displays are provided for signalling. The central unit administers all configuration and setting data for the busbar and breaker failure protection functions. Communication is possible via an integrated keypad with LC display or via the serial interface by means of a PC utilizing the communication program DIGSI. In addition the program can read out fault data from the protection device and analyze it. The central unit and bay units contain power supply modules for a reliable power supply on different voltage ranges.
1-2
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Introduction
Figure 1-1
General view of the configuration of the protection system 7SS52
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
1-3
Introduction
1.2
Application scope
The busbar and breaker failure protection 7SS52 is a selective, reliable and fast protection for busbar short-circuits and circuit-breaker failures in medium-voltage, highvoltage and extra high-voltage switching stations. It is suitable for almost all busbar configurations. The busbar protection uses a phase-selective measuring principle. The protection system consists of a central unit (ZE) and up to 48 bay units (FE) connected by fiber-optic (FO) cables. The latter can be located in the vicinity of the bays (distributed) but also together with the ZE in cubicles (centralized).
Application
Use and scope of functions
The protection can be used with all types of switchgear with either conventional or linearized CTs. The modular design facilitates extensions or modifications of the protection system in conformity with the switchgear design. The 7SS52 is designed for 12 selective bus zones (BZ) and 12 bus coupler (auxiliary bus) sections (AB). These are sections which serve exclusively for coupling of the bus zones. They do not have any feeders. The busbar configuration can include up to 24 sectionalizing isolators and 16 bus couplers with one bay unit or 8 bus couplers with two bay units. By virtue of the universal isolator replica, the 7SS52 can be matched with different busbar configurations in the design phase. Compensation of different current transformer ratios is achieved by parameter setting. Interposing current transformers are thus no more required. A busbar short-circuit is detected by evaluating the differential current and the stabilizing current. Appropriate measures ensure correct performance even for extreme CT saturation (required duration of current transmission 3 ms). The integrated circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) can be operated in five modes, selectable per bay: I> query (1-stage CBF) TRIP repetition with overcurrent detection I> (2-stage CBF) Unbalancing (1-stage CBF) 2-stage CBF (TRIP repetition with following unbalancing) TRIP repetition and following unbalancing (2-stage CBF) Single-pole or three-pole start by external CBF and tripping via the isolator replica In addition, the integrated circuit breaker failure protection provides two operating modes that can be set in parallel to the other five modes: TRIP repetition and following unbalancing with pulse trigger Low current mode
1-4
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Introduction
The overcurrent-time protection is a back-up protection function of the bay unit and includes the following functions: Phase-selective high-set stage (I>>) High-set stage for the earth current (IE>>) Phase-selective overcurrent stage with definite time or inverse time characteristic (I> / Ip) Overcurrent stage for the earth current with definite time or inverse time characteristic (IE> / IEp) Back-up protection function, can work without the central unit Separate circuit breaker failure protection
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
1-5
Introduction
1.3
Features
Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system Completely digital measured value processing and control, from the acquisition and digitizing of measured values, recognition of the isolator status and processing of the CB failure protection signals up to the trip decisions for the circuit-breaker Easy menu-guided operation via integrated keypad and display panel Battery-buffered storage of fault events as well as instantaneous values for fault recording Complete galvanic and disturbance-free isolation between the internal processing circuits of central unit and bay units and the measuring and auxiliary supply circuits of the station by virtue of screened measuring transducers, binary input and output modules and DC converters Disturbance-free and fast data transmission from and to the bay units by fiber-optic links. Complete scope of functions for the selective protection of multiple busbar systems. Central administration and feeder-dedicated indication of the isolator states Continuous monitoring of measured values as well as of hardware and software of the unit Comprehensive self-monitoring provides for fast signaling of unit failure Communication via the V.24 interface and utilization of the program DIGSI for system configuration, settings, parameterizing and reading-out of events and fault recordings Commissioning support by means of measuring and annunciation features
1-6
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Introduction
1.4
Scope of functions
The digital busbar protection contains the following functions: Busbar protection with up to 12 bus zones (BZ), 12 bus coupler (auxiliary bus) sections (AB) and up to 48 bay units Evaluation of the differential current in conjunction with through-current stabilization (refer to Figure 1-1) Tripping dependent on three independent measurement decisions; 2 based on busbar configuration and 1 isolator-independent (check zone) Fast tripping (typical trip time < 15 ms) Stabilization against spurious tripping in case of external faults and CT saturation Zone-selective and phase-selective blocking of the busbar protection by the differential current monitor Selective blocking of the bus section in case of Isolator faults Automatic testing Bay faults (bay unit, FO cable) Measured value fault Zero crossing supervision Characteristics for check zone and bus-selective zones can be set independently from each other normal pick-up characteristic (refer to Figure 1-2) earth fault characteristic (refer to Figure 1-3) Matching to different CT ratios without interposing matching transformers Selective clearance of short-circuits even on the bypass bus with signal transmission to the remote end Detection and disconnection of short-circuits in the coupler bay between current transformers and circuit-breaker based on current measurement and selective unbalance Detection and disconnection of short-circuits between current transformers and circuit-breaker of a line by end fault protection Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF), selectable per bay, for low-current faults in the variants I> query (1-stage CBF) TRIP repetition with subsequent I>query (2-stage CBF) Unbalancing (1-stage CBF) TRIP repetition and following unbalancing (2-stage CBF) Direct operation of the circuit breaker by the bay unit
Busbar protection
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
1-7
Introduction
Figure 1-2
Pick-up characteristics of the busbar and breaker failure protection (unbalancing)
Differential current
Normal load line Stabilizing current

Figure 1-3 Pick-up characteristics of the busbar and breaker failure protection
Circuit-breaker failure protection
The 7SS52 has an integrated circuit breaker failure protection (CBF). The following modes are available: I> query After initiation by a TRIP command from the feeder protection, this signal is checked in the 7SS52 for reset. If the measured current stays above the set threshold after a set time has elapsed, then zone-selective TRIP commands will be issued in the bays considering the isolator replica in the 7SS52. TRIP repetition with subsequent I> query When initiated by a TRIP command from the feeder protection, the 7SS52 issues a TRIP command to the circuit breaker of the initiating feeder after a set time delay. In case this second TRIP command is also unsuccessful, tripping as per mode I>query is effected.
1-8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Introduction
Unbalancing After initiation by a TRIP command from the feeder protection, this signal is checked in the 7SS52 for reset. If the measured current stays above the set threshold after a set time has elapsed, the polarity of the current in this feeder is inverted (unbalancing). For this function a dedicated set of parameters is available. TRIP repetition with subsequent unbalancing When initiated by a TRIP command from the feeder protection, the 7SS52 issues a TRIP command to the circuit breaker of the initiating feeder after a set time delay. In case this second TRIP command is also unsuccessful, unbalancing as per mode Unbalancing is initiated. TRIP by external CBF In case of a separate circuit breaker failure protection, the 7SS52 can generate zone-selective feeder trip commands utilizing the integrated isolator replica. Additional modes: TRIP repetition with subsequent unbalancing with pulse trigger or I> query The function is triggered by a trip command from the feeder protection at the remote feeder terminal. The proceeding is described in the modes TRIP repetition with subsequent unbalancing and I>query. This mode is used when the CBF is triggered by the remote station. Low-current CBF This mode outputs a TRIP command even in the case of low-current faults (e.g. tripping by Buchholz protection). Recognition of a breaker failure in case of a busbar short-circuit by current limit value comparison. For all CBF modes, a feeder-selective command to trip the circuit breaker at the remote feeder terminal (transfer trip) is issued by the bay units. Single-pole and/or three-pole start by external CBF possible. The circuit breaker failure protection can be triggered in 1-channel mode or in 2channel mode for increased reliability. Both modes can be set with or without supervision. Reduced response time in case of circuit breaker malfunctions CBF function can be deactivated for test purposes. End fault protection End fault protection This mode detects short-circuits between the current transformers and the circuit breaker and generates the necessary commands to disconnect the faulted line.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
1-9
Introduction
Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent protection of the bay unit is independent of the busbar protection function and of the master unit. The overcurrent protection comprises the following features: High-set stage I>> with separate fault detection in each phase High-set stage IE>> Independent (definite time) overcurrent stage I> with separate fault detection in each phase OR Current-dependent (inverse time) overcurrent stage Ip with separate fault detection in each phase Independent (definite time) earth current stage IE> OR Current-dependent (inverse time) earth current stage IEp Setting of different current/time characteristics for phase and earth currents possible With inverse time O/C protection: three standardized characteristics selectable for phase currents and earth currents CBF function remains active even in case of central unit failure or with %D\ RXW RI VHUYLFH.
Isolator replica
The isolator replica is common for the busbar protection and the circuit-breaker failure protection function. The system is laid out for 48 bays, 12 bus sections and 12 bus coupler sections. The protection system is suitable for configurations with single, double, triple or quadruple busbars with or without transfer (bypass) bus. Combi-bus operation is possible. Up to 16 couplers can be configured with one bay unit, and up to 8 couplers with two bay units. These can be bus couplers or/and sectionalizing isolators. Integrated storage of isolator status on loss of DC supply Isolator running time supervision The allocation of 127 23(1 lator auxiliary contacts. &/26(' eliminates the necessity of calibrated iso-
Matching to station configuration by operator-guided configuration during commissioning using DIGSI. Isolator status indication by means of LEDs in the bay units. Trip output/reset The signal processing is distinguished by the following characteristics: Feeder-selective TRIP command by the bay units Feeder-selective selectable overcurrent release of the TRIP command Extension of busbar TRIP signal for set time Current-controlled reset of TRIP signal
1-10
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Introduction
Fault recording
The digitized phase current values of all feeders and the differential and stabilizing currents of the bus zones and the check zone are stored. This fault record, starting 100 ms before the TRIP command and terminating 300 ms to 700 ms after the TRIP command is initiated by a busbar short-circuit, by binary input or by operation from the central unit. The 7SS52 stores up to 2 fault records with a duration of 400 ms each or one fault record with a duration of 800 ms. The fault record data are buffered to prevent loss in case of power failures. The fault data can be read out via the serial interface of the central unit and analyzed by the communication program DIGSI.
Relays, LEDs and binary inputs
All binary inputs and corresponding LEDs of the bay unit are freely marshallable. Each LED or relay can be allocated to more than one event; likewise, events can be marshalled more than one LED or relay. 10 freely marshallable binary inputs are available to control the functions of the central unit (e.g. clock synchronization, LED reset). Up to 16 or 32 alarm relays and LED in the central unit can be allocated to various functions for user-specific output and indication.
Central unit
Bay unit
The bay units are the interface link to the station. Each bay unit has 4 command relays with each 2 NO contacts 1 command relay with 1 NO contact 1 alarm relay with 1 NO contact 1alarm relay with 2 NC contacts (device failure, not marshallable) The functional allocation of the outputs can be marshalled via the keypad of each bay unit and with the DIGSI communication program. 20 freely marshallable binary inputs are available to control the bay unit. 10 binary inputs are used for recognition of the isolator states. The state is indicated by LEDs.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
1-11
Introduction
Measuring and testing functions
The 7SS52 provides a variety of measuring and testing functions to assist during commissioning and maintenance. Display of the feeder currents per phase in each bay unit and in the central unit. In addition the data are available at the serial interface for visualization in the DIGSI software. Calculation of differential and stabilizing currents phase-selective and zone-selective. Display of these values in the central unit and for the check zone in the bay unit. In addition the data are available at the serial interface. Monitoring of the zone-selective and phase-selective differential currents with zoneselective blocking or alarm output. Monitoring of the differential currents in the check zone with blocking of the busbar protection and alarm output. Phase-selective trip test including control of the feeder circuit breaker (from central unit or bay unit). Bay out of service Removal of one bay from the busbar protection processing via central unit or bay unit, e.g during maintenance works. Revision mode The isolator replica of one bay is retained by the central and the bay unit with the protection function remaining active Cyclic test of measured value acquisition, measured value processing and trip circuit test including the coils of the command relays. Manual blocking Blocking of the circuit breaker failure protection and of the TRIP commands
Operational and fault events
The 7SS52 supplies detailed buffered data for the analysis of faults as well as for operational events. Up to 99 operational events and 40 fault events are stored in a circulating buffer in the central unit. Operational events Switching operations, protection status indications, isolator status irregularities and monitoring functions belong to this group of events. Fault events Trip signals in the event of busbar short-circuits, circuit-breaker failure and transfer trip belong to this group of events.
Self-monitoring
Hardware and software are continuously monitored; irregularities are recognized instantly and annunciated. High security and availability are achieved by the continuous monitoring of: the isolator status, the trip circuits, the measured currents, the measured value transformation, all supply voltages,
1-12
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Introduction
the program memories, the program processing. For diagnosis purposes in the event of device failures, a battery-buffered dedicated data memory is available in the central unit. Clock control Central unit Battery-buffered time with 10 ms resolution Time set by entry of current data Synchronization of central unit by binary input Bay unit Battery-buffered time with 1 ms resolution Time synchronization by central unit in 1-minute intervals Additional local setting of the time Battery-buffered functions (central unit and bay units) The central unit and the bay units are equipped with buffer batteries to ensure that LED states, date and time, operational and fault events as well as fault records are maintained in case of an auxiliary power failure.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
1-13
Introduction
1-14
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Design and Connection System
2
2-16 2-17 2-20 2-23
This chapter describes the design and the connection system of the 7SS52. You will find information on the available casing variants and on the types of connections used. This chapter also specifies recommended and reliable wiring data as well as suitable accessories and tools.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
General Central unit Bay unit Connection system
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
2-15
2.1
General
The busbar and breaker failure protection 7SS52 as a system consists of the components central unit bay units data links (fiber-optic cables). Prefabricated fiber optic cables (62.5/125 m) with double-end FSMA plug connectors are used for the data exchange. They can be delivered with specific anti-rodent protection for outdoor installation. Indoor cables may be used for centralized configuration of the bay units.
Control
Communication with the central unit and the bay unit is also possible with the DIGSI communication software using the serial interface. An integrated keypad together with the built-in alphanumeric LC display allows communication with the central unit as well as with the bay units. These operation elements provide for input or display of all data necessary for processing, such as setting parameters, station data, etc. (refer to Chapter 5 and Chapter 6) as well as read-out of relevant operations and fault events (refer to Appendix A.2).
Power supply
The functional units in the bay unit and central unit are powered by powerful power supply units. The bay unit has a wide-range power supply. For the central unit power supply modules for different input voltage ranges are available. Short dips or failures of the supply voltage up to 50 ms, which may occur due to shortcircuits in the DC supply system of the station, are compensated by a DC storage capacitor (for nominal voltages 60 V).
Bonding power failure
2-16
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
2.2
Central unit
The central unit can be delivered in a SIPAC 19 subrack for cubicle mounting or in a casing for surface / wall mounting. On account of the modular design, different variants can be coordinated with the station configuration. The bay unit are mounted in a 7XP20 casing for cubicle mounting or surface mounting. Degree of protection IP20 is guaranteed. When delivered in a surface-mounted casing, IP55 applies and when mounted in an 8MF-cubicle with swing-out frame, IP54 applies.
2.2.1
Front view
Figure 2-1 Front view of the central unit
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
2-17
2.2.2
Fitting of the modules
Figure 2-2 Fitting of the modules in the central unit
Power supply (SV) Input/output module (EAZ3)
The function unit has a width of 4 SEP (standing mounting space). Up to 2 modules with 16 alarm relays each can be used. Each alarm relay is assigned an LED on the front panel. The first EAZ3 allows processing of up to 7 binary inputs. 4 modules (SBK; BSZ1 to BSZ3) of this type with a width of 2 SEP provide the protection function. Further 1 to 6 modules (depending on the system configuration) are used for the data exchange with the bay units. Each interface communication module (SK) can exchange data with up to 8 bay units. For each SK-module there is an electrical/optical signal converter module, fitted on the devices rear side. The receiver and transmitter connection points per bay unit are numbered on the central units rear plate. FSMA connectors as per IEC 60870-5-103 are provided for the fiber-optic interface to the bay units. The external electrical connections (SV, EAZ3) are designed as connection modules on the devices rear side. For each electrical connection point, there is one screw-type and in parallel one snap-in connector for the station wiring. The connection modules are designated according to their position in a coordinate system. The connections inside a module are numbered from left to right, e.g. 1C1 and 5B4. The mechanical dimensions can be seen in Figure 9-3.
Central processor modules protection (ZPS)
Fiber-optic module (LMZ)
Connection modules
2-18
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
2.2.3
2.2.3.1 Design
Versions
Subrack ES902C (SIPAC) The subrack (Order no. 7SS5200-xAxx0-0AAx) consists of an aluminum frame covered from all sides by metal plates. These are perforated at the bottom and top to cater for sufficient ventilation. The modules are electrically interconnected by means of an integrated bus board and plug-in elements. The subracks front side is covered by a metallic plate. This front plate is hinged and can be opened downwards after loosening the fixing screws. The dimensions of the casing can be in Figure 9-4.
2.2.3.2 Design
Wall-mounted casing For the variant with surface-mounted casing (Order no. 7SS5200-xBxx0-0AAx) the subrack is fitted into a wall-mounted casing. All electrical and optical connections are made from the bottom side of the casing. The door of the casing is equipped with a large glass window. The design of the wallmounted casing with the three components door, swing-out frame and base facilitates installation, operation and service. The dimensions of the casing can be seen in Figure 9-5.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
2-19
2.3
2.3.1
Bay unit
Front view
Figure 2-3 Front view of the bay unit
2.3.2
Fitting of the modules
Figure 2-4 Fitting of the modules in the bay unit
2-20
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Heavy-duty current terminals Plug-in modules
The heavy-duty current terminals automatically short-circuit the current transformer when the module is withdrawn. The plug-in modules are designated according to their position in a coordinate system. The connections inside a module are numbered from left to right (as seen from the rear), e.g. 1C1 and 1B4 (refer to Figure 9-3).
2.3.3
2.3.3.1 Design
Versions
Panel surface mounting With the variant for surface mounting (Order no. 7SS521x-xDA0x-xxA0) the bay units are delivered in casings type 7XP2040-1. The casing is completely metal-closed with a removable front cover with acrylic window. The integrated button can be used for reset of the LEDs while the front cover is fitted. Earthing screws are at the left side of the casing. The dimensions of the casing can be seen in Figure 9-1. The device is enclosed by a metallic front cover which is electrically connected to the casing by means of contact spring blades. The special door mechanism facilitates commissioning and maintenance. The mechanical construction is earthed via a flexible wire connection.
Casing
Signal connection
All signals including the auxiliary voltage are connected to double-level terminals. The device has 28 connection terminals at the bottom side and 50 more terminals at the top side. In each level the terminals are numbered from left to right. Two FSMA connection points are located on the bottom, next to the terminal strip, for the fiber-optic link to the central unit.
2.3.3.2 Design
Panel or cubicle flush mounting With the variant for flush mounting (Order no. 7SS521x-xCA00-xxA0) the bay units are supplied in casings type 7XP2040-2. The casing is completely metal-closed with a removable front cover with or without (ordering code E at the 9th digit instead of C) acrylic window. The integrated button can be used to reset the LEDs while the front cover is fitted. An earthing screw is located on the rear of the casing. The dimensions of the casing can be seen in Figure 9-2.
Casing
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
2-21
Signal connection
All signals including the auxiliary supply are connected to terminals, located on the rear side. For each electrical signal one screw-type and one plug-in connection point is available for station wiring. Two FSMA connection points are located on the bottom, next to the terminal strip, for the fiber-optic link to the central unit.
2-22
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
2.4
2.4.1
Connection system
Device connections
Central unit
Rear view
Modular terminal block
Fiber-optic interfaces to bay units
2 1 3 1 2 4 2 4 Voltage connections e.g. 1C4 1 3
Figure 2-5 Device connections on central unit
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
2-23
Bay unit Panel surface mounting
Figure 2-6 Device connections on bay unit for panel surface mounting
2-24
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay unit Panel or cubicle flush mounting

E
Rear view
D 8 7 6 5 M4
Modular terminal block
Fiber-optic interfaces: to central unit serial interface
4 3 2 1
6 1 1 2 5 2 4 3
Current connections e.g. 5C1
Voltage connections e.g. 5B4
Figure 2-7 Device connections of bay unit for panel or cubicle flush mounting
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
2-25
Table 2-1 Variant Central unit
Overview of the device connections Current connections Voltage connections Screw connection max. 1.5 mm in parallel double leafspring-crimp contact for max. 1.5 mm FO connections Integrated FSMA plug connector for FO connection, glass fiber 62.5 / 125 m FO duplex outdoor cable (e.g. 6XV8100-0BB) FO duplex indoor cable (e.g. 6XV8100-0BC) Integrated FSMA plug connector for FO connection, glass fiber 62.5 / 125 m
Bay unit (panel surface mounting)
78 terminals with connection cross-sections: max. 4 mm for stranded wires max. 7 mm for solid wires
Bay unit (panel or cubicle flush mounting)
Screw connection max. 4 mm in parallel double leafspring-crimp contact for max. 2.5 mm
Screw connection max. 1.5 mm in parallel double leafspring-crimp contact for max. 1.5 mm
Integrated FSMA plug connector for FO connection, glass fiber 62.5 / 125 m
2.4.2
2.4.2.1
Types of connections
Screw-type terminals The terminal screws are slotted screws that are turned with a screwdriver. The terminal screw heads are designed for use of a simple 6 x 1 flat screwdriver. Solid conductors or stranded conductors with end sleeves can be used. Use copper conductors only! You can use end sleeves with plastic collar (acc. to DIN 46228 part 1) that have a diameter between 0.5 mm2 and 4 mm2 (equivalent to AWG 20 to 12) and a length up to: Conductor cross-section 0.5 mm2 0.75 and 1 mm2 1.5; 2.5 and 4 mm2 Length (without collar) 10 mm 12 mm 18 mm
Terminal design
Connection system
Tools
A crimping tool should be used for end sleeves between 0.5 mm2 and 6 mm2 (equivalent to AWG 20 to 10) with or without plastic collar.
2-26
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
2.4.2.2
Double leaf-spring-crimp contacts Stranded conductors with a diameter between 1.5 mm2 and 2.5 mm2 can be used. Use copper conductors only! Use double leaf-spring-crimp contacts that match the selected conductor cross-sections.
Connection system (current terminals)
Connection system (voltage terminals)
Stranded conductors with a diameter between 0.5 mm2 and 1 mm2 can be used. Use copper conductors only! Use double leaf-spring-crimp contacts that match the selected conductor cross-sections.
Tools
The double leaf-spring-crimp contacts should be connected using a hand crimping tool.
2.4.2.3
Fiber-optic cable connections The devices have integrated FSMA plug connectors for the fiber-optic cables. FO connector type: Fiber type to be used: FSMA plug connector Multimode FO G50/125 m, G62.5/125 m, G100/140 m = approx. 820 nm
Connectors Connection system
Wavelength: Note
The smallest permissible bending radius is 90 mm.
Compliance with class 1 acc. to EN 608251 is ensured if the fiber types G50/125 m and G62.5/125 m are used.
2.4.2.4
D-SUB female connectors 9-pin D-SUB female connectors are provided for connection. All commercial 9-pin D-SUB connectors acc. to MIL-C-24308 and DIN 41652 may be used. The pin assignment is that of a RS232 interface. The 7XV5100-4 interface cable (5-wire, shielded) as connecting cable.
Connectors Connection system
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
2-27
2-28
Getting Started
This chapter describes the first steps that you should take after receiving your SIPROTEC 7SS52 system. After unpacking, please check whether the version and rated data match your requirements. For an electrical check, you can navigate in the user interface without any measured values. You can also connect the system to a PC and operate it from the computer using the DIGSI communication software. In the last section you will find hints on what to observe for a long-term storage of the system.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5
Unpacking and repacking Check of the rated data Matching of the control voltage for the binary inputs User interface Storage
3-2 3-3 3-4 3-8 3-15
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
3-1
Getting Started
3.1
Unpacking and repacking

The protection system, consisting of the central unit, the bay units and connection leads is packed in the factory such that the requirements of IEC 255-21 are fulfilled. Unpacking and repacking must be performed with the usual care, without force and only with the aid of suitable tools. The units must be visually checked to ensure that they have not been mechanically damaged. Please observe the instruction leaflet and any other documentation that may be part of the delivery, and check also that the accessories included in the delivery are complete (refer to Table A-2). The shipping packaging can be reused in the same manner for further shipment. Storage packaging alone, for individual devices, is not sufficient for shipping. If other packaging is used, shock requirements under IEC 60255211 Class 2 and IEC 60255 212 Class 1 must be met. The device should be in the final operating area for a minimum of two hours before the power source is first applied. This time allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and prevents dampness and condensation.
3-2
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Getting Started
3.2
Check of the rated data

First of all, check the complete ordering code (MLFB) of the system to ensure that the version delivered complies with the required rated data and functions, and that the necessary and desired accessories are complete. The complete ordering code can be found on the rating plate on the back of the casing. The meaning of its digits is shown in Appendix A.1. The most important point is the matching of the rated device data to the station ratings, such as rated auxiliary voltage and rated currents of the CTs. This information is also found on the rating plate.
Ordering code
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
3-3
Getting Started
3.3
Matching of the control voltage for the binary inputs

When delivered, the binary inputs are configured for 220 V rated control voltage (no jumper fitted). For each binary input of the module EFE of the bay unit or EAZ3 on position 1of the central unit, different switching thresholds can be selected by means of each 3 jumpers. The binary inputs of EAZ3 on position 2 have no function. The voltage ranges may be selected for each binary input independent of the others. The jumpers for setting the desired control voltage are listed in Table 3-1 and Figure 3-2. Only one jumper may be fitted per binary input.
Control voltage
Bay unit
Voltage plug connectors for external connection
EFE Consec. No. 70873384
Unit bus plug connector Figure 3-1 Location of the jumpers on the EFE module (bay unit)
3-4
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Getting Started
Table 3-1
Control voltage for the binary inputs on the EFE (bay unit) in relation to the fitted jumper
Control voltage setting Name BI 1 BI 2 BI 3 BI 4 BI 5 BI 6 BI 7 BI 8 BI 9 BI 10 BI 11 BI 12 BI 13 BI 14 BI 15 BI 16 BI 17 BI 18 BI 19 BI 20 24 V X37 X40 X43 X46 X49 X52 X55 X58 X61 X64 X67 X70 X73 X76 X79 X82 X85 X88 X91 X94 60 V X36 X39 X42 X45 X48 X51 X54 X57 X60 X63 X66 X69 X72 X75 X78 X81 X84 X87 X90 X93 110 V X35 X38 X41 X44 X47 X50 X53 X56 X59 X62 X65 X68 X71 X74 X77 X80 X83 X86 X89 X92 220 V -
For modifying the jumper selection, the module EFE has to be withdrawn from the casing of the bay unit (refer to Figure 2-4).
Attention!
Dangerous voltages may be present inside the device! Make sure to switch the auxiliary voltage off before opening the front cover. With the auxiliary voltage switched off, open the front cover, remove the front-side plug connector of the EFE module (refer to Figure 3-1) and withdraw the module.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
3-5
Getting Started
Central unit
EAZ Consec. No. 708 70 903
Plug connector for LED control

Figure 3-2 Location of the jumpers on the EAZ3 module (central unit)
Table 3-2
Control voltage for the binary inputs on the EAZ3 (central unit) in relation to the fitted jumper Control voltage setting Name 24 V X31 X32 X33 X34 X35 X36 X37 60 V X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 110 V X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 220 V -
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7
3-6
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Getting Started
For modifying the jumper selection, the module EAZ3 (position 1) has to be withdrawn from the subrack (central unit).
Attention!
Dangerous voltages may be present inside the device! Make sure to switch the auxiliary voltage off before opening the front cover. Open the front plate. The mounting location of EAZ3 can be seen in Figure 2-2. For withdrawing the module, remove the plug connector to the front plate and press down the locking bolt of the module at the bottom guide rail. Use the extraction handle (included in the delivery) to pull out the module. The switch S1 on this module is used to identify the position of the EAZ3 module. The corresponding setting can be seen in table Table A-9 in the Appendix.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
3-7
Getting Started
3.4
3.4.1
User interface
Setting the central unit
Via the front serial interface, comfortable communication is possible using the DIGSI communication software. The central unit can also be operated through the integrated keypad in a device-user dialogue. All parameters required for operation can be entered and all the information can be read out from here.
Operation from the PC
DIGSI V 2 communication software Version V 2.94 or higher
The DIGSI communication software provides a comfortable way of setting and monitoring the protection system using the PC. The PC is connected to the central unit via the front serial interface. Beside setting of the protection parameters and marshalling of alarms, the DIGSI software also allows analysis of the fault records which are stored in the protection. For operation of the firmware V 1.20, DIGSI V 2 version V 2.94 or higher is required.
Integrated keypad / display panel
A backlighted LC display with 4 lines of 20 characters each is provided for display. During the dialog, the upper line in the display field shows a four-digit number. This number represents the setting address, called the direct address ('$). The first two digits refer to the address block; this is followed by a two-digit address number. The backlighting is switched on by operating any key. It is switched off automatically when no key is pressed for 10 minutes. The keypad comprises 24 keys with the following meanings: Numerical keys for the input of numbers:
Digits 0 to 9 for numerical inputs
Decimal point
Change sign key: input of negative numbers
3-8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Getting Started
Function keys for text parameters:
Password: the central unit verifies the authorization of the operator by password (not required for read-out of alarms)
Backspace erasure of erroneously entered characters
Yes key: operator confirms the displayed question
No key: operator negates the displayed question operator requests an alternative to the proposed function or value
Keys for scrolling in the display:
Forward scrolling: the display shows the next operating position
Backward scrolling: the display shows the previous operating position
Forward scrolling blockwise: the display shows the beginning of the next operation block
Backward scrolling blockwise: the display shows the beginning of the previous operation block
Confirmation keys:
Enter key: Confirmation of new data after modification Acknowledge an LCD display
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
3-9
Getting Started
Control keys:
Exit the fault buffer
Start LED indication test and Reset the LED indications Direct addressing: if the address number is known, then the operation address can be selected directly
Operating prerequisites
For most operational functions, the input of a password is necessary. This applies for all entries via operator keypad or operator interface which concern the following functions: setting of operational parameters (thresholds, functions), marshalling of alarms, system design parameters for station configuration. The password is not required for the read out of event list operational data, fault data and setting values (address blocks 61 to 63).
Password entry
To indicate authorized operator use, press key F1, enter the three-digit password (see below) and confirm with the ENTER key. Password entry can also be made retrospectively when an attempt to alter a parameter is responded to with the display NOT AUTHORIZED. Note The operator authorization is disabled automatically if '$ is entered.
Passwords in DIGSI V 2.9x
Passwords: - for changing system design parameters and parameter settings (address blocks 01 to 54 and 61 to 63)
Enter Password: @@@
The entered characters do not appear in the display, instead only a symbol @ appears. After confirmation of the correct input with ENTER the display responds with 3$66: $&&(37('
Passw. accepted
PASSWORD WRONG
If the password is not correct, the display shows PASSWORD WRONG. Pressing the F1 key allows another attempt at password entry.
If the password is accepted, parameterizing can begin. In the following sections, each operational address is shown in a box and is explained.
3-10
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Getting Started
3.4.2
Setting the bay unit

Via the front serial interface, comfortable communication is possible using the DIGSI communication software. The bay unit can also be operated through the integrated keypad in a device-user dialogue.
Operation from the PC
DIGSI V 3 communication software Version V 3.34 or higher
For operation of the firmware V 1.30, DIGSI V3 version V 3.34 or higher is required. All parameters and protection information (operational and fault events, fault records) that are relevant for the busbar and circuit breaker failure protection system are administrated in the central unit. The operation function of the bay unit is used for marshalling of inputs and outputs, for starting tests, for display of measured values and events as well as for changing the parameters of the overcurrent time protection.
Integrated keypad / display panel
A backlighted LC display with 4 lines of 16 characters each is provided for display. During the dialogue, the upper line in the display field shows a four-digit number. This number represents the setting address. The first two digits refer to the address block; this is followed by a two-digit address number. The backlighting is switched on by operating any key. It is switched off automatically when no key is pressed for 10 minutes. The keypad comprises 12 keys with the following meanings: Keys for scrolling in the display:
Forward scrolling: the next operating position is shown in the display
Backward scrolling: the previous operating position is shown in the display
Forward scrolling blockwise: the beginning of the next operating block is shown in the display
Backward scrolling blockwise: the beginning of the previous operating block is shown in the display
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
3-11
Getting Started
Control keys:
Enter key: Confirmation of new data for changing the configuration or parameterizing and after entering the password Entering the next lower level of the operating tree Switch-over between ordering number and operational measured value in the 4-line mode Leaving the operating level Jump back to the next higher level in the operating tree
Execute LED test; Reset LED indications and operational measured value display in the 4-line mode not used
Functional keys:
Direct access to the operating tree for switching between the modes 6ZLWFKLQJ ED\ RXW RI VHUYLFH 6ZLWFKLQJ ED\ LQ VHUYLFH, if the bay is out of service Initiate circuit breaker test
Direct access to the operating tree for switching to the function 0DLQWHQDQFH and back
not used
Operating prerequisites and operating language
The request to enter the password appears automatically as soon as the operating tree enters branches which require a password (e.g. modification mode with parameterizing and configuration, marshalling). The input of the password is terminated by the ENTER key. Keys F1 to F3 may be used for the password. Sequence of keys: F3 - F1 - F3 - F1 - F3 - F1
User password
3-12
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Getting Started
No password is required for reading out operational data, alarms and settings.
Enter Password: @@@@@@
The entered characters do not appear in the display, instead only a symbol @ appears. After confirmation of the correct input with ENTER the display responds with 3$66: $&&(37('
Passw. accepted
If the password is not correct, the display shows

PASSWORD WRONG PASSWORD WRONG. Pressing the ENTER key twice
allows another attempt at password entry.
If the password is accepted, parameterizing can begin. In the following sections, each operational address is shown in a box and is explained. The communication language can be selected with direct address /$1*8$*( '$ )(. Optionally German or English may be chosen. The default setting is English. Figure 6-1 shows an overview for the operating tree of the bay unit. Selected settings and configuration functions can be changed by calling up blocks 1100 1200 1500 2800 3900 6000 7100 7200 7400 7800 8100 8200 9800 Power system data Overcurrent protection phase 1 Overcurrent protection earth 1 Delay of user-defined annunciations Circuit breaker failure protection of backup protection Marshalling of binary inputs and outputs Integrated operation PC / System interfaces Fault recordings Scope of functions Setting real time clock Reset System control
1 optional (backup protection) Test and control functions are available under the block address 4000 Tests
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
3-13
Getting Started
Change of settings and executing control functions require entering of the user password. The annunciations, fault records and the CB operating statistics can be called up under block address . In bay units with overcurrent protection operational and fault annunciations can be called up under address to . 5000 5100 5200 5300 5400 5600 Annunciations Operational annunciations Last fault 2nd to last fault 3rd to last fault CB operating statistics
Operational measured values can be displayed under block address 5700 Operational measured values
3-14
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Getting Started
3.5
Storage
If parts of the system are not used immediately, they can be stored after verification of the rated data. The following storage conditions should be observed: SIPROTEC devices should be stored in dry and clean rooms. For storage of devices or related spare modules the applicable temperature range is between 25 C and +70 C (refer also to Table 9-8). It is recommended to limit the temperature range for storage to values between +10 C and +35 C in order to avoid early ageing of the electrolytic capacitors in the power supplies. The relative humidity must not cause condensation or ice. Furthermore it is recommended to connect the devices (bay unit and power supply of the central unit) every two years to auxiliary voltage, so that the electrolytic capacitors in the power supplies are formatted. The same procedure should be followed before installing these devices. In case of extreme climatic conditions (tropical), this pre-heats the device and avoids condensation. After long storage, power should not be applied until the device has been in the operating area for a minimum of two hours. This time period allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and prevents the formation of dampness and condensation.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
3-15
3-16
Mode of Operation
This chapter explains the various functions of the SIPROTEC 7SS52 and shows the setting possibilities for each functions. It also gives information and - where required formulae for determination of the setting values. The settings are made either from the keypad of the central and bay unit or by means of the DIGSI communication software.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
Busbar protection Isolator replica Circuit-breaker failure protection Backup protection in the bay unit Ancillary functions
4-2 4-15 4-20 4-33 4-36
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-1
Mode of Operation
4.1
Busbar protection
The busbar protection represents the main function of the 7SS52. It is characterized by a high measurement accuracy and flexible matching to the existing station configurations. It is supplemented by a series of ancillary functions. The measurement methods described here below apply for the check zone as well as for the bus-selective protection.
4.1.1
Basic principle
The measurement method relies on Kirchhoffs current law. This law states that the vectorial sum of all currents flowing into a closed area must be zero. This law applies, in the first instance, to DC current. It applies to AC current for instantaneous values. Thus, the sum of the currents in all feeders of a busbar must be zero at any instant in time.
I1
I2
I3
......
In
Figure 4-1
Busbar with n feeders
Assuming that the currents I1, I2, I3 to In flow in the feeders (Figure 4-1) connected to the busbar, the following equation applies in the fault-free condition (the currents flowing towards the busbar are defined as positive, and the currents flowing away from the busbar as negative): I1 + I2 + I3 ... + In = 0 (1)
If this equation is not fulfilled, there must be some other - impermissible - path through which a current flows. This means that there is a fault in the busbar region. This law is superior, as the basis for busbar protection, to any other known way of measurement. A single quantity, the sum of currents, characterizes and can be used to detect faulty conditions. This sum of all currents can be formed at any time and if formed as such, using instantaneous current values, full use of above law can be made. The current sum used for evaluation is available at any instant without interruption and stays at zero, unless there is another path due to a fault whose current is not measured.
4-2
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
The above considerations apply strictly to the primary conditions in a high-voltage switching station. Protection systems, however, cannot carry out direct measurements of currents in high-voltage systems. Protection equipment measurement systems, performing the current comparisons, are connected through current transformers. The secondary windings provide the currents scaled down according to the transformation ratio while retaining the same phase relation. Furthermore, the current transformers, due to the isolation of their secondary circuits from the high-voltage system and by appropriate earthing measures, can keep dangerous high voltages away from the protection system. The current transformers are an essential part of the whole protection system and their characteristics are an important factor for the correct operation of the protection. Their physical locations mark the limits of the protection zone covered by the protection system. Since the current transformers transform in direct proportion to the primary currents (Iprim.) in the station, the following equation applies for the busbar protection in the fault-free condition: I1 sec. n1 + I2 sec. n2 + I3 sec. n3 ... + In sec. nn = 0 n1, n2, n3 ... nn are the CT transformation ratios and Iprim./Isec and I1 sec., I2 sec. ... In sec. are the secondary currents. Although such a busbar protection would certainly detect any short-circuit inside the protection zone, the transformation errors of the current transformers, which are unavoidable to some degree, are also liable to cause spurious tripping as a result of an external short-circuit. In that case, for instance with a close-up fault on one of the feeder bays, the current flowing into the short-circuit is shared on the infeed side by several bays. The current transformers in the infeeding bays carry only a fraction of the total fault current while the current transformer in the faulted feeder bay carries the full current in its primary winding. If the fault current is very high, this set of current transformers may therefore be saturated, so tending to deliver only a fraction of the actual current on the secondary side while the rest of the current transformers, due to the distribution of currents among several bays, perform properly. Although the sum of the currents is zero on the primary side, the sum of the currents in equation (2) is now no longer zero. In conventional differential protection systems where the sum of the currents is zero on the primary side, for busbars and similar objects, this difficulty is countered by employment of the so-called stabilization (restraining) devices. If the short-circuit does not occur at the voltage peak of the cycle, a DC component is initially superimposed on the short-circuit current which decays with a time constant = L / R of the impedance from source to fault. With the growing output ratings of the generator units, these time constants in the supply system tend to grow longer. A superimposed DC component speeds up the magnetic saturation in the transformer cores, thus considerably affecting the transformation task. Several measures - some of which are already known from the conventional protection - have been introduced into the measuring system of the busbar protection 7SS52 to cope with these problems. They supplement the basic principle of monitoring the summation (differential) current. It was thus possible to give the busbar protection system 7SS52 a maximum degree of security against spurious operation for external short-circuits while ensuring, in the event of internal short-circuits, that a tripping signal is initiated within the very short time of less than a half-cycle. (2)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-3
Mode of Operation
The measuring circuit of the busbar protection system 7SS52 is characterized by the following features: Basic principle: Monitoring the sum of the currents as the tripping quantity Measures taken to guard against the disturbing influences due to current-transformer saturation: Stabilization (against large through currents) Separate evaluation of each half-wave (particularly effective against DC components) Measures taken to obtain short tripping times: Separate evaluation of the current transformer currents during the first milliseconds after the occurrence of a fault (anticipating the current transformer saturation).
4.1.2
4.1.2.1
Algorithm with instantaneous values

Stabilization The stabilization has the function of reducing the influence on the measurement of transformation inaccuracies in the various feeders to such a degree that spurious behavior of the protection system is prevented. The busbar protection 7SS52 solves this problem by forming both the vectorial sum of the CT secondary currents which acts in the operating sense as well as the arithmetic sum of those quantities which has a restraining effect.
E function with time constant
= 64 ms
mod
t
Figure 4-2 Formation of the stabilizing current
4.1.2.2
Characteristic The operating conditions for the busbar protection vary considerably between one plant and the other, as do the setup and the switching possibilities of the individual stations. For instance, the range between the lowest and the highest currents to be expected in case of a short-circuit is different for each plant. Another important factor are the data and burdens of the CTs available for connecting the protection system. Finally, the treatment of the starpoint in the high-voltage system has some importance for the design and setting of the protection. For all these reasons, the busbar protection system has to offer a high degree of flexibility. The standard characteristic is determined by the two settable parameters Stabilization factor k and Differential current limit I>DIFF.
4-4
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
Fault characteristic
k = 0.8 k = 0.65 k = 0.5 Pick-up characteristics
Figure 4-3
Pick-up characteristic
The vectorial sum I = | I1 + I2 ... + In | as the tripping quantity is counterbalanced by the restraining quantity | I | = | I1 | + | I2 | ... + | In | which is the arithmetic sum of the magnitudes of each current. The criterion for a short-circuit on the busbar is thus: | I1 + I2 ... + In | > k . | I | mod The modified stabilizing quantity | I | mod is derived from | I | and is illustrated in Figure 4-2. Normal load line Figure 4-3 illustrates the characteristic of a stabilized (restrained) differential protection system. In the diagram, the abscissa represents the sum | I | mod of the magnitudes of all quantities flowing through the busbar while the vectorial sum I is plotted as the ordinate. Both axes use rated current as the unit and both have the same scale. If a short-circuit occurs on the busbars whereby the same phase relation applies to all infeeding currents, then I = | I |. The fault characteristic is a straight line inclined at 45. Any difference in phase relation of the fault currents leads to a (practically insignificant) lowering of the fault characteristic. Since in fault-free operation I = 0, the x-axis may be referred to as the normal load line. The selectable stabilizing factors, e.g. k = 0.50, 0.65, 0.80 for the bus-section specific busbar protection or 0 to 0.8 for the check zone, are represented as three straight lines with corresponding gradient and form the operating characteristic. The measuring system determines whether the total of all currents supplied by the current transformers represents a point in the diagram above or below the set characteristic line. If the point lies above that line, tripping is initiated.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-5
Mode of Operation
Earth fault characteristic
For the detection of high-resistance earth faults, tripping characteristics with increased sensitivity are provided for the selective protection zones, the check zone and circuit breaker failure. These more sensitive characteristics have their own parameters, ,!',)()66 '$ =( (minimum current IDIFF) and ,67$()66 '$ =( (if ISTAB < ,67$() the more sensitive characteristic is applied). The stabilizing factor is identical with the normal load line. To switch over between the characteristics, a marshallable binary input in the central unit, block EF characteristic or Release EF characteristic, is provided.
Zone of increased sensibility Normal load line Stabilizing current

Figure 4-4 Earth fault characteristic
4.1.2.3
Separate evaluation of half-cycles At the instant a short-circuit occurs, the current is usually not symmetrical about the zero line. The peak values of the two half cycles differ to an extent which depends on the time instant on the cycle when the short-circuit began. The short-circuit current contains a DC component which decays according to the function e -t/. The time constant is a function of the source impedance. Values of approximately 60 ms are frequently encountered in high-voltage systems while 100 ms and more may be reached in the vicinity of large generators. Such DC components make it substantially more difficult for the current transformers to perform their function of transformation since such components increasingly polarize the iron core. Figure 4-5 illustrates the condition in the extreme case of an initially fully offset shortcircuit current. An additional problem in this case is remanence of the current transformer under consideration (remanence, for instance after an auto-reclosure), which is presumed to be present in this case. Figure 4-5 a) depicts the initially fully offset current. The DC component at the beginning is equal to the peak value of the short-circuit AC current and decays at the rate of = 60 ms. The current flows through the current transformer which, under the conditions assumed to be present, would just be able to carry the AC current without saturation if the AC current and thus the magnetic flux in the iron core were not offset. However, on account of the superimposed DC component and the unfavorable magnetic flux at the instant of short-circuit inception, the current transformer will be saturated after about 6 ms. The magnetic flux cannot rise any more. The current transformer no longer delivers current on the secondary side. Only after the zero-crossing of the
4-6
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
current is transmission to the secondary side again possible on account of the opposite current direction. After that, the currents shown in Figure 4-5 below the axis are correctly transformed. However, the current transformer is only able to transform the current above the axis to an extent that the current/time area is equal to that of the preceding half-cycle below the axis. Figure 4-5 b) illustrates the formation of the measured value according to the measurement algorithm employed in the 7SS52 assuming an external short-circuit. The current thus flows through at least two current transformers. One of them is assumed to be able to give a correct replica of the current whereas the other exhibits a behavior as under Figure 4-5 a). With the stabilizing factor k = 0,65 a tripping condition occurs about 8 ms after inception of the short-circuit. This condition persists for about 4 ms before the restraint prevails again. The reversed current after zero current crossing does not make itself felt in the tripping sense since correct transformation is present. The second half-wave, however, again brings about a tripping condition which now lasts for about 7 ms. Due to the continuing decay of the DC component and recovery of the previously saturated current transformer, the tripping quantity subsequently does not reach the magnitude of the stabilizing quantity.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-7
Mode of Operation
b1) Formation of measured values for an external short-circuit
b2) Formation of measured values for an external short-circuit with smoothed stabilizing current
c) Formation of measured values for an internal short-circuit
Figure 4-5
CT currents and measured values in the event of an initially fully offset fault current; DC component decaying with = 60 ms
4-8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
Figure 4-5 c) illustrates the formation of the measured value on the assumption that the current flows into a short-circuit within the protection zone via the current transformer with the behavior illustrated under Figure 4-5 a). The stabilization factor k is again assumed to be 0.65. In this case the tripping quantity prevails right from the beginning of the short circuit. But since the current transformer saturates, the tripping quantity disappears after 6 ms; the opposite half-cycle will have no tripping effect. In the following two cycles, a tripping condition will only occur for the current direction which is favored by the offset. As the process proceeds, the current sets up a tripping condition in all half-cycles. A comparison of the measured values in cases b (external short-circuit) and c (internal short-circuit) shows, besides a temporary similarity, two essential discriminating features: After a few cycles - when the DC component has decayed somewhat - each halfwave, i.e. the current in both directions, delivers a correct measured value according to the fault location. At the inception of the short-circuit (usually at least for a quarter of a cycle) the correct measured value is formed according to the fault location. These two facts are utilized by the numerical busbar protection 7SS52 to distinguish between external and internal short-circuits. This is particularly valuable when large short-circuit currents and DC components severely saturate the current transformers forcing the protection to operate under severely aggravated conditions. A sophisticated combination of the above two distinguishing features stabilizes the operating characteristics of the digital busbar protection 7SS52 even under extremely difficult conditions, namely: high degree of stability even during current transformer saturation short tripping times for internal short-circuits correct behavior and proper response to evolving faults ease of commissioning and determination of setting values At first glance, the stability in the event of external short-circuits appears to be jeopardized by the current conditions shown in Figure 4-5 b). The tripping quantity markedly exceeds the restraining quantity on two occasions. The 7SS52 includes a logic which enables the protection to decide according to the facts outlined above whether tripping should be initiated after either one or two measurements.
4.1.2.4
Weighted evaluation of the initial values For normal load currents, the magnetic flux in the current transformers iron circuit is relatively small. It is of the order of, at most, a few percent of that value at which the iron saturation begins. This design makes the achievement of high overcurrent factors possible which are needed for the proper behavior of the associated relay equipment during large short-circuits currents. Since the magnetic flux under normal conditions is low, a certain time will elapse after short-circuit inception, even under extreme conditions (very large short-circuit current, large DC component with a long time constant) before the magnetic flux in the iron core reaches the saturation level. This process, in both conventional current transformers with a closed iron core as well as in linearized current transformers with an air gap in their cores, will typically last from a quarter-cycle to a half-cycle.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-9
Mode of Operation
Since the current transformers transform accurately according to ratio before saturation, the secondary currents during the first milliseconds after inception of a short-circuit has the most conclusive information. For this reason, the busbar protection 7SS52 has software logic which detects the inception of a short-circuit from the currents and determines whether an external or internal short-circuit is present. To do so, it determines the differential quotient d [ | I | ] / dt of the stabilizing magnitude and compares it to a limit value. When that limit value is exceeded, the characteristic condition (Figure 4-3) is checked. If the tripping condition is fulfilled, the protection trips after one measurement (1-outof-1) within 3 ms. If it is not, two measurements are performed (2-out-of-2) and a trip initiated in the presence of an internal fault. If the measured result indicates an external fault, the 2-out-of-2 mode is maintained for 150 ms by blocking of this changeover.
4.1.3
Algorithm with filtered values

The protection logic eliminates any DC components in the differential current by calculating its fundamental wave. This increases the accuracy in the case of relatively small, offset differential currents and reduces the protection tripping times. The value of the differential current fundamental wave is determined by means of sinus and cosinus filters. The stabilizing current is calculated on the basis of the summated rectified mean values of the feeder currents. This part of the algorithm makes also use of the characteristics described in chapter 4.1.2. The filter algorithm operates in parallel to the instantaneous values algorithm, so that both algorithms can initiate a trip independently of one another. In the presence of an external fault, the filter algorithm is blocked for 150 ms by the instantaneous values algorithm to avoid the risk of spurious tripping in case of highly saturated differential currents (refer also to Figure 4-8).
4.1.4
Summary of the measuring method

The measuring method of the busbar protection can be summarized as follows: Tripping occurs when I > set limit and I > k . | I | and release from 1-out-of-1, 2-out-of-2 or filter algorithm The measuring method is illustrated in Figures 4-6, 4-7 and 4-8.
4-10
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
d [ | | ] / dt > Limit value ?
TRIP after one measurement
Measured value supervision picked up?
Diff-current supervision picked up? External fault
150 ms
Blocking of the filter algorithm
Figure 4-6
Logic diagram for TRIP following 1-out-of-1 evaluation
Measured value supervision picked up?
Time window 1
Diff-current supervision picked up?
Time window 2
TRIP after two measurements
Figure 4-7
Logic diagram for TRIP following 2-out-of-2 evaluation
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-11
Mode of Operation
: Fundamental (sin / cos filter)
: Mean rectified value Measured value supervision picked up? Diff-current supervision picked up?
&
TRIP due to filtered value
Blocking of the filter algorithm (refer to Fig. 4-6)
Figure 4-8
Logic diagram for TRIP due to filtered value
4.1.5
Special treatment of the stabilizing current for the check zone

Busbar protection via the check zone comprises all bays (with the exception of the bus coupler) regardless of isolator status. In some special cases, isolator status must however be considered for the check zone. If the stabilizing current is calculated in the same manner as for the bus-section specific busbar protection, overstabilization results in multiple busbar systems since the bays which are not connected to the faulty busbar strongly stabilize the protection. Therefore, the stabilizing current is calculated as follows: | Ip | = sum of the magnitudes of the currents which flow in the direction of the busbar | In | = sum of the magnitudes of the currents which flow away from the busbar Istab = lesser of the above two sums. By forming the stabilizing current in this manner, only half of the total through-flowing load current acts as stabilizing current. The short-circuit current does not stabilize the check zone and only acts as differential current. This procedure is illustrated in Figure 4-9.
BZ1 BZ2
I1
I2
I3
I4
I3+ I4
Figure 4-9
Treatment of the check zone
4-12
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
I = | I1 + I2 + I3 + I4 - I3 - I4 | = | I1 + I2 | Normal stabilizing current without special treatment: Istab = | I1 | + | I2 | + | I3 | + | I4 | + | I3 + I4 | Load currents I3 and I4 are considered twice in the stabilizing current, which leads to overstabilization. Special treatment of the stabilizing current results in the following conditions: | Ip | = | I1 | + | I2 | + | I3 | + | I4 | | In | = | I3 + I4 | Istab = | In | = | I3 + I4 |; is equal to half the magnitude of the load current. This stabilizing current is modified for evaluation of the characteristic as mentioned in chapter 4.1.2.1. Due to the phase angle differences between short-circuit current and load currents differences may occur in the formation of the sums.
4.1.6
Bus coupler variants

Most large busbar configurations are divided into different sections which constitute autonomous subsystems, zones or measuring systems that can be selectively protected. The subsystems are connected by bus couplers so that the configuration can assume all required operating states. Depending on the number of current transformers and the type of switching element, a bus coupler can have the following design variants:
1- bay coupler
2- bay coupler
1- bay coupler without circuit breaker
2- bay coupler (more than 5 isolators)
Figure 4-10 Examples of bus coupler variants
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-13
Mode of Operation
4.1.6.1
Bus coupler with one current transformer Bus couplers with circuit breaker and one current transformer (refer to Figure 4-10) are the most common variant. The low cost of this economical solution is offset by the disadvantage of a delayed trip of the faulted subsystem if a fault occurs in the dead zone with the coupler closed. The dead zone is understood to be the bus zone between the circuit breaker and the current transformer. With the coupler open, the detection of the circuit breaker status ensures selective tripping without delay.
1-bay coupler
In the 7SS52 protection system, one bay unit is needed for this type of bus coupler. The configuration parameter 7<3( %;; '$ ;;=( must be set to EXVFRXS %D\.
4.1.6.2
Bus couplers with two current transformers Bus couplers can also have two current transformers, one on each side of the circuit breaker. The allocation of the currents to the subsystems overlaps in that case (refer to Figure 4-10). The advantage of this design is that in case of a fault between the two current transformers both subsystems are tripped promptly, if not selectively. With the coupler open, the evaluation of the circuit breaker status ensures selective and undelayed tripping for this coupler variant as well.
2-bay coupler
In the 7SS52 protection system, two bay units are needed for this type of bus coupler. The configuration parameter 7<3( %;; '$ ;;=( must be set to EXVFRXS %D\.
4.1.6.3
Bus couplers without circuit breaker For cost reasons, bus sections are sometimes not connected by circuit breakers but by switch-isolators (refer to Figure 4-10), e.g. in case of auxiliary busbars for bypass operation. In order to determine nevertheless the affected section in case of fault, the current is measured at the coupling point. Tripping, however, must always be performed for the entire system. The configuration parameter 7<3( %;; '$ ;; =( must be set to %D\%XV&RXS1R&%.
4.1.6.4
Bus couplers with more than 5 isolators Each bay unit can handle up to 5 isolators. If a coupler comprises more than 5 isolators, two bay units are needed even in configurations with only one current transformer (EXVFRXS %D\).
4-14
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.2
Isolator replica
The allocation of the feeders to the busbar sections is determined by the position of the isolators. Only the OPEN position is evaluated for the allocation of the feeders to the busbars. The CLOSED position is only used for the isolator status supervision (isolator malfunction, isolator intermediate position). Figure 4-11 shows the basic connection scheme.
Bay unit OPEN
CLOSED
Figure 4-11 Isolator status indications
The isolator states are indicated in the bay units by red or green LEDs. The preselection can be seen in chapter 6.3.4. The isolator replica of the entire plant can be visualized in table and in diagram form on the central unit using the DIGSI communication software.
4.2.1
4.2.1.1
Treatment of the isolator status indications

Preferential treatment during busbar coupling via isolators If two busbars are solidly linked via the isolators of one feeder, all feeders which are connected to the linked busbars are allocated to a preferred busbar protection measuring system. In any case, the busbar section with the lowest number is considered to be preferred. At the same time, the coupler bay is taken out of the allocation list with respect to the currents.
4.2.1.2
Processing of the isolator running status If an isolator changes position, for instance from the OPEN position, a certain time (isolator running time) is required before the other position, in this instance the CLOSED position, is reached. During this running time, the isolator is considered to be in the CLOSED position. This intermediate status is monitored. If after a set isolator running time '$ =( no checkback signal is given, the isolator assumes faulty status and an alarm is created by the central unit per isolator (",VROL)OW UXQ%;;"; e.g. for isolator 3 )1R =().
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-15
Mode of Operation
4.2.1.3
Auxiliary voltage supply failure Usually, the isolator auxiliary voltage is sub-fused in each bay. If the auxiliary voltage is missing, then all the isolators in this bay display the bit pattern 0/0 (neither OPEN nor CLOSED). By cross-checking with the other isolator positions, this fault condition can be detected. An alarm "%D\ '& IDLO%;;" )1R =( is output. The bay with the faulted isolator is either assigned the old positions according to the busbar protection (flip-flop relay characteristic) or all isolators of this bay are considered to be CLOSED. The type of treatment can be chosen via the parameter %$< '& )$,/ '$ =(.
4.2.1.4
Wire breakage In the event of short-circuits in the feeders, the busbar protection remains stable when wire breakage occurs. In that case the isolator is considered to be CLOSED (refer to Table 4-1). However, non-selective busbar disconnection may occur in the event of wire breakage when the isolator is in the OPEN position, the fault occurs on one bus and the second isolator of the feeder is in the CLOSED position. The non-selective disconnection is caused by the preferential treatment. The non-selective disconnection can be prevented by additional measures such as by interlocking the TRIP command with the integrated overcurrent monitoring or by monitoring the pick-up of the feeder protection. Such wire breakages are annunciated in the central unit of the 7SS52 as isolator malfunction status (",VROL)OW UXQ%;;"; e.g. for isolator 3 )1R =(). The meaning of the isolator status indications is shown in the following table.
Table 4-1
Isolator status indications Meaning Reaction
Isolator status indication CLOSED 1 0 1 OPEN 0 1 1
Isolator CLOSED Isolator OPEN Isolator malfunction Alarm ",VROL)OW SOD%;;" actual isolator status according to setting '$ =( Alarm ",VROL)OW UXQ%;;" actual isolator status CLOSED Alarm "%D\ '& IDLO%;;" (refer to chapter 4.2.1.3) actual isolator status according to setting '$ =(
Isolator malfunction
Isolators malfunctions (status or runtime errors) and failure of the auxiliary voltage supply for the isolator checkback signals are not annunciated until the set isolator running time '$ =( has elapsed. The isolator supervision alarms are described in detail in chapter 4.5.9.4.
4-16
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.2.2
Bypass transfer-busbar operation

During transfer operation, the feeder connected to the bypass busbar is replaced in the allocation list by the bus coupler. Monitoring of the isolator states in the feeder and coupling bays ensures that the feeder is substituted in the allocation list by the coupler only after the bus or feeder isolator had been opened. Up to the final bypass operation, intermediate switching positions occur. The allocation of the respective feeder to the busbar section during this time depends on the current transformer location (EXV VLGH or OLQH VLGH, refer to 5.2.5). Fig. 5-2 shows the plant configuration with transfer bus. The busbar allocation of the feeders are summarized in Table 4-2. Normally the check zone measurement (non bus-selective overall busbar protection) does not require any isolator status information. The couplers current, however, has to be included in the check zone measurement, if a feeder with internal CT is connected to the transfer bus.
Table 4-2
Allocation of a feeder to a busbar section
1. Feeder and bus coupler on different busbars

Feeder Bus coupler BZA BZB Bus-side CT Bay/ CT Meas. system
BZA
BZB Bus coupler Bus coupler
TB Bus coupler Bus coupler
Check zone Feeder Feeder
Line-side Bus-side
Feeder Feeder
TB
Line-side CT (a) Transfer (bypass) bus under voltage
BZA BZB Bay/ CT
Meas. system
BZA Feeder, bus coup. Feeder
TB
Check zone
Line-side TB Bus-side
Connected Feeder to BZA no protection Feeder & bus coup.
(b) Feeder simultaneously on transfer (bypass) and main bus
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-17
Mode of Operation
BZA BZB Bay/ CT
Meas. system
BZA
TB Feeder, bus coup. no protection
Check zone Feeder Bus coupler
The current being fed by the feeder or into the feeder cannot be measured. (c) Final condition, transfer (bypass) operation
2. Feeder and bus coupler on the same busbar section

Feeder Bus coupler BZA BZB Bus-side CT Bay/ CT Meas. system
BZA Feeder, bus coup. Feeder, bus coup.
BZB
TB Bus coupler Bus coupler
Check zone Feeder Feeder
Line-side Bus-side
TB
Line-side CT (a) Transfer (bypass) bus under voltage
BZA BZB Bay/ CT
Meas. system
BZA Feeder Feeder, bus coup.
BZB
TB
Check zone
Connected Feeder to BZA no protection Feeder, bus coup.
(b) Feeder simultaneously on transfer (bypass) and main bus

BZA BZB Bay/ CT Meas. system
BZA Feeder Feeder
BZB
TB Feeder, bus coup. no protection
Check zone Feeder Bus coupler
The current being fed by the feeder or into the feeder cannot be measured. (c) Final condition, transfer (bypass) operation
4-18
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.2.3
Recognition of the feeder isolator status

With parallel feeders and line-side CTs as seen from Q9, a differential current may occur if one feeder was earthed and an earth fault occurs on the parallel feeder (Figure 4-12). The protection sees a current in the zero sequence system of the earthed feeder. Integrating the feeder isolator (Q9) into the isolator logic prevents spurious tripping by the 7SS52.
Figure 4-12 Parallel feeders
The status of the feeder isolator (Q9) in the feeder bay can be processed by setting the parameter %%,62%;; '$ ;;=(. Isolator 5 can only be configured as line isolator in the case of an outgoing feeder. If isolator 5 is configured as line isolator, then the feeder bay is considered to be allocated to a bus section if the corresponding bus isolator and the feeder isolator are CLOSED. Bay-specific settings All parameters of the circuit breaker failure protection function can be set individually for each bay. This allows to match the function to different types of bays (e.g. line, transformer) or short-circuit conditions (low-current faults).
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-19
Mode of Operation
4.3
Circuit-breaker failure protection

The circuit-breaker failure protection in the 7SS52 detects a failure of the circuit-breaker either in the event of a feeder short-circuit or a busbar short-circuit. In the event of a circuit breaker failure with a feeder short-circuit, the bus section to which the feeder with the defective breaker is allocated, is selectively isolated. In addition a transfer trip (intertrip) signal is issued in order to trip the remote feeder terminal, too. The available operating modes are described in chapter 4.3.1. Each mode can be set selectively for each bay. Thus the function can be matched optimally to existing conditions (type of bay, short-circuit currents etc.). In the event of a circuit breaker failure with a busbar short-circuit, the infeed from the remote feeder terminal has to be interrupted. For this purpose the 7SS52 issues a transfer trip signal. The only operating mode used here is the unbalanced mode. For the detection of high-resistance earth faults, tripping characteristics with increased sensitivity are provided for the selective protection zones, the check zone and circuit breaker failure. These more sensitive characteristics have their own parameters, ,!',)()66 '$ =( (minimum current IDIFF) and ,67$ ()66 '$ =( (if ISTAB < ,67$() the more sensitive characteristic is applied). The stabilizing factor is identical with the normal load line. To switch over between the characteristics, a marshallable binary input in the central unit, block EF characteristic or Release EF characteristic, is used.
Zone of increased sensibility Normal load line Stabilizing current

Figure 4-13 Earth fault characteristic
4-20
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.3.1
Circuit-breaker failure protection during a feeder short-circuit

If a circuit breaker failure occurs after a feeder short-circuit, the bus section with the corresponding feeder has to be isolated. The breaker failure protection in the 7SS52 is activated by a TRIP command from the feeder protection, which has a single-pole connection to the binary inputs &%) /[ )1R )( or a threepole connection to the binary input &%) SROH )1R )( of the bay unit. Different time stages are used for single-/multi-pole initiation: for single-pole initiation: 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( for multi-pole initiation: 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( The following reaction by the protection system 7SS52 depends on the operation mode %)2302'%;; '$ ;;=(, selected for each feeder. The following variants of CBF operation are utilized:
Operating modes
Current sensor I>query (1-stage CBF) TRIP repetition with subsequent I>query (2-stage CBF) BZ unbalance (1-stage CBF) TRIP repetition with subsequent unbalance (2-stage CBF) TRIP from external CBF
2-stage CBF
In the 2-stage CBF operating modes, a second bay-selective TRIP command is output by the bay unit after the - usually short - delay 7755(3 '$ ;;=( has elapsed to provide in any case for a trip of the circuit breaker. This can be useful, for instance, if the circuit breaker has a second trip coil or a control circuit that is separate from the bay protection. Only after an unfruitful TRIP repetition is the affected busbar section disconnected. All parameters of the circuit breaker failure protection function can be set individually for each bay. This allows to match the function to different types of bays (e.g. line, transformer) or short-circuit conditions (low-current faults). The parameter %)%,02'%;; '$ ;;=( defines for all feeders whether the CBF initiation is triggered only by the feeder-selective binary input with or without supervision (1-channel), or rather after additional evaluation of a second binary input (Release BF) with or without supervision (2-channel). The 2-channel initiation increases the security of the circuit breaker failure protection function. The function of the additionally selectable supervision is explained in chapter 4.5.9.6. The TRIP command is always supplemented by a transfer trip command.
Bay-specific settings
CBF release
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-21
Mode of Operation
>CBF L1 Initiation L1
>CBF L2
Initiation L2
Initiation L3 >CBF L3
Initiation 3-pole
>CBF 3-pole
Figure 4-14 Initiation by binary input
4-22
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
I>BF
I>BF-EF
>Release EF charac.
Current release L1
Current release L2
Current release L3
Current release 1-pole
Current release L1-L2
Figure 4-15 Current release
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-23
Mode of Operation
Pulse mode
T-BF-1P
Initiation Lx
T-CBFAU
CBF TRIP L 123 (busbar-selective)
>CB not ready Current release Lx T-BF-3P
BB intertrip (feeder-selective)
Initiation 3-pole
T-CBFAU
BFOPMOD I>query Trip rep/I>quer BZ unbalance Trip rep/unbal External T-TRREP BZ unbalance
CBF Trp.rp.3p (feeder-selective) T-TRREP TRIPREP 3-pole 1-pole CBF Trp.rp.3p (feeder-selective)
CBF Trip L 123 (busbar-selective) Current release 3-pole T-BFIMP BB intertrip (feeder-selective) Pulse mode
>CBF puls
CBF Trip L 123 (feeder-selective)
Figure 4-16 All operating modes and backup protection function
4-24
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.3.1.1
I>query Initiation of the circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) function is effected by the TRIP command from the feeder protection. In the operating mode ,!TXHU\ (%)2302'%;; '$ ;;=(), the feeder current is monitored for exceeding the threshold ,!%) %;; '$ ;;=( in the course of the delay time T%)3%;; '$ ;;=( or 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=(. When this condition is fulfilled, the 7SS52 issues a three-phase TRIP command to isolate the bus section with the feeder that has initiated the CBF after the time 7%) has elapsed. The course of the delay time 7%) is interrupted when the current drops below the set threshold.
4.3.1.2
TRIP repeat / I>query In the mode WULS UHS (%)2302'%;; '$ ;;=(), the related bay unit issues a phase-selective or 3-phase TRIP command after the TRIP repetition time 7755(3%;; '$ ;;=( has elapsed and if the release criterion is fulfilled. The TRIP repetition time must be shorter than the CBF time delays 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( and 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=(. The condition for a single-phase TRIP repetition is that both the feeder current in the CBF-initiating phase and the earth current exceed the threshold ,!%)()%;; '$ ;; (ILx & IE). Here the parameter 75,35(3%;; '$ ;;=( must be set to VLQJOHSKDVH. For three-phase TRIP repetition, the parameter must be set to WKUHHSKDVH. Regardless of the above setting, a three-phase trip repetition is always issued if the current limit is exceeded in two or in all three phases. In addition at least 2 currents must exceed the current threshold for two-phase or three-phase CBF initiation [(ILx & ILy) v (ILx & IE)]; ,!%) %;; '$ ;;=( or ,!%)()%;; '$ ;;=(. If the circuit breaker trips correctly, the initiation and thus the CBF function resets. If the CBF initiation persists, then the time delay of the CBF 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( or 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( elapses. In conformity with the actual isolator replica, all feeders are tripped, which are allocated to the bus section of the CBF initiating bay unit. A further condition is that the current threshold ,!%) %;; '$ ;;=(, which can be set individually for each feeder, is exceeded during the total time period 7%).
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-25
Mode of Operation
4.3.1.3
Unbalancing This operating mode is selected by setting the parameter %)2302'%;; '$ ;; =( to %= XQEDODQFH. This operating mode yields the following essential advantages: For tripping a busbar section, the same algorithm is used as busbar protection measuring. No special demands are made on the reset time of the feeder protection; i.e. even with a longer reset time, there is no danger of spurious tripping since the circuitbreaker has interrupted the current and a differential current is not formed by the unbalancing. After initiation of the breaker failure protection (CBF Lx / CBF L123) by the TRIP command from the feeder protection, the delay time 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( or 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( is started. If the CBF initiation is still active after the time 7%) has elapsed, the polarity of the feeder current in the protection algorithm is changed (unbalancing). If the TRIP criterion and the current sensor criterion are fulfilled, then a three-phase TRIP command is issued to all feeders of the affected bus section without any further current monitoring. The principle of unbalancing is depicted in Figure 4-17. Unbalancing causes a differential current of twice the magnitude of the current in the CBF initiating feeder.
Differential current before unbalance TRIP by feeder protection Differential current after unbalance Binary input CBF
Figure 4-17 Principle of unbalancing circuit-breaker failure protection
The operating mode unbalancing has two separate parameter sets, one for singlepole earth faults and one for multi-pole faults. The sensitive earth fault characteristic is released by a binary input in the central unit. Figure 4-18 shows the characteristics and the settings.
4-26
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
Zone of increased sensibility

Figure 4-18 Characteristic for circuit breaker failure protection with unbalancing
4.3.1.4
TRIP repetition / unbalancing The operating mode WULS UHSXQEDO (%)2302' '$ ;;=() also uses the unbalancing described in chapter 4.3.1.3. Before all feeders of the bus zone with the CBF initiating bay unit are tripped three-phase, the TRIP command is repeated as described in chapter 4.3.1.2.
4.3.1.5
Initiation by external CBF In this operating mode, an external device detects a circuit breaker failure. On activation of the configured binary inputs of the bay unit, the busbar to which the bay with the faulted circuit breaker is connected is tripped without delay from the central unit on the basis of the isolator replica: "!&%) /" )1R , "!&%) /" )1R , "!&%) /" )1R or "!&%) SROH" )1R .
4.3.1.6
Low-current mode In the presence of low-current faults (e.g. trip by the Buchholz protection of the transformer), the necessary threshold for a current-controlled mode may not be reached. Therefore, it is not ensured that the circuit breaker failure protection is activated. The low-current mode ensures that circuit breaker failure protection is provided nevertheless. After a set time 7%) ,%;; '$ ;;=( has elapsed, and if the circuit breaker is CLOSED, a busbar TRIP command for the affected busbar section is issued. The low-current mode is activated and deactivated with a bay-selective parameter %) ,%;; '$ ;;=(.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-27
Mode of Operation
The low-current mode can be combined with the following settings: %)%,02'%;; '$ ;;=( Number of channels with/without supervision %)2302'%;; '$ ;;=( Operating mode of CBF, with the options BZ unbalancing TRIP repetition/unbalancing I>query TRIP repetition/I>query
Initiation L1 Current release L1 BF I< T-BF I<
Initiation L2 Current release L2
OPEN CLOSED
Initiation L3 Current release L3
CBF Trip L 123 (busbar-specific) BB intertrip (bay-specific)
Initiation 3-pole Current release 3-pole
CB TRIP
Figure 4-19 Low-current mode
4.3.1.7
Pulse mode In the operating mode Pulse mode, the circuit breaker failure protection is initiated by the opposite line terminal. It operates independently of the CBF function proper if the binary input "!&%) SXOV )1R )( is allocated accordingly. The pulse mode only operates with the modes TRIP repetition/Unbalancing TRIP repetition/I>query The pulse mode is reserved for special applications. This operating mode may be used if initiation of the CBF cannot be given by the corresponding feeder protection (e.g. delayed fault recognition; feeder protection inoperative). In these specific cases the CBF can be initiated by the protection at the opposite line terminal via a binary input !&%) SXOV )1R )(of the bay unit. The devices for transmission provide a signal (pulse) of variable duration. The minimum signal duration of the binary input at the bay unit has to be 20 ms.
4-28
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
After the time 7%),03%;; '$ ;;=( has elapsed, a feeder-selective, threephase TRIP command is issued. If the TRIP command does not result in reset of the protection, the second stage is started after the time 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( or 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=(has elapsed. A new pulse can only be processed after the previous one has been finished.
4.3.1.8
Initiation by feeder protection In feeders with a double set of protection devices (main/back-up protection), the CBF protection can be initiated both phase-selectively and 3-phase by the main or back-up protection equipment. To do so, the binary inputs !&%) /[ )1R )( or !&%) SROH )1R )( must be marshalled accordingly. The CBF protection is started by the first signal that is detected.
Circuit breaker failure delay times
If a single-phase fault evolves to a multi-phase short-circuit before 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( has elapsed, the running process is aborted and time stage 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( is started.
4.3.2
Circuit-breaker failure protection for busbar faults

Circuit-breaker failure can occur during a busbar short-circuit, too. In this case, the current from the remote end must be interrupted (refer to Figure 4-20). An inter-trip signal must be transmitted to the remote end circuit-breaker. If signal transmission is not available, then the distance protection at the remote end must clear the short-circuit current via its second zone time (usually 0.5 s). If signal transmission is used, the current can be interrupted faster, i.e. by tripping the circuit breaker at the opposite line terminal, after the breaker failure time 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( or 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=(has elapsed. In the 7SS52, the duration of the currents is monitored in all feeders which are to be tripped after a busbar short-circuit. If the current persists above the feeder-selective set threshold ,!%) %;; '$ ;;=( after the breaker failure protection time 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( or 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( has elapsed, the corresponding bay units issue transfer trip commands (refer to Figure 4-21).
Circuit breaker fails!
Circuit breaker at the remote feeder terminal
Figure 4-20 Circuit-breaker failure during a busbar fault
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-29
Mode of Operation
I>BF
I>BF-EF EF charac. active
Feeder current
T-BF-3P Intertrip command for BF-initiating feeder (feeder-selective)
TRIP by busbar protection
Figure 4-21 Circuit-breaker failure protection for busbar faults
4.3.3
Failure of the bus coupler circuit breaker

If a busbar short-circuit occurs with the bus coupler closed (refer to Figure 4-22), a TRIP command is issued to all related feeders of this zone and to the coupling bay units. Thus bus zone BZA is isolated and the healthy bus zone BZB stays in service. In the event of a failure of the bus coupler circuit breaker, the busbar protection has to disconnect bus zone BBB, too. If the current persists in the coupler bay units after the time 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( or 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( has elapsed, unbalancing of the coupler current occurs. The trip criterion is thus fulfilled and bus zone BBB is isolated, too.
BZA BZB
Figure 4-22 Fault on bus zone BZA and failure of the bus coupler circuit breaker
4-30
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.3.4
Initiation by the backup protection function in the bay unit

The overcurrent protection in the bay unit can trigger a separate CBF function that works independently of the CBF logic in the busbar protection. This function is active even if the link to the central unit is interrupted or if the bay unit has been set to ED\ RXW RI VHUYLFH, provided that the overcurrent protection exists as a backup protection function and that the CBF function has been activated via the parameter %) 3527 '$ )(. The CBF function is triggered by a TRIP command from the backup protection if at least one phase current of the feeder has reached a preset pickup threshold ,! %) '$ )(. If one of the three phase current still exceeds the threshold ,! %) 7%) '$ )( after the delay time ,! %) has elapsed, the CBF function issues the TRIP command &%) 7USUSS )1R )( as a TRIP repetition. The CBF protection is reset as soon as all three phase current have dropped below the threshold ,! %), regardless of whether the TRIP command of the backup protection is still present. Figure 4-23 shows the principle of the CBF protection function. If the link with the central unit exists and the bay is in service, the CBF logic of the central unit is started at the same time the CBF function of the backup protection with the delay time 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( is triggered. In this way, it is also possible to switch off a faulty busbar section. Since the overcurrent protection and its associated CBF function are designed to work autonomously in the bay, they have been assigned dedicated parameters for the current threshold and the delay time in the bay unit. When setting these parameters, the parameter settings in the busbar protection CBF logic should be considered to ensure that the functions cooperate properly. We therefore recommend to set identical values for the bay unit threshold current and the feeder threshold current in the central unit.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-31
Mode of Operation
B/F PROT OPEN CLOSED TRIP command by O/C I> B/F Three-phase TRIP command T-B/F
Feeder current
T-BF-3P
Fail. in communic. CU Bay out of service
BFOPMOD I>query Trip rep/I>quer External BZ unbalance Trip rep/unbal BZ unbalance
CBF Trip L 123 BB intertrip
Figure 4-23 CBF protection function of the backup protection
4-32
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.4
Backup protection in the bay unit

An optional overcurrent protection is provided as a backup protection in the 7SS52s bay unit. This protection works independently of the busbar protection function and remains active even if the link to the central unit is interrupted or if the bay unit is set to ED\ RXW RI VHUYLFH. The overcurrent protection function can be activated and deactivated for phase currents and earth current separately by the parameters 2& 3+$6(6 '$ )( and 2& ($57+ '$ )(. Likewise, the associated parameters are set independently of one another. The phase parameters are found in address block and the earth parameters in address block . The overcurrent protection can be set to either a definite time or an inverse time characteristic. For the inverse time characteristic of the overcurrent stage there are three types according to IEC 255- 3: Normal inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse The characteristic is set in the parameters &+$5$& 3+ '$ )( for the phase overcurrent stage, and &+$5$& ( '$ )( for the earth overcurrent stage. The characteristic curve of the inverse time O/C protection is selected using the parameters &+$5$&7(5 '$ )( and '$ )( respectively. The selected overcurrent characteristic curve can be superimposed by a high-set stage ,!! '$ )( or ,(!! '$ )( that works always with a current-independent command time. The principle of the overcurrent protection for phase currents and earth current is shown in Figures 4-24 and 4-25. All stages can be set individually and independently of one another. For the selection of threshold values and delay times, the interaction of the bay unit with the busbar protection should be considered. If a circuit breaker is manually closed onto a fault current, it can be re-opened immediately. If the parameters 0$1&/26( '$ )( and '$ )( are set accordingly, the binary input !&% PDQFORVH )1R )( can be used to override the delay time for either the overcurrent stages or the high-set current stages, i.e. an undelayed trip command is issued if a fault is detected on the respective stage.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-33
Mode of Operation
T-I>> Phase current ILx I>> Trip
T-I> CHARAC. PH DEFINITE TIME INVERSE TIME I> Trip
CHARACTER.
T-Ip
Ip Trip
Figure 4-24 Overcurrent protection for phase currents
T-IE>> Earth current
IE>> Trip
T-IE> CHARAC. E DEFINITE TIME INVERSE TIME IE> Trip
CHARACTER.
T-IEp
IEp Trip
Figure 4-25 Overcurrent protection for earth currents
4-34
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.4.1
Definite time overcurrent protection

Each phase current is compared individually with a threshold ,! '$ )( or ,!! '$ )( that is set globally per stage; a phase-selective signal is issued if this threshold is exceeded. After the corresponding delay time 7,!'$ )( or 7,!! '$ )( has elapsed, the TRIP command is issued. The TRIP command, too, is available for each stage individually. The earth current is compared to the set threshold values ,(! '$ )( and ,(!! '$ )(. As soon as one of these thresholds is reached, the delay time 7,(! '$ )( or 7,(!! '$ )( respectively is started; after this delay has elapsed, a TRIP command is issued.
4.4.2
Inverse time overcurrent protection

Each phase current is compared individually with a threshold ,S '$ )( or ,!! '$ )(; the earth current is compared with ,(S '$ )( or ,(!! '$ )(. If the Ip or the IEp threshold is exceeded, the time to trip is calculated on the basis of the selected trip characteristic and the set trip time delay, and started. After it has elapsed, the TRIP command is issued. The trip time delay is set in the parameters 7,S '$ )(and 7,(S '$ )( respectively. If the I>> or the IE>> threshold is exceeded, the TRIP command is always issued as soon as the configured current-independent time to trip has elapsed, regardless of the trip time characteristic set for ,S or ,(S. With inverse time overcurrent protection the user can choose between an evaluation of the r.m.s. value or of the fundamental component of the currents obtained by digital filtering. The selected option is set in the parameters 506 )250$7 '$ )( or '$ )(.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-35
Mode of Operation
4.5
Ancillary functions
The ancillary functions of the 7SS52 busbar/circuit breaker failure protection include: Overcurrent controlled trip command Feeder-selective TRIP release Minimum duration of the TRIP command End fault protection Detection of short-circuits in the dead zone of the bus coupler Detection of CLOSE command in the bus coupler Event logging Storage of short-circuit data for fault recording Supervisory functions
4.5.1
4.5.1.1
Further conditions for the TRIP command

Overcurrent controlled TRIP command The busbar protection 7SS52 provides the possibility, in the event of a busbar shortcircuit, to disconnect only those feeders which carry currents exceeding a set level. The limit values can be set individually for each bay with ,!75,3 %;; '$ ;;=(. If this function is not required, the particular bay setting is set to the value 0. The setting values are always referred to the feeder CT's nominal current.
4.5.1.2
Feeder-selective trip release The 7SS52 differentiates between a TRIP command due to a busbar fault (BB-TRIP) and a TRIP command due to breaker failure (BF-TRIP). In the event of a busbar TRIP the breaker failure protection time delay (CBF time delay) is started. If TRIP release is not given within the CBF time delay, no trip command is generated and the status missing TRIP release is indicated for the feeder concerned. The TRIP release must be marshalled to a binary output !75,3 UHOHDVH )1R )( in the bay unit. The missing TRIP release does not influence the internal CBF processing. If the feeder current is still measured after the CBF time delay, then the opposite line terminal is tripped by a transfer signal. This function is activated by parameter %, 75,3(1$% '$ =(.
4.5.1.3
Minimum duration of the trip command The 7SS52 extends the feeder-related TRIP commands to a set time duration 75PLQ'85$7, '$ =(. This extension ensures that the circuit breakers trip reliably. If the feeder current persists after the minimum duration has elapsed and the threshold ,!%) %;; '$ ;;=( is exceeded, the TRIP command is maintained.
4-36
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
I>BF
I>BF-EF
EF charac. active
Feeder current
TRminDURATI Reset TRIP and intertrip command
TRIP by busbar protection
Figure 4-26 Minimum duration of the TRIP command
4.5.2
Protection in the dead zone of the bus coupler

In the 7SS52 one bus coupler can be assigned either one (1-bay coupler) or two (2-bay coupler) bay units. This is mainly determined by the number of current transformers contained in the coupler, although bus couplers with only one current transformer can be allocated two bay units as well, e.g. if the bus coupler comprises more than 5 isolators. In that case the current is fed to both bay units. However, the treatment of the dead zone of the bus coupler is the same in both versions.
BU1 Current for BZA
BU2 Current for BZB
BZA BZB
CP
Figure 4-27 Allocation of the bus coupler currents with only one bus coupler current transformer
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-37
Mode of Operation
When considering a short-circuit in the dead zone of the bus coupler, i.e. between the current transformer and the circuit breaker, a distinction must be made between two different cases: Circuit breaker closed 1. In the event of a short-circuit in dead zone of the bus coupler with the circuit breaker closed, bus zone BZA is tripped because I1 and ICP flow towards the busbar. Bus zone BZB remains in operation, which means that the fault continues to be fed (refer to Figure 4-28 (1)). In order to interrupt the short-circuit current, the second bus zone must be isolated, too. For this purpose, the bay unit monitors the current in the bus coupler after BZA has been tripped. If the current in the bus coupler persists after the time delay of the breaker failure protection 7%)3%;; '$ ;; =( or 7%)3%;; '$ ;;=( has elapsed, the current ICP for the measuring system BZA is set to zero and the sign of the measuring system BZB, which had been stabilized so far, is inverted (refer to Figure 4-28 (2)). This results in an unbalancing of the measuring system BZB, which issues a TRIP command to all affected circuit breakers. Additional connection of the auxiliary contact CB TRIP of the coupler circuit breaker allows tripping of the second zone even before the breaker failure protection time 7%) has elapsed (refer to chapter 4.5.2.1).
Table 4-3
Allocation of the bus coupler current Meas. system BZA BZB ICP -ICP BZA trip BZB stable
Reaction
Current allocation until 7%) Current allocation after 7%)
ICP 0
BZA healthy BZB trip by unbalancing
BZA BZB
CP
Figure 4-28 Short-circuit in the dead zone of the bus coupler with the circuit breaker closed
Circuit breaker open
2. If a short-circuit occurs in the dead zone with open circuit breaker and closed isolators, the wrong bus zone (BZA) would be tripped without appropriate countermeasures (Figure 4-29). The reason for the incorrect tripping is as follows: IBZA = I (feed)BZA + ICP IBZA > 0 (Fault in BZA) IBZB = I (feed) BZB + ICP IBZB = 0 (No fault in BZB) Therefore, in the 7SS52, the status of the bus coupler circuit breaker is used to prevent erroneous tripping (refer to chapter 4.5.2.1).
4-38
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.5.2.1
Status OPEN of the bus coupler circuit breaker The OPEN status of the bus coupler circuit breaker !&% 2)) )1R )( is essential for correct reaction in case of faults in the dead zone, too.
Delayed recognition
If the circuit breaker is open, the coupler current for the measuring system BZA is set to zero and the coupler current for measuring system BZB is inverted (unbalancing by sign change of the digitized currents). Thus the fault current ICP induces only in measuring system BZB (double value due to unbalancing) fault detection and tripping. The resulting allocation of the coupler currents with the circuit breaker open can be seen in Table 4-3 after 7%).
BZA BZB
CP
Figure 4-29 Short-circuit in the dead zone with the circuit breaker open
If the bus coupler comprises two current transformers (2-bay coupler, refer to Figure 4-30), both coupler currents are set to zero in the protection logic with the CB open.
BZA BZB
CPBZB
CPBZA
Figure 4-30 Bus coupler with 2 CTs (overlapping measurement)
In this case, BZB is correctly tripped and BZA remains in service. In order to avoid that after a bus fault the breaker failure protection is undercut when the circuit breaker reaches its final position, so that a healthy busbar might be jeopardized by current transformer remanence, the signal CB-OPEN can be processed timedelayed. The special treatment of the coupler currents starts only after the set time delay 7&%23(%;; '$ ;;=(.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-39
Mode of Operation
4.5.2.2
CLOSE command of the bus coupler circuit breaker In order to detect a short-circuit in the bus coupler between current transformer and circuit breaker correctly, the circuit breaker status must be known: "&% PDQFORVH )1R )(. If the bus coupler circuit breaker is open, the current of the coupler bay is unbalanced for the protection of bus zone BZB and set to 0 for the protection of bus zone BZA. This might cause tripping of the healthy bus zone BZA when closing the bus coupler circuit breaker onto a short-circuit on bus zone BZB (Figure 4-31), because the protection criterion is faster than the circuit breaker status processing. To avoid this, a leading contact for closing the circuit breaker integrates the current of the coupler current transformer into the protection algorithm. Depending on the application, the leading recognition of the CLOSE command has to be ensured for all possible CLOSE commands (manual closing control by control-discrepancy switch, possibly remote control of the bus coupler circuit breaker by telecontrol or substation control systems, and also reclosing by an automatic reclosing device).
BZA BZB
Figure 4-31 Switching onto earthed busbar
4.5.3
Interrogation of circuit breaker

Interrogation of the feeder circuit breaker is required for the end fault protection function (chapter 4.5.4) and for low-current circuit breaker failure protection mode (chapter 4.3.1.6). Three circuit breaker signals can be recognized: CB CLOSED (CB status) CB OPEN (CB status) CB CLOSE command The circuit breaker status is recognized by marshalling it to binary inputs of the bay unit. For security reasons, we recommend an external logic link in the case of phaseselective circuit breaker auxiliary contacts. The final position of the circuit breaker is only recognized if all three auxiliary contacts are either open or closed (refer to Figure 4-32). If the conditions of the plausibility check for the CLOSED and OPEN position are not fulfilled for at least 250 ms without interruption, an alarm is issued (Table 4-4). The duration of the CLOSE command is separately monitored because false information at the binary input would cause a blocking of the end fault protection (chapter 4.5.4) and/or a deterioration of the function Protection in the dead zone of the bus coupler (chapter 4.5.2).
4-40
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
CB OPEN
CB Man. close
Bay unit
Figure 4-32 Circuit breaker interrogation
Table 4-4
Alarms if plausibility check conditions of the BU for CB are not fulfilled BI CB status CB CLOSE command 0/1 Failure &% IDLO %;; )1R =( no alarm &% IDLO %;; (alarm with 3 s delay!) no alarm &% IDLO %;; Alarm
CP OPEN 0
CB CLOSED 0
0 0
1 1
0 1
Closed Closed by CLOSE command Open Failure
1 1
0 1
0/1 0/1
If a circuit breaker failure is detected, the circuit breaker is assumed to be closed for the treatment of the dead zone in the bus coupler and for the end fault protection. For CBF low-current mode (chapter 4.3.1.6), the circuit breaker is assumed to be open in case of a detected failure.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-41
Mode of Operation
4.5.4
End fault protection

The function of the end fault protection is to protect the zone between the current transformer and the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker is open.
Bus-side current transformers
With bus-side current transformers (Figure 4-33, 1a), the zone protected by the busbar protection is normally delimited by the location of the current transformer. The end fault protection allows to extend this zone as far as the circuit breaker so that in case of a fault the busbar protection can issue a trip command in very short time. Without end fault protection, the feeder protection would detect a fault, but issue no trip command. The fault could only be cleared by the circuit breaker failure protection functions, with the resulting time delay. With line-side current transformers (as seen from the circuit breaker, Figure 4-33, 1b) and 2), the end fault protection helps to avoid an overfunction of the busbar protection. It can also issue a transfer trip command to the circuit breaker at the opposite line terminal if a data transmission feature is provided. The feeder protection would interpret such a situation as a fault in reverse direction and trip with the resulting delay. Without any transmission channels, the fault is only cleared with a distance-dependent time offset by the remote line terminal. The logic of the end fault protection is shown in Figure 4-34. A prerequisite for activating the end fault protection is that the circuit breaker is open. To ensure that the end fault protection is blocked, i.e. that the feeder current is integrated into the busbar measurement again, before the circuit breaker is closed, the leading information of the CB CLOSE command is evaluated. This function is only available for the bay type feeder bay; it can be activated and deactivated per feeder with the parameter (1')/73%;; '$ ;;=(.
Line-side current transformers
BZA TB
ISO1
ISO5
ISO4
1a) bus-side CTs, towards bus (with ref. to ISO4) 1b) bus-side CTs, towards line (with ref. to ISO4) 2) line-side CTs (with ref. to ISO4)
Figure 4-33 Possible CT locations
4-42
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
200 ms
DA XX29/ZE ENDFLTP
CB Man. Close
&
DA 6106/ZE P TRminDURATI t1 0 DA 5402/ZE P BB-ISOLAT 4 0 ISO4 closed Measuring error DA XX18/ZE P I>BF DA XX19/ZE P EF charac. active I>BF-EF
I feeder = 0
CB OPEN
Feeder current
&
Figure 4-34 End fault protection
4.5.4.1
CB not ready function For detection of failures in the opening mechanism of the feeder circuit breaker, the bay unit has a function !&% QRW UHDG\ )1R )( that can be marshalled to a binary input. If a breaker failure occurs while the signal !&% QRW UHDG\ is present, the delay time 7&%)$8%;; '$ ;;=( instead of 7%) is started for treatment by the circuit breaker failure protection. By setting 7&%)$8 '$ ;;=( to 7%), the time until the breaker failure protection in the 7SS52 starts can be reduced. If the bay unit issues a trip command, an intertrip command is issued at the same time to the opposite line terminal (CB Trip and CBF Trip).
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-43
Mode of Operation
Pulse mode
T-BF-1P
Initiation Lx
T-CBFAU
CBF Trip L 123 (busbar-specific)
>CB not ready Current release Lx T-BF-3P
BB intertrip (bay-specific)
Initiation 3-pole
T-CBFAU
BFOPMOD I>query Trip rep/I>quer BZ unbalance Trip rep/unbal External Unbalance
Figure 4-35 CB not ready function
4.5.5
4.5.5.1
Control functions
Trip test with circuit breaker The 7SS52 offers an easy method of testing the trip circuits and the circuit breaker. The test can be started from the bay unit using function key F2 (3-pole) from the bay unit with &% 7(67 /,9( 75,3 '$ )( (1-/3-pole) via the binary input !&% 7HVW )1R )( on the bay unit (3-pole) from the central unit by control operation (1-/3-pole) The related bay must be taken out of service for performing the circuit breaker test (chapter 4.5.5.2), and the bay current must not exceed the threshold , 0$1 75,3 '$ =(.
4-44
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
CU control (1-/3-pole) I> MAN TRIP
Feeder current
Bay out of service CB TEST (Annunc. no.) CB TEST (only 3-pole CB test) (feeder-selective 1-/3-pole)
BU control (1-/3-pole) Function key F2 BU (only 3-pole CB test)
Figure 4-36 Trip test with circuit breaker
4.5.5.2
Bay out of service For maintenance in the bay, e.g. for checking the feeder protection, the bay may have to be taken out of service. In order to avoid tripping of a bus zone in operation by infeed of test currents into the bay unit, the central unit must recognize that a bay has been taken out of service. The control ED\ RXW RI VHUYLFH is released for all bay units with parameter )/75(& 5(/( '$ =( (Figure 4-38). Taking the bay out of service is possible by local operation at the bay unit using function key F1 by local operation at the bay unit with &RP &8 '$ )( by operation from the central unit with 6WDWXV %;; '$ ;;=( via the binary input !%D\ RRI VHU )1R )( of the bay unit Taking a bay out of service has the following effects: the currents of the related bay are removed from the selective measuring system; the check zone continues to measure the currents no cyclic test is performed for this bay If during maintenance in a bay it must be expected that the auxiliary voltage of the bay unit or for the binary inputs is interrupted or the FO connection to central unit is interrupted, the related bay unit has to be taken out of service by the parameter 6WDWXV %;; '$ ;;=(. All configured isolators of the bay are assumed to have OPEN status. In 2-bay couplers, this status is automatically assumed for both coupler bay units.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-45
Mode of Operation
The check zone considers all bays, irrespective of whether they are in service or not, as long as the bay unit is supplied with auxiliary voltage and the data link to the central unit is uninterrupted. By this measure the danger of spurious tripping is avoided in case of an overfunction of the binary input. The check zone also prevents spurious tripping if after maintenance work the switch is not returned to service and when switching onto an external short circuit (short-circuit in the feeder).
4.5.5.3
Maintenance mode During maintenance work on primary equipment (e.g. isolators), it may be necessary to interrupt the auxiliary power supply for the isolator check-back signal. In such a case, the existing isolator status is frozen during maintenance and maintained until the maintenance function is finished. There is no isolator supervision during that period. The protection function, however, remains fully operational. The bayselective maintenance function can be started: by local operation at the bay unit using function key F3 by local operation at the bay unit with 6ZLWFKLQJ ED\ LQ PDLQWHQDQFH '$ )( by operation from the central unit with 6WDWXV %;; '$ ;;=( via the binary input !0DLQWHQDQFH )1R )( of the bay unit For maintenance mode, please note the following: In 2-bay couplers, maintenance can be selected for one coupler bay only. To ensure a selective functioning of the protection, the isolator status must not be changed during maintenance of a bay; this is because the individual protection zones are managed on the basis of the frozen isolator replica. The check zone is processed without isolator replica and serves as a backup protection against spurious tripping if faults occur outside the protected zone. A warning annunciation 1R ,VR2SHU0DLQW )1R =( is output throughout the maintenance work.
4.5.5.4
Blocking of the BZ trip commands For test purposes, the output of trip commands (trip relays) can be blocked via a binary input "!%ORFNLQJ %= 7ULS" %, )1R =( or by the control "%/2&. %= 75,3" '$ =( on the central unit. When the trip commands are blocked, the annunciation "7ULS EORFNHG" )1R =( is output. Inside the devices (central unit, bay unit) all protection functions continue to operate, but not command (BZ TRIP, intertrip, TRIP repeat, local TRIP, intertrip in end fault protection) is issued. The blocking can be reset by deactivating the binary input, by the "5(/($6( %= 753" '$ =( in the central unit or by "Reset". At the same time, the system is reset to close completely all procedures that have been initiated by the tests (e.g. CBF).
4-46
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.5.5.5
Blocking of the breaker failure protection The external initiation of the circuit breaker failure protection can be blocked for all bays via the binary input %ORFNLQJ %) %, )1R =( or by the control %/2&. %) '$ =( in the central unit, and released again by the control 5(/($6( %) '$ =(. This is indicated by an annunciation %) EORFNHG )1R =(. In addition, the circuit breaker failure protection function can be switched on (!%) RII )1R )() and off (!%) RII )1R )()selectively for each bay using the binary inputs of each bay unit. Initiation of the circuit breaker failure protection continues to generate an annunciation for check purposes. The blocking of the circuit breaker failure protection is maintained even if the auxiliary supply voltage of the central unit fails. The busbar protection function is not affected by the blocking.
4.5.6
Event logging
After a fault in the network, information concerning the response of the protection device and the measured values are important for an exact analysis of the fault. For this purpose the central unit of the 7SS2 contains a buffer for fault events (up to 40 events). Operational events (e.g. isolator operation) are registered in an operational events buffer (up to 99 events). In addition events and states can be indicated via alarm relays and optically via LEDs in the central unit and the bay units.
4.5.6.1
Alarm relays and indications The central unit can be fitted with up to two alarm modules (EAZ3 on position 1 and 2). On each module 16 alarm relays are available for remote signalling. Functions can be allocated to them out of an alarm list. The alarm relays are non-retentive and drop off after the initiating criterion disappears. On the front plate of the device there are 16 or 32 freely allocatable LEDs for optical indication. The indications can be retentive or non-retentive. The preset functions are listed in chapter 5.3.2.
Central unit
Bay unit
The bay unit has 10 LED (5 red, 5 green) which, preset ex-works, serve for indication of the isolator states (presetting: closed = red, green = open). Another 6 LEDs indicate protection functions. An alarm relay serves for indication of alarms. The LEDs and alarm relays can be marshalled at random with different functions. The preset functions are listed in chapter 6.3.4.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-47
Mode of Operation
Reset of LED indications
Bay unit and central unit have a reset button for local reset of the LED indications and for functional testing. Operating the reset button on the central unit resets all LED indications on all connected bay units. Configurable binary inputs UHVHW /(' %, )1R =( can be used in the central unit and bay units for remote reset. In addition to the LEDs for alarm indication, each type of device comprises an indication ready for operation (green) and a failure indication (red).
4.5.6.2
Operation and indication The devices have a front-side serial link for connecting a PC. The DIGSI communication software is used on the central unit and the bay units for a menu-guided communication with the protection system. In addition, fault record data can be read out and evaluated. Operational measured values, operational events and fault events can be read out via integrated operation keys and the LC display. The keypad can also be used for setting protection parameters, configuring the protected object and marshalling binary inputs and outputs. The central unit stores up to 40 fault events and 99 operational events with real-time stamp (resolution 10 ms). When the event buffer is full, the oldest events are overwritten (circulating buffer). The recordable operational and fault events are listed Appendix A.2. Operational measured values (feeder currents, stabilizing and differential currents) are displayed in the central unit (full range) and in the bay units (bay-related measured values) for the purpose of commissioning and test support.
Operational measured values of the central unit
Feeder currents IL1, IL2, IL3 of all configured bay units Stabilizing and differential currents per phase, segregated for ZPS-BSZ1 '$ =(, ZPS-BSZ2 '$ =( and ZPS-BSZ3 '$ =( for all bus zones and the check zone Feeder currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IE Stabilizing and differential currents per phase of the check zone Frequency [Hz] The indicated measured values are refreshed at a rate of 0.5 sec.
Operational measured values of the bay unit
Isolator replica
The current isolator replica is available for graphical or tabular output through DIGSI and the serial link of the central unit. In addition, the configured plant can be displayed graphically.
Plant replica
4-48
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.5.7
4.5.7.1
Fault recording
Central unit The instantaneous values of the measured quantities are sampled every 1 ms and stored in a buffer in the central unit. Instantaneous values of the currents in all bays (per phase) Differential and stabilizing currents of all bus zones and of the check zone (per phase) After starting the fault recording (through a busbar short-circuit, via the binary input )UHH]H )OW5HF%XI %, )1R =( or by the control )UHH]H)OW5HF%XI '$ =(, the data are stored from 100 ms before up to 300 ms after the trip command. The central unit stores up to two fault records. By using the two available fault record buffers for one and the same fault event, a fault record with a duration of 800 ms with a pre-fault time of 300 ms. Fault recording is started with the busbar trip command. This data can be read out by means of a PC with the DIGSI communication software and evaluated. The mode of release of the fault buffer is defined with the parameter )/75(& 5(/( '$ =(. With [ V DXWR the last fault is recorded and available for readout. Each new fault record overwrites the previous one. With [ V PDQ or [ V PDQ, either two faults records of 0.4 s each or one fault record with a duration of 0.8 s is stored. The fault record buffer has to be erased and thus released for writing new records after reading out the new data. The release can be effected through the DIGSI communication software, the integrated user interface 5HOHDV)OW5HF%XI '$ =( or via the binary input "UHOHDVH)OW5HF%XI %, )1R =(.
4.5.7.2
Bay unit Each bay unit has a fault record buffer that is independent of that in the the central unit. A distinction is made between the reference point and the storage criterion ,1,7,$7,21 '$ )(. Normally, the reference point is the moment of the fault detection by the device. The storage criterion can also be either the fault detection by the device (6725$*( %< )') or the trip signal by the device (6725$*( %< 75,3). The device trip can also be selected as the reference point (67$57 :,7+ 75,3) and is in this case also the storage criterion. A fault event starts with fault detection by a protection function and ends with the reset of the last fault detection by a protection function. The actual storage time starts with the pre-fault time 735( '$ )( that precedes the reference point and ends when the post-fault time 73267 '$ )( following the disappearance of the storage criterion has elapsed. The maximum permissible total storage time per fault record is set in the address 70$; '$ )(. A maximum of 5 s is available for fault recording. Up to 8 fault records can be stored during that interval.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-49
Mode of Operation
Fault recording can also be activated via a binary input or by operation from the keypad or the serial link. Storage is in that case dynamically triggered. 7%,1$5< ,1 '$ )( and 7.(<%2$5' '$ )( determine the duration of the fault record. Pre-fault and post-fault time must be added to this. If the time for the binary input is set to , recording goes on for as long as the binary input is activated (static), but not longer than 70$; '$ )(.
4.5.8
Clock management
The central unit and all bay units have a battery-buffered real-time clock module.
Central unit
Date and time can be set in the central unit with the control '$7(7,0( '$ =( or with the DIGSI communication software. The resolution is 10 ms. Bay units that are connected to the central unit are automatically updated in intervals of 1 min. In bay units that are operated autonomously, the date and time can be set with the control 6(77,1* 5($/ 7,0( &/2&. '$ )( or with the DIGSI communication software. If DIGSI is used, the PC time can be taken over, the resolution is 1 ms. The clock synchronization binary input 6\QF 'DWHWLPH %, )1R =( can be used to synchronize the central unit with an absolute time system.
Bay units
Synchronization
4.5.9
Supervisory functions
The 7SS52 protection system incorporates comprehensive self-monitoring functions which cover both the hardware and the software. This guarantees a high availability and security against overfunctioning and underfunctioning as well as low demand on maintenance.
4.5.9.1
Hardware monitoring The entire protection system is cyclically monitored from the measuring inputs through the data communication between central unit and bay units up to the trip relay coils. Monitoring circuits and self-diagnosis programs monitor the hardware for faults and impermissible conditions. Details are as follows:
Auxiliary and reference voltages
Auxiliary and reference voltages The processor of the bay unit monitors the offset and reference voltages of the measured value acquisition, as well as the auxiliary supply voltages. The protection is blocked selectively or entirely as soon as impermissible deviations occur; permanent faults are annunciated )1R to =(. The DC-DC converter voltages in the bay unit and the central unit are also monitored by the converters themselves, and faults are annunciated. Failure or disconnection of the auxiliary voltage automatically takes the affected device out of service; this status is annunciated via an NC contact. Transient auxiliary voltage dips of 50 ms will not influence the unit. Depending on the parameter settings, a failure of the auxiliary voltage in a bay unit results in a selective or complete blocking of the protection system.
4-50
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
Measured value monitoring
Measured value monitoring The analog input circuits of the bay unit are cyclically monitored from the input transducers up to the digitalization. This is done by forming the current sum and executing the following plausibility check: I = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 + IE | I | = | IL1 | + | IL2 | + | IL3 | + | IE | The measured value monitoring picks up if | I | > ,!680 |I|>k.|I| k = 0.125 (stabilizing factor) The pick-up characteristic is shown in Figure 4-37. If the supervision detects that the measured values are not plausible, the analog measuring circuits are assumed to be faulty, the measured value cycle is accordingly marked and the calculation of the protection algorithms blocked for this cycle. If the fault prevails for a longer time, the protection system is selectively or completely blocked and an annunciation 0HDV LQ VXS%;; )1R =( is output. 6839 '$ =( and
Fault current
Error in measured values
k = 0.125 No error in measured values
Stabilizing current
Figure 4-37 Characteristic for measured value monitoring
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-51
Mode of Operation
Memory monitoring
Memory monitoring (FE and ZE) The memory modules are periodically tested for faults by the following measures: A checksum is formed for the program memory (Flash EPROM) during startup and cyclically during operation For the RAM, a data pattern is written during start-up and read again. For the parameter and configuration data memory (EEPROM), the checksum of the stored quantities is formed and compared with the checksum calculated during each new writing process. For the dual-port RAM of the slave modules, the stored parameters are compared with the data on the master module.
Output trip monitoring
Output trip channels (FE) The output trip channels are controlled via two trip channels and one release channel. The signal output channels are checked in connection with the cyclic protection test (refer to chapter 4.5.9.9). The buffer batteries in the central unit and the bay units ensure that LED states, date and time, operational and fault events and fault records are maintained in case of a failure of the auxiliary supply voltage. As soon as the battery voltage drops below a certain threshold, an alarm %DWW VXSHUY &8 )1R =( or %DWWVXS%8%;; )1R =( is output.
Battery monitoring
4.5.9.2
Software monitoring Watchdog timers are provided on the processor modules to monitor continuously the program sequences. In the event of a processor failure or if a program falls out of step, the watchdog operates and initiates an automatic reset of the processor system. Further internal plausibility checks and program sequence monitoring ensure that any faults in processing of the programs will be detected. Such faults also lead to an reset and restart of the processor. If a fault is not eliminated by restarting, a further restart is initiated. If the fault is still present after three restart attempts, the protection system or parts of it are automatically taken out of service. If a fault occurs in the central unit, the ready-for-service relay on the alarm module (EAZ3) drops off and indicates Equipment failure via its NC contact. Each bay unit has its own NC contacts for Equipment failure. The LED Failure on the front plate of the central unit or an affected bay unit lights up red.
4.5.9.3
Monitoring of external CT circuits Interruptions or short-circuits in the secondary circuits of the main current transformers, as well as errors in the CT connections and errors in the system configuration of the busbar protection are automatically detected by the system and annunciated. The differential currents formed in the measuring systems on the protection processing modules ZPS-BSZ1 to ZPS-BSZ3 are used for this function.
4-52
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
The differential current monitoring can be activated or deactivated by the parameter ',)) 683(59 '$ =(. Each measuring system is individually monitored. Under no-fault conditions, the differential current of each measuring system is approximately 0. If no feeders are assigned to a measuring system, the differential current and the stabilizing current are set to 0. the differential current supervision picks up if the mean value of the differential current exceeds a threshold that is individually settable for ZPS-BSZ1 ,!683(59&= '$ =( and ZPS-BSZ2/3 ,!683(59%= '$ =( respectively within a selected time 7',)) 6839 '$ =(. If the differential current falls below the threshold before the set time, the time delay is restarted if it occurs again. The reaction after pick-up of the differential current supervision can be individually parameterized for ZPS-BSZ1 and ZPS-BSZ2/3. ZPS-BSZ1: ',)) 683 &= '$ =( ZPS-BSZ2/3: ',)) 683 %= '$ =( Alarm only: When the differential current exceeds or falls below the limit, one of the following is generated: a coming/going group alarm (UU 3527 $&7,9( )1R =( a group alarm for ZPS-BSZ2/BSZ3 ,GVXS %= )1R =( and ,GVXS /] %= )1R =( and / or ,GVXS %=Q 0 )1R =( and a selective alarm ,G6XS %=Q /] )1R =( for BSZ2 and ,G6XSE %=Q /] )1R =( for BSZ3 or ,G6XS /] &= )1R =( or ,G6XS &= )1R =(. Blocking with automatic release: When the differential current supervision picks up, a coming group alarm for an error with protection blocking (UU 3527 %/2&. )1R =( and a selective alarm ,G6XS %=Q /] \ )1R =( or ,G6XS /] &= )1R =( is generated. If the differential current exceeds the set threshold, bus-zone and phase-selective protection blocking is initiated. If the fault is on ZPS-BSZ1 (check zone), the complete protection is blocked. When the measured value falls below the threshold, the blocking is cancelled and the alarm signalled as going. Blocking with storage: When the differential current supervision picks up, the coming group alarm (UU 3527 %/2&. )1R =( and a selective alarm ,G6XS %=Q /] \ )1R =( or ,G6XS /] &= )1R =( is generated. If the differential current exceeds the set threshold, phase-selective and bus zoneselective protection blocking is initiated. If the fault is on ZPS-BSZ1 (check zone), the affected phase is blocked in the complete protection. The blocking is cancelled when the differential current falls below the threshold and the blocking is additionally cancelled by the control 5HOHDV%OR'LI6XS '$ =( or by the binary input 5HVHW ,GLIEORFN %, )1R =(.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-53
Mode of Operation
4.5.9.4
Isolator supervision The isolator states OPEN and CLOSED are separately recorded. The following faulty conditions can arise from these two states: Isolator CLOSED/ OPEN
= 1/1: Isolator malfunction Alarm: ,VRL )OW3OD%;; )1R =( = 0/0: If this status is signalled at the same time for all isolators of the bay unit, an auxiliary voltage failure is annunciated for this bay. Alarm: %D\ '& IDLO%;; )1R =( If this status is signalled for only one isolator of a bay, a runtime fault is assumed and an isolator fault alarm is issued: Alarm: ,VRL )OW5XQ%;; )1R =( i: Isolator designation XX: Bay no.
Isolator CLOSED/ OPEN
The treatment of the isolator malfunction states is described in chapter 4.2. Reset of isolator malfunction alarm An isolator alarm from an LED or the alarm relay can be reset even with its cause still present. A warning annunciation ,VR2S QRW3HUP )1R =( is generated in that case. The isolator alarm is issued again if a new isolator malfunction is detected. The function is reset with the control 5HOHDV%OR,VR0DO '$ =( or by the binary input 5HVHW ,VR0DO%OFN %()1R =( in the central unit. If the response to an isolator alarm has been set to blocking in ,62 0$/ 5(6 '$ =(, the reset cancels the blocking. However, the entry of the isolator alarm as coming/going in the operational events buffer reflects the way in which the isolator malfunction actually occurred. Depending on the setting of parameter ,62 0$/ 5(6 '$ =(, the protection will respond in different ways, as shown in Figure 4-38.
4-54
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
Isolator malfunction Isolator malfunction alarm Reset isol. malfunc. alarm Isolator operation not permitted Blocking ISO MAL RES (DA 6302/ZE) set to: alarm only blockAutoReleas block storage blockStor/rel.
Figure 4-38 Sequence of signal states for isolator malfunction blocking and reset
4.5.9.5
Monitoring in maintenance mode While a bay is in maintenance, there is no monitoring of the isolator state checkback signals, nor a plausibility check. The currents of the bays in maintenance continue to be transmitted to the central unit. The serial link between the bay unit and the central unit is monitored. In case of a failure or disturbance of that link, a malfunction alarm is generated just like in normal" mode.
Monitoring of isolators Monitoring of the FO link
4.5.9.6
Supervision of CB failure protection initiation and release If a binary input &%) UHOHDVH (!&%) / )1R )( to !&%) / )1R )(, !&%) SROH )1R )() is energized incorrectly, there is a risk of spurious tripping of a busbar in this feeder if the current exceeds the CBF pickup threshold. To recognize such errors in good time, the following supervision functions can be set in parameter %)%,02'%;; '$ ;;=(: If the CBF initiation signal persists for longer than 15 s, the faulty CBF input is blocked and an annunciation (%) %, HUU/] %;; )1R =( or %) %, HUU S%;; )1R =() is generated.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-55
Mode of Operation
If the CBF release signal persists for longer than 7%)0&,%;; '$ ;;=(, the CBF is blocked and the fault is annunciated (%)FRP%,HUUS%;; )1R =( or %)FRP%,HUUS%;; )1R =(). As long as the signal is active, the CBF function is blocked for the affected feeder. If a selective CBF signal is active and no CBF release signal is given after a set time 7%))&,%;; '$ ;;=(, the CBF function is blocked selectively and an annunciation (%) %, HUU S%;; )1R =() is generated.
BFBIMOD 1/2-channel T-BFMCI
BFBIMOD with/without supervision BFcomBIerr1p:Bxx (alarm and feeder-selective blocking of CBF)
CBF release Further processing in the CBF operating modes (chapter 5.6) CBF Lx (1-pole) T-BFFCI BF BI err:Lz:Bxx (alarm and blocking of the feeder-selective BF BI)
BF BI err:Lz:Bxx (alarm and blocking of the feeder-selective BF Lz)
Figure 4-39 CBF initiation and release
4-56
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
BFBIMOD 1/2-channel T-BFMCI
BFBIMOD with/without supervision BFcomBIerr3p:Bxx (alarm and feeder-selective blocking of CBF)
CBF release Further processing in the CBF operating modes (chapter 5.6) CBF Lx (1-pole) T-BFFCI BF BI err 3p:Bxx (alarm and blocking of the feeder-selective BF BI)
BF BI err 3p:Bxx (alarm and blocking of the feeder-selective BF Lz)
Figure 4-40 CBF initiation and release 3-phase
4.5.9.7
Current-controlled reset of the TRIP command For reset of the TRIP command, it must be ensured that the controlled circuit breaker has really opened and that the tripping current circuit of the bay unit has been interrupted by the circuit breaker auxiliary contact. Interruption of the tripping current by the trip relay causes an overload of the contacts and their destruction. To perform a current-controlled command reset, the time step 75PLQ'85$7, '$ =( is started after the trip command. After the TRIP command minimum duration has elapsed, the current limit value monitor is activated. If the current falls below the feeder-related threshold ,!%) %;; '$ ;;=(, the relays for the TRIP and transfer trip command are reset.
4.5.9.8
Differential current supervision for linearized current transformers Linearized current transformers may have angle errors. The secondary current then lags behind the primary current. If a feeder short-circuit is interrupted by the circuit breaker (CB interrupts at current zero), the secondary current continues to flow and decays according to an e-function. The angle error and the time constant depend mainly of the protection burden. The angle error increases and the time constant decreases with increasing burden.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-57
Mode of Operation
Zero current supervision
The current which continues to flow in the CT circuit is seen by the busbar protection as a differential current. At first, erroneous tripping is prevented by the stabilizing current which decays according to an e-function with a time constant of 64 ms. In order to eliminate erroneous tripping after the stabilizing current has decayed, the 7SS52 supervises the zero crossings of the differential current. The zero crossing limit can be selected in parameter ,! =(52 &5 '$ =( and must be set to be less than the differential current limit ,!',)) %= '$ =(. The zero crossing supervision function can be activated and deactivated in =(52 &5 683 '$ =(. If the zero crossing of the current is not repeated after 32 ms (fN = 50 Hz) or 27 ms (fN = 60 Hz) at the latest, a DC current is assumed and the protection is selectively blocked per busbar zone. The blocking is maintained until the measured value drops below the limit.
4.5.9.9
Cyclic test The cyclic test as part of the self-diagnosis checks cyclically all measuring systems and connected bay units from the digitized measured values up to the trip relays. This test is treated like a real fault and uses the same transmission links for measured values and trip commands. Thus it yields utmost security and reliability. This test does not influence the protection function. The test is performed only if no real fault is detected on the busbar of the connected feeders. In the event of an internal failure detection, the identical test routine is repeated twice before a failure alarm is issued. Failure information contains the affected phase (Lz for L1, L2 or L3), the measuring channel (y for ZPS-BSZ1,2 or 3) and the corresponding feeder (xx = feeder number, 01 to 48) )OW DXW /]\%;; )1R =(. The failure response can be set in the parameter 7(67 )$8/7 '$ =( to DODUP RQO\ or EORFN SURWHFW (including alarm).
4-58
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
4.5.9.10 Summary of the supervisory functions Table 4-5 shows an overview of the various supervisory functions.
Table 4-5 Summary of the supervisory functions Supervisory function Auxiliary voltage supervision Possible cause and response Failure of the DC-DC converter output voltages Blocking of protection and annunciation 9VXSHUY%;; )1R =( 9VXSHUY%;; )1R =( 9VXSHUY%;; )1R =( Failure of the 5 V voltage causes reset of the device failure annunciation and thus blocks the device completely. 9VXSHUY &8 )1R =( 9VXSHUY &8 )1R =( Failure of the 15 V or 24 V voltage of the central unit does not block the protection. Internal unit failure during measured value acquisition Blocking of protection and annunciation 0HDV LQ VXS%;; )1R =( , VXSHUYLVLRQ )1R )( After three unsuccessful restart attempts the protection is blocked. After three unsuccessful restart attempts the protection is blocked. Current transformer circuit faulty Bus section-selective blocking if the parameter ',)) 683 %= '$ =( is set to blocking, otherwise only alarm ,G6XS %=Q /]\ )1R =( Blocking if the parameter ',)) 683 &= '$ =( is set to blocking, otherwise only alarm ,G6XS /] &= )1R =( Wire break or faulty status Alarm ",VRO L)OW5XQ%;; )1R =( Feeder aux. voltage MCB tripped Alarm "%D\ '& IDLO%;; )1R =( Alarm ",VRO L)OW3OD%;; )1R =(
FE: (0 V)digit > 2))6 683 %8 '$ =( (15 V)digit > 9 683 %8 '$ =(
ZE: 15 V 24 V
Measured value supervision FE | I | > ,!680 6839 '$ =( | I | > 0.125 . | I | Cyclic monitoring of the memories (FE, ZE)
Permanent monitoring of the program flow by means of watchdog (FE, ZE) Differential current supervision Bus section-selective protection | I | > ,!683(59%= '$ =( for T > 7',)) 6839 '$ =(
Check zone, all except bus coupler | I | > ,!683(59&= '$ =( for T > 7',)) 6839 '$ =(
Monitoring of isolator status Running position Isolator OPEN/CLOSED = 0/0 for T > ,62 75$ 7,0 '$ =( Auxiliary voltage failure All isolator positions of one bay = 0/0 Implausible isolator status Isolator CLOSED/OPEN = 1/1
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-59
Mode of Operation
Table 4-5
Summary of the supervisory functions Supervisory function Possible cause and response Blocking of the protection system and annunciation after two recognitions of a transmission error )DLO &RP&8 )1R )( Annunciation and blocking of the binary input of the affected feeder "%) %, HUU/] %;; )1R =( or %) %, HUU S%;; )1R =(; Supervision picks up if a signal is present at the BI BF-feeder-selective for the time T > 15 s; Supervision picks up if both BIs BF-feederselective and BF release do not arrive within the time window T = limit; Annunciation and blocking of CBF %)FRP%,HUUS%;; )1R =( or %)FRP%,HUUS%;; )1R =( After two recognitions of an error blocking of the protection and / or alarm, depending of the selection made in parameter 7(67 )$8/7 '$ =(.
Cyclic check of the data transmission links between central unit and bay unit
Supervision of the binary input of the circuit breaker failure protection !&%) /[ and !&%) UHOHDVH for T > 15 s
for T > 7%))&,%;; '$ ;;=(
for T > 7%)0&,%;; '$ ;;=(
Cyclic test with simulation of a fault current and monitoring of the entire signal processing from the digitized measured values to the control currents of the trip relay coils
4.5.10 Zone-selective blocking

In most cases it will be desirable, in the case of external or internal faults and malfunctions of the 7SS52 protection system, to block only those measuring systems (protection zones) that are affected so that the healthy portion of the system can continue to operate. In the presence of feeder faults or measuring errors, the feeder current will not be available for the check zone measuring system. In such cases the release signal for tripping by the check zone measuring system is artificially generated so that in case of a busbar fault all three necessary tripping conditions are fulfilled. As selective blocking does not offer the additional security provided by isolator-independent check zones, the cause of the fault should be eliminated as promptly as possible. A zone-selective blocking can be set in the parameter %/2&.,1* '$ =(. Selective blocking is effective in case of isolator malfunctions, failure of a bay unit or its link to the central unit, and measured value acquisition errors in the bay unit.
4-60
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Mode of Operation
Isolator malfunction
An isolator malfunction with the parameter ,62 0$/ 5(6 '$ =( set to EORFN causes a 3-phase blocking of only the protection zone to which the feeder with the faulty isolator is connected. All serial links between the bay unit and the central unit are continuously monitored in the central unit. A failure or disturbance of an operating bay unit or of the link between bay unit and central unit leads to the output of an alarm but not to a system reset. With the parameter %/2&.,1* '$ =( set to EORFN 3URWHF all 3 phases of the entire protection system are blocked; with %ORFN %= only the 3 phases of the protection zone assigned to the feeder are blocked. In 1-bay couplers, zone-selective blocking leads to a blocking of both affected protection zones.
Bay unit failure
Measured value errors
The analog inputs of the bay unit are cyclically monitored (refer to chapter 4.5.9.1). In case of a plausibility error in the summated current the protection algorithm of the affected bus zone is blocked immediately. The corresponding alarm is output with a delay of 100 ms.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4-61
4-62
Central Unit
5
This chapter deals with the functions and settings of the central unit. It gives you guidelines on how to configure the protection system for your station. The parameters of the system and design data are shown with their default, maximum and minimum settings. 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 Introduction Station configuration Marshalling information System settings and interfaces Functions settings Read out of information Control in operation Setting and reading the real-time clock Test functions 5-2 5-5 5-20 5-25 5-28 5-36 5-46 5-49 5-50
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-1
Central Unit
5.1
Introduction
Note The keypad which is integrated in the central unit lends itself well for setting, modifying and display of selected direct addresses. For the initial setting of the protection system or for modification of a larger number of parameters, communication via PC with the DIGSI software yields higher comfort and efficiency. For working with firmware version V 1.20, DIGSI version V 2.94 or higher is required. For setting the operational parameters, it is necessary to enter the password (refer to chapter 3.4.1). The password is required in order to change the settings but not to read out the settings. There are three types of display: Addresses without request for operator input The address is identified by the block number followed by 00 (e.g. for block ). Displayed text forms the heading of this block. No input is expected. By using keys or the next or previous block can be selected. By using keys or the first or last address within the block can be selected and the addresses stepped through. Addresses which require numerical input The display shows the four-digit address, i.e. block and running number (e.g. for block , running number ). The meaning of the parameter is displayed behind the bar. The second line shows the value of this parameter. When the relay is delivered a value has been preset. In the following sections these default values are marked. If this value is to be retained no other inputs are necessary. The next (or previous) parameter within the block or the next (or previous) block can be accessed by paging. If the value needs to be altered it can be overwritten using the numerical keys and if applicable the decimal point and/or the change sign (+/-) key. The permissible setting range is given next to the associated box. Values outside this range are rejected. The setting steps correspond to the last decimal place shown in the setting box. Inputs with more decimal places than permitted will be truncated down to the permissible number. The value must be confirmed with the ENTER key! The display then confirms the accepted value. The new parameter, however, is not finally transferrred until completion of the parameter setting process (refer below). Addresses which require text input The display shows the four-digit address, i.e. block and running number (e.g. for block running number ).The meaning of the parameter is displayed behind the bar. The second line shows the text of this parameter. When the relay is delivered, a text has been preset. In the following sections these texts are marked. If it is to be retained no input is necessary. The next (or previous) parameter within the block or the next (or previous) block can be accessed by paging. If the text is to be changed, then this is performed by the NO key F4. One of the alternative choices which are tagged to the display boxes in the following sections then appears. If the alternative text is not desired, the F4 key is pressed again, etc. The alternative which is chosen is confirmed with the ENTER key.
5-2
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
The following sections include the parameterizing of all setting values with explanations. The arrows and next to the display boxes indicate the method of moving from block to block or within a block. If the meaning of a parameter is unclear it is usually best to retain the preset value. Addresses not in use are skipped (passed over). If the parameter address is known, direct addressing is possible. This is achieved by depressing key MENU, followed by the four-digit address and subsequently pressing the ENTER key. After direct addressing, paging by means of keys and is possible. The parameterizing process can be ended at any time by depressing one of the keys which changes the parameter block. The displayed question &+$1*(6 &20 3/" is then answered with the YES key F3. In general, the question as to the completion of parameterizing appears each time a new block is chosen. If further parameters are to be changed the question should be answered by pressing the NO key F4. After completion of the parameterizing process, the changed parameters which so far have only been stored in volatile memories are permanently and securely stored in EEPROMs. Initial display Block 00 When the protection unit is switched on or the operator terminal is connected, firstly the '$ =( and the type identification of the unit is displayed.
0000 7SS52 V1.20
The unit introduces itself with its type number and the version of firmware with which it is equipped.
From '$ =( onwards the design data begin.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-3
Central Unit
Operating tree of the central unit
Level 0
evel 3
Level 1
Block title (with password entry)
Block title (without password entry)
Level 2 Design data, per bay
Level 2 Design data, BB configur.
Level 2 System and design data
Level 2 BB protec./ CBF parameters Direct addr. 6100-6300
Direct addr. 0100-4800
Direct addr. 4900

1)
Level 2 Annunc. Isol. replica Commiss. meas.val. Bay currents Direct addr. 7100-7800
2)
Level 2 Control / tests
Level 2 Date / time
Direct addr. 9000
Level 3
Display and change mode Numerical input
Level 3
Display mode
Level 3
Change mode
Level 3
Displ./change mode
Scroll forwards
Numerical keys Text input Scroll through standard texts

Return to level 1 or 2
Scroll forwards Scroll back Return to level 1 or 2
Scroll forwards Scroll back
Scroll forwards Scroll back
Yes No
Numerical keys Numerical keys
Scroll back
Confirm new value
1) Address group DA5300: Relay/BI reallocation cannot be accessed from the front display (only in DIGSI) 2) Address group DA7700: Fault record cannot be accessed from the front display (only in DIGSI) 3) Change mode only after entering password 987 4) Use the MENU key to access level 3 directly from level 0
Confirm value Return to level 1 or 2
Confirm value Return to level 0

3)
Fig. 5-1
Operating tree of the central unit
5-4
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
5.2
Station configuration
Design data is mainly plant specific data which requires no change during normal service. This group comprises station configuration, number of existing bays, CT ratios and polarities, type of feeder (bus coupler, outgoing feeder, sectionalizer).
5.2.1
Read out of design data

Read out of design data is accessed with password either by paging or by direct addressing.
5.2.2
Changing of station data

As with the parameters, this data can be changed individually or as a complete block. The changing procedure is characterized by: The password for reading-out and changing is After the completion of the changes a re-start is initiated.
5.2.3
The protected station configuration is programmed by design data.
Block 00 to 48 Design data
XX00 DESIGN DATA: Config. Bay XX?
Start of the block for bay XX
XX01 TYPE:BXX =feeder bay
Type of bay = VHFWLRQLVRODW = IHHGHU ED\ = EXVFRXS (1Bay) = EXVFRXS (2Bay) = %D\%XV&RXS1R&% (without circuit breaker) = %D\%XV&RXS1R&%
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-5
Central Unit
XX02 DESIGNA:BXX =1.0
Bay position number Bay (XX) in which the feeder is located minimum setting:............0.0 maximum setting:............99.9
XX03 BAY STA:BXX =existent
Bay setting = H[LVWHQW = QRQ H[LVWHQW
The number of ZPS-SK modules is determined by the number of bays (8 bays per ZPS-SK).
XX04 CT LOC.:BXX =line side
Current transformer mounting location = EXVVLGH WRZ EXV =EXVVLGH WRZ OLQH = QRQ H[LVWHQW = OLQH VLGH (CT outside bay)
In stations with bypass (transfer) busbar, the current transformers are arranged either on the busbar side or on the line side of the feeder isolator (Q9). The setting must be made appropriately. Since this parameter is only important for one-bay couplers and stations with bypass busbar it can be ignored for stations without bypass busbar (refer to chapter 5.2.5).
XX05 CT POL:BXX =line side
Current transformer starpoint = EXV VLGH = OLQH VLGH This parameter considers the polarity (earthing of CT starpoint).
XX06 CT NORM:BXX =.001
Current transformer ratio (normalizing factor) minimum setting:........0.001 maximum setting:..........1.000
This parameter is used to match the different CT ratios. The basis for the setting is the CT with the highest transformation ratio. This CT is given the setting value 1. The ratios of the CTs of the other feeders are matched to this CT and set accordingly.
5-6
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
Example:
Feeder no. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Reference CT
CT ratio 500/1 300/1 500/1 600/1 400/1 1000/1 1
Normalizing factor (xx06) 0.500 0.300 0.500 0.600 0.400 1.000
With bay type IHHGHU ED\, signal ISO5 can also be used for an outgoing isolator, i.e. for recognizing the status of the line isolator. A maximum of 5 isolators (BB-ISO1 to BB-ISO5) can be assigned per bay. Isolators BB-ISO1 to BB-ISO5 of a feeder and a bus coupler can be configured as busbar isolators (,62%;; '$ ;;=( to ,62%;; '$ ;;=(). Isolator BBISO4 can be configured depending on the setting in ,62/$7 '$ =( as busbar (BB), transfer bus (TR) or combi-bus (COTR) isolator. The isolators BB-ISO1 to BB-ISO5 are allocated to one or two of the bus sections BZ01 to BZ12 or bus coupler sections AB01 to AB12.
XX07 BBISO1:BXX =on BZ01
Allocation of bays to busbar or bus coupler sections minimum setting:........000.00 maximum setting:.......123.24 Input: 0 1... 12 13... 24 1.2... 23.24 101... 124 101.2 123.24 Display: = non existent = on BZ01... on BZ12 = on AB01... AB12 = on BZ01/BZ02... AB11/V12 = on BZ01 ON... AB12 ON = on BZ01/BZ02ON = on AB11/AB12ON
Legend: BZ = Bus zone AB = Auxiliary bus zone (= bus coupler section: sections which
serve exclusively for coupling of the bus sections; they have no feeder bays)
ISO = Isolator
Isolator sections are indicated separately behind the decimal point. Additional programming defines whether the isolator status is allocated to digital inputs of the bay unit (FE) or assumed to be 21 (CLOSED-simulation).
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-7
Central Unit
The configuration for CLOSED is done by adding a leading 1 (before the first bus zone) with the input (e.g. 102 = on BZ02 ON, 115 = on AB03 ON, 103.07 = on BZ03/BZ07 ON).
XX08 BB-ISO2:BXX =non existent
identical to ISO1:BXX
identical to ISO1:BXX
identical to ISO1:BXX Isolator BB-ISO4 can be configured depending on the setting in '$ =( as busbar (BB) isolator, transfer bus (TR) or combi-bus (COTR) isolator. To start TR operation, the corresponding setting '$ =( and '$ =( is valid exclusively for BB-ISO4.
identical to ISO1:BXX = QRQ H[LVWHQW = H[LVWHQW =$ RXWJRLQJ LVRO Recognition of the feeder isolator status (applies only to bay type feeder bay)
XX12 Status :BXX =in service
Bay status = LQ VHUYLFH = RXW RI VHUYLFH = PDLQWHQDQFH
XX 13 I>TRIP :BXX =.00 I/IN
Current limit value minimum setting:...............0.00 maximum setting:...............25.00 A feeder-selective TRIP command is executed as soon as the feeder current exceeds the set limit. The settings refers to the rated CT current. If a feeder is set to 0, the trip is performed without I> query.
5-8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
XX14 BFBIMOD:BXX =1-chanelWithSup
Selection of the type of supervision of the CBF start = FKDQHO QR 6XS = FKDQHO:LWK6XS (supervision of signal duration) = FKDQHO QR 6XS (with CBF release signal) = FKDQHO:LWK6XS (supervision of signal duration, with CBF release signal)
XX15 BFOPMOD:BXX =BZ unbalance
Setting address of the CBF operation mode = QRQ H[LVWHQW = H[WHUQDO (TRIP from external circuit breaker failure protection) = %= XQEDODQFH = WULS UHSXQEDO (TRIP repetition with following unbalancing) = ,!TXHU\ = WULS UHS,!TXHU (TRIP repetition with current sensor)
XX16 I<:BXX =non existent
Low-current mode = H[LVWHQW = QRQ H[LVWHQW Can be combined with the CBF modes: - unbalancing - Trip repetition/unbalancing - I>query - TRIP repetition/I>query
XX17 TRIPREP:BXX =single-phase
Operation mode of TRIP repetition for singlephase initiation = VLQJOHSKDVH = WKUHHSKDVH
XX18 I>BF :BXX =.50 I/IN
Current limit for breaker failure detection and trip reset minimum setting:...............0.10 I/IN maximum setting:.................2.00 I/IN
XX19 I>BF-EF:BXX =.25 I/IN
Setting address of the current threshold for recognition of breaker failure and for trip reset minimum setting:...............0.05 I/IN maximum setting:.................2.00 I/IN
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-9
Central Unit
XX20 T-BF-1P:BXX =.25 s
Time delay for CBF protection treatment with 1-pole faults minimum setting:...............0.05 s maximum setting:...............10.00 s
XX21 T-BF-3P:BXX =.25 s
Time delay for CBF protection treatment with 3-pole faults minimum setting:...............0.05 s maximum setting:...............10.00 s
XX22 T-BF I<:BXX =.25 s
Time delay for the low-current mode of the CBF protection minimum setting:...............0.05 s maximum setting:...............10.00 s
XX23 T-BFIMP:BXX =.50 s
Time delay for the three-phase TRIP repeat command after external breaker failure initiation (mode of operation TRIP/UNB pulse) minimum setting:...............0.05 s maximum setting:...............10.00 s
XX24 T-CBFAU:BXX =.10 s
Time delay after external initiation of breaker failure protection and signalling >CB fail instead of 7693 '$ ;;=( and 7693
'$ ;;=(
minimum setting:...............0.00 s maximum setting:...............10.00 s
XX25 T-TRREP:BXX =.12 s
Time delay for Trip repeat minimum setting:...............0.00 s maximum setting:...............10.00 s
XX26 T-CBOPE:BXX =.00 s
Time delay for special treatment of the currents in the coupler bay and for end fault protection minimum setting:...............0.00 s maximum setting:...............10.00 s
5-10
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
XX27 T-BFMCI:BXX =15.00 s
Supervision time for the signal duration of the CBF release minimum setting:...............0.02 s maximum setting:...............15.00 s Prerequisite: %)%,02'%;; '$ ;;=( ZLWK6XS
XX28 T-BFFCI:BXX =.06 s
Time delay after which the CBF release signal must be available minimum setting:...............0.06 s maximum setting:.................1.00 s (refer also to chapter 4.5.9.6)
XX29 ENDFLTP:BXX =inactive
Address for activating and deactivating the end fault protection = LQDFWLYH = DFWLYH Prerequisite: Bay unit must be of type IHHGHU ED\
Block 54 5400 DESGN DATA: Common configur.?

Beginning of the block for common configuration data
5401 PROT TR BUS =blocked
Selective protection for bypass (transfer) busbar = EORFNHG = UHOHDVHG (this setting makes sense only for configurations with outside CTs, refer also chapter 4.2.2)
5402 BB-Isolat 4 = BB-Isolator
Configuration of isolator BB-ISOLAT 4 = 75,VRODWRU (transfer bus isolator) = %%,VRODWRU (busbar isolator) = &275,VRODWRU (combi-bus isolator)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-11
Central Unit
5.2.4
Block 49
Configuration of the busbar

For configuration (entering data) the bus zones are counted consecutively from left to right, starting with the first main bus up to the transfer bus or the fourth main bus, from 1 to 12. In the same way the coupler sections are counted from 13 to 24. For each main bus the number of corresponding bus sections and coupler sections is defined.
Configuration 4900 DESIGN DATA: =BB-Configurat.?
Parameters '$ =( to '$ =( are only utilized by the communication software DIGSI and have no influence on the protection function. DIGSI allows a graphical display of the plant configuration based on the input data. The maximum plant configuration contains 4 main busbars,12 bus sections and 12 bus coupler sections.
4901 BB/BZorAuxZ =BB01/BZ01
minimum setting:...............0.00 maximum setting:.................4.24
Input: 0 1... 4 / 01... 12 1... 4 / 13... 24
Display: = non existent = BB01... BB04 / BZ01... BZ12 = BB01... BB04 / BZ01... BZ12
Legend: BB = Busbar no. BZ = Bus zone AB = Auxiliary bus zone (= bus coupler section)
4902 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent

. B
4924 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent
5-12
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
5.2.5
Configuration examples
The 7SS52 can be used for protecting busbar configurations with up to 3 main busbars and one transfer (bypass) busbar or 4 main busbars and up to 48 bays. For configuration of the up to 12 busbar sections (including up to 4 transfer busbar sections) and 12 bus coupler sections the busbar sections (BB01 to BB12) and bus coupler sections (AB01 to AB12) are numbered each from left to right, beginning with the 1st main busbar up to the transfer busbar or 4th main busbar. Table 5-1 summarizes the design data for an exemplary triple busbar configuration with transfer bus. A bus coupler section (auxiliary bus zone) is a busbar section serving exclusively for coupling busbar sections and containing no feeders. They normally appear in combination with bus couplers. An example is shown in Fig. 5-3 (AB1, AB2). Fig. 5-3 shows an example for a double busbar with combi-bus. The design data for this configuration are summarized in Table 5-2.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-13
Central Unit
Fig. 5-2
Triple busbar with transfer bus (TB)
Configuration: DA 4900 BB-Configurat. DA 4901 BB01/BZ01 DA 4902 BB01/BZ02 DA 4903 BB02/BZ03 DA 4904 BB02/BZ04 DA 4905 BB03/BZ05 DA 4906 BB03/BZ06 DA 4907 BB04/BZ07 DA 4908 BB04/BZ08 DA 5401 PROT TR BUS (Protection transfer bus): blocked/released (released in case of external current transformers) DA 5402 ISOLAT 4 = TR-Isolator
5-14
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
Table 5-1
Configuration of a triple busbar with transfer bus Design- ISO1:Axx ation (DA XX07) 1.0 BZ1 ISO2:Axx (DA XX08) BZ3 ISO3:Axx (DA XX09) BZ5 ISO4:Axx ISO5:Axx (DA XX10) (DA XX11) BZ7 Outgoing isolator CT LOC (DA XX04) 1a) Bus side t. bus 1b) Bus side t. line 2) Line side Line side
Bay: Type (XX) (DA XX01) 01 Feeder bay
02
Two-bay bus coupler Two-bay bus coupler Two-bay bus coupler Two-bay bus coupler Section isolator Feeder bay
2.1
BZ1
BZ3
BZ5
non existent BZ7
non existent non existent non existent non existent non existent Outgoing isolator
03
2.2
BZ1
BZ3
BZ5
non existent
04
3.1
BZ1
BZ3
BZ5
non existent non existent BZ7/BZ8
Bus side t. bus
05
3.3
BZ2
BZ4
BZ6
Line side
06
3.2
BZ1/BZ2
BZ3/BZ4
BZ5/BZ6
non existent
07
4.0
BZ2
BZ4
BZ6
BZ8
1a) Bus side t.bus 1b) Bus side t. line 2) Line side Line side
08
Two-bay bus coupler Two-bay bus coupler
5.1
BZ2
BZ4
BZ6
non existent BZ8
non existent non existent
09
5.2
BZ2
BZ4
BZ6
non existent
1a) in-side CTs (BB side), referred to Q7 1b) in-side CTs (line side), referred to Q7 2) Line side CTs (line side, referred to Q7)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-15
Central Unit
Bay number
BB1 BB2
BZ1 BZ4
BZ2 BZ5
AB1 AB2
BZ3 BZ6
Fig. 5-3
Double busbar with combi-bus
Configuration: DA 4900 DA 4901 DA 4902 DA 4903 DA 4904 DA 4905 DA 4906 DA 4907 DA 4908 DA 5401 DA 5402
BB-Configurat. BB01/BZ01 BB01/BZ02 BB01/AB01 BB01/BZ03 BB02/BZ04 BB02/BZ05 BB02/AB02 BB02/BZ06 PROT TR BUS (Protection transfer bus): released ISOLAT 4 = COTR-Isolator
5-16
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
Table 5-2
Configuration of a double busbar with combi-bus ISO1:Bxx (DA XX07) CL-BB01 ISO2:Bxx (DA XX08) CR-BZ04 ISO3:Bxx (DA XX09) non existent non existent non existent non existent ISO4:Bxx (DA XX10) non existent BZ04 ISO5:Bxx (DA XX11) non existent non existent non existent non existent CT LOC (DA XX04) Bus side t. line
Bay: Type Design(XX) (DA XX01) ation 01 One-bay coupler Feeder bay Feeder bay One-bay coupler w/o CB Section isolator One-bay coupler Feeder bay Section isolator One-bay coupler Section isolator Feeder bay Feeder bay 1.0
02
2.0
BZ01
BZ04
Line side
03
3.0
BZ01
BZ04
BZ04
Line side
04
4.0
CL-BZ04
CR-BZ05
non existent
Bus side t. bus
05
5.0
BZ01/BZ02
non existent CR-BZ05
non existent non existent non existent non existent non existent non existent non existent non existent
non existent non existent BZ05
non existent non existent non existent non existent non existent non existent non existent non existent
non existent
06
6.0
CL-BZ02
Bus side t. bus
07
7.0
BZ02
BZ05
Line side
08
8.0
BZ02/AB01
BZ05/AB02
non existent non existent non existent BZ06
non existent
09
9.0
CL-AB01
CR-AB02
Line side
10
10.0
AB1/BZ03
AB02/BZ06
non existent
11
11.0
BZ03
BZ06
Line side
12
12.0
BZ03
BZ06
BZ06
Line side
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-17
Central Unit
Types of bays
Bays can be configured as 1-bay bus couplers, 2-bay bus couplers, feeder bays or sectionalizing isolators in 7<3( %;; '$ ;;=(. Reserve bays may be provided for in the configuration; these may be assigned any number that corresponds to their actual location. A reserve bay must be configured as QRQ H[LVWHQW in %$< 67$ %;; '$ ;;=(. Depending on the size of the station, the hardware design of the central unit can be adapted in steps of 8 connections for bay units. One bay unit is allocated to each feeder bay and each sectionalizer. The station configuration can include up to 16 bus couplers and 24 sectionalizers. Accordingly, bus couplers may be assigned one or two bay units. For further explanations about connection and setting of the bus coupler bays please refer to chapter 7.1.5.1.
Reserve bays
Hardware design
Isolators
Up to 5 isolators can be connected to each bay unit. Isolators 1 to 3 are allocated to the busbar isolators. Isolator 4 can be configured as busbar isolator, transfer bus isolator or combi-bus isolator, depending on the setting %%,62/$7 '$ =(. Isolator 5 is assumed to be used as a line isolator but can also be used as a busbar isolator or sectionalizer. Isolators 1 to 5 can be used as sectionalizers, depending on the type of bay. In bay units of the type sectionalizer, isolators 1 to 4 can only be used as sectionalizers. A maximum of 24 sectionalizers can be configured per substation. For each isolator one auxiliary contact for recognition of the OPEN position and one auxiliary contact for recognition of the CLOSED position is wired to the bay unit. The binary inputs BI1 to BI10 have default allocations (refer Table 5-4). The isolators existing in each bay are identified by parameters %%,62%;; '$ ;; to %%,62%;; '$ ;;=(. The isolators are allocated to the bus sections is by means of the bus section number (refer also to chapter 5.2.1). In the status bay out of service all configured isolators of this bay are assumed by the 7SS52 to be OPEN. In case of bus coupler bays (type two-bay coupler), this applies automatically for both bay units.
Sectionalizing isolators
Isolator location
For isolators in one-bay couplers it is necessary to specify, in addition to the busbar section, whether the isolator is located upstream or downstream of the circuit breaker, i.e. whether it is installed on the left (CL-...) or on the right (CR-...). To include the transfer or combi-bus in the protection system, the CTs in the feeder bays (Fig. 5-3) must be located on the line side, and the protection function must be UHOHDVHG in 3527 75 %86 '$ =(.
CTs
5-18
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
CT location
The parameter &7 /2&%;; '$ ;;=( is evaluated as described on page 5-6. The settings mean in this context: EXVVLGH WRZ EXV means that the transformer is located between the circuit breaker and the busbar isolator (refer to Fig. 5-2, 1a) EXVVLGH WRZ OLQ means that the transformer is located upstream of the feeder isolator, i.e. between the circuit breaker and the feeder isolator (refer to Fig. 5-2, 1b) OLQH VLGH means that the transformer is located downstream of the feeder isolator. (refer to Fig. 5-2, 2) In one-bay couplers (couplers with one bay unit) this parameter specifies always the transformer location, as seen from the left-hand busbar section connected to the coupler. In two-bay couplers (couplers with two bay units) these settings of the CT location are irrelevant for the protection function or the representation of the coupler in DIGSI. The transformer location results in this case from the bay unit that is set to QRQ H[LVWHQW.
Table 5-3 FE
Example for the configuration of a 2-bay coupler with one CT CT polarity '$ ;;=( line side line side bus side line side CT location '$ ;;=( busside tow. line busside tow. line non existent busside tow. line
1 2 3 4
CT polarity
The parameter &7 32/%;; '$ ;;=( has the settings EXV VLGH and OLQH VLGH. The settings are made to match the plant-specific layout of the transformers. The CT polarity defines the current direction for evaluation by the program. In Fig. 5-3, OLQH VLGH must selected for all feeder bays. The CT of the first bus coupler detects the current for bay 1. This means that the for the bus couplers the same CT polarity must be selected as for all feeder bays.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-19
Central Unit
5.3
Marshalling information
During normal service of the station protection, it may be desirable to influence the device temporarily. An example may be to take a bay out of service during maintenance work. This taking out of service can be performed at the bay unit via binary input or at the bay unit or central unit via operation.
5.3.1
Binary inputs
The input/output module EAZ3 has 7 binary inputs (BI 1 - 7). The binary inputs can be freely allocated. They are active both with and without a voltage being applied. When the alarm and binary input data are rebooted, the default function numbers are loaded (refer to Table 5-4). The functions allocated to the binary inputs can be changed using an operator-guided dialog '$ or the communication software DIGSI (menu item Marshalling relay / Binary input / LEDs).
Table 5-4 BI FNo.
Allocation of binary input signals to binary inputs Short text Logical function Allocated to binary input 1 2 -4
1 2 3 4
>Reset LED >Freeze FltRecBuf
Reset of LED Freeze fault record buffer
>ReleaseFltRecBuf Release fault record buffer >Reset Idif-block Release blocking after pick-up of differential current supervision Release blocking after isolator failure
5 6 7 8 9 10
>Reset IsoMalBlck
5 ----3
>Reset annuncBuff Erase contents of the report buffer >Blocking BF >Blocking BZ trip >Release EF char. >Sync. date/time Blocking of BF Blocking of BZ protection (BZ TRIP) Release of earth fault characteristic Clock synchronization
5-20
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
>Reset LED
The binary signal resets all LEDs for which no annunciation is present any more. The binary signal generates a fault record. Pre-fault and post-fault times here refer to the binary signal input.
>Freeze FltRecBuf
> R e l e a s e F l t R e c B u f The binary signal erases the content of the fault record buffer so that new fault records can be stored. >Reset Idif-block The binary signal releases the protection which had been blocked by the differential current supervision. This function is active only when the parameters ',)) 683 %= '$ =( and/or ',)) 683 &= '$ =( are set to EORFN VWRUDJH. The binary signal causes release of the protection blocking initiated by isolator failure and reset of the alarm ,VRO IOW DODUP )1R =(. This function is only active if the parameter ,62 0$/ 5(6 '$ =( is set to EORFN VWRUDJH. The binary signal erases the operational events and fault events buffer. The binary signal blocks the external initiation of the breaker failure protection (refer to chapter 4.5.5.5). The binary input blocks the output of all TRIP commands (refer to chapter 4.5.5.4). The binary input switches the busbar and circuit breaker failure protection to the earth fault characteristic (refer to chapter 4.1.2.2) The binary signal is used for clock synchronization in the central unit (refer to chapter 4.5.8)
>R e s e t I s o M a l B l c k
>Reset annuncBuff >Blocking BF >Blocking BZ trip >Release EF char.
>Sync. date/time
5.3.2
Binary outputs and LED indications

The central unit has, depending on its version, 16 alarm relays and 16 LED-indications (version with one EAZ3) or each 32 alarm relays and LEDs (full version with two EAZ3).
Marshalling
Marshalling can be performed via the communication program DIGSI in an interactive dialog with the central unit. The functional numbers are used for allocation of the functions. After the DIGSI menu item MARSHALLING RELAY / BINARY INPUT / LEDs has been called up, the further control is done by keys.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-21
Central Unit
Y N I CTRL and C <rnr>
Question answered with YES process continues Jump to the next menu item by negation Information about handling Interrupt marshalling Comment to entering the desired event/function number
For operation only capitals may be used. Faulty inputs cause backstep to the next higher menu level. The marshalling information that is entered in DIGSI '$ =( is automatically logged and filed in the station directory in the file TERMINAL.TXT. Since the file TERMINAL.TXT is automatically overwritten the next time MARSHALLING RELAYS is called from the menu, is should first be saved with a different name. The alarms listed in Appendix A.2.1can be marshalled to the alarm relays and LEDs. Several alarms (up to 5) can be allocated to one binary output (group alarm). The most frequently used group alarms are already provided in the system with their own function number. Group alarms that are not already provided are created by marshalling different function numbers to one relay and/or LED. Any existing allocations must first be erased. Menus The following menus are offered after selecting marshalling: Change Rel/LED-allocation? (Menu for allocation of the same function number for the alarm relay and corresponding LED.) Change relay allocation? (separate allocation of functions possible.) Change LED allocation? (separate allocation of functions possible.) Indicate correlation event number (E-No)/alarm? (List of all alarms, indication of the corresponding function numbers and supplementary information about actual marshalling.) Indicate correlation relay/alarm? (overview of the present status of marshallings for all alarm relays and LEDs.) Test alarm relays? (Option for separate control of each alarm relay in combination with corresponding LED. Control is reset after a short time.) Any number of logical alarm functions can be marshalled to one output. Each alarm can be marshalled to up to 5 relays or LEDs.
5-22
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
Appendix A.2 shows a list of all possible alarms together with their function number (F-No). The preselection for the LEDs and alarm relays is identical upon delivery and can be seen in Table 5-5. For the LED display, the alarm defines whether the display is operated memorized m or non-memorized nm.
Table 5-5 Relay and LED No. 1 2 3 Default allocation of LEDs and alarm relays in the central unit Logical function Group alarm FNo.
Failure with protection blocking Failure without protection blocking Failure of BU Measured value supervision I-SUM 15V supply supervision CU 24V supply supervision CU 15V supply supervision BU 5V supply supervision BU 0V supply supervision BU Battery supervision CU Battery supervision BU Failure in auto. testing Fault record buffer blocked Fault: CBF-BI Time exceeded or CBF-BI release outside time window Diff-current superv.: CZ (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ (group alarm) Failure of isolator aux. voltage CB failure Isolator fault: status (group alarm) Isolator fault: run (group alarm) BZ-TRIP blocked BF blocked Bay out of service Maintenance of bay Isolator operation not permitted Isolator operation not permitted in case of isolator fault
X X
000 001 014 283 276 277 278 279 280 281 282
5 6 7
297 011 098-103
159 256 149 150 151 152 067 097 012 013 X 015 148
X X
10 11 12
13
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-23
Central Unit
Table 5-5 Relay and LED No. 14 15 16
Default allocation of LEDs and alarm relays in the central unit Logical function Group alarm FNo.
TRIP repeat Breaker failure/transfer trip Device TRIP (group alarm) X
064-066 096 076
5-24
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
5.4
System settings and interfaces

The system addresses '$ and =( are set by the manufacturer. Normally, no changes of these addresses should be necessary.
Block 50 5000 CHANGE SYST/DESGN DATA?
System data 5100 SYST.DATA: System state ?
5101 REBOOT =blocked
Initial software loading (only for diagnostic purposes) = EORFNHG = UHOHDVHG (initial program loading is to be performed - after reboot, function has to be blocked again)
5102 FAULT REACT =blocked
Unit reaction to system fault (infinite loop operation) = EORFNHG (unit operating despite system fault ) only permissible for testing and troubleshooting) = UHOHDVHG (unit blocked and in monitor state)
5103 AUT LED ACK =released
Automatic acknowledgment of LED indications = EORFNHG (The LED status is stored. Reset by digital input or operator panel) = UHOHDVHG (All LED indications are updated with each new TRIP-command)
5104 FRECUENCY =50 HZ
Setting of the system nominal frequency = +] = +]
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-25
Central Unit
5105 I>SUM =.50 I/IN
SUPV
Limit value for measured value supervision (Plausibility check in the bay units) (IN: nominal current of bay CT) minimum setting:...............0.20 maximum setting:.................1.00
5106 OFFS SUP BU =.10 V
Limit value for 0 V (Offset) supervision of the analog/digital converter in the bay units minimum setting:...............0.10 V maximum setting:.................0.50 V
5107 15 V SUP BU =1.50 V
Limit value for 15 V auxiliary voltage supervision in the bay units minimum setting:...............0.50 V maximum setting:.................2.50 V
Serial link 5200 SYST.DATA: Serial link ?

Setting for the serial link
5201 TERMBAUD CU =19200 Baud
Baud rate for data exchange between central unit and PC minimum setting:...............1 200 Baud maximum setting:...............38 400 Baud
6317 FLTREC RELE =1x0.4 s, auto
Refreshing the fault buffer = [ V DXWR Always the last fault record is stored and available for read-out. A previously stored fault record is overwritten = [ V PDQ After storing two fault records, the fault recording function remains blocked until released by control '$ =( or binary input (!5HOHDV)OW5HF%XI). If released, both buffers are erased irrespective of their contents. = [ V PDQ After storing one fault record with a duration of 0.8 s, the fault recording function remains blocked (released by '$ =()
5-26
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
6318 CONTRREL BU =released
Control facility %D\ RXW RI VHUYLFH &% 7HVW and 0DLQWHQDQFH = EORFNHG = UHOHDVHG The bay-selective control facility can be released from the central unit for all bay units by binary input or by control. When set to EORFNHG, an attempt to take a bay out of service locally at a bay unit will be inhibited with the indication 127 $87+25,=(' .
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-27
Central Unit
5.5
Functions settings
All operational parameters which start with address 6XXX are settings and can be read out and changed during normal operation. After completion of the parameter changing process, a restart is initiated. Read-out of parameters can be performed without the input of a password either by paging or by direct addressing. The address selection is supported by function keys. The parameters can only be changed after entering the password 987.
5.5.1
Settings for the busbar differential protection

The busbar differential protection represents the main function of the 7SS52.
Pickup characteristic Block 61
The parameters for the pick-up characteristic consist of differential current limit I > Diff and stabilizing factor STAB FAC. These values can be set individually for the bus section-selective protection and the check zone.
6000 CHANGE SETTINGS
6100 SETTINGS: BB-Diff.Protec ?
The busbar differential protection
6101 STAB FAC:BZ =.65
Stabilizing factor for the bus section-selective protection (common for all buses) minimum setting:...............0.10 maximum setting:.................0.80
6102 I>DIFF =1.00 I/Ino
:BZ
Diff-current threshold for the bus section-selective protection (common for all buses) minimum setting:...............0.20 maximum setting:.................4.00 Ino: normalized nominal current referred to the base CT (CT with the highest transformation ratio, see also parameter 1250 %$6 ,1 '$ =(
5-28
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
6103 STAB FAC:CZ =.50
Stabilizing factor for the check zone minimum setting:...............0.00 maximum setting:.................0.80
6104 I>DIFF =1.00 I/Ino
:CZ
Diff-current threshold for the check zone minimum setting:...............0.20 maximum setting:.................4.00
6105 NORM BAS IN =1000.0 A
Nominal current of the basic CT (reference val. Ino). This parameter is the normalizing factor for setting the differential current thresholds and the differential current supervision thresholds. minimum setting:...............20.0 A maximum setting:............6 000.0 A
6106 TRminDURATI =.10 s
Minimum duration of the TRIP command The duration of the TRIP command starts with the TRIP command. The TRIP commands of all bays have a duration of the set time as a minimum. The TRIP command is reset only after the set time has elapsed and the current sensor of the bay has dropped off. minimum setting:...............0.02 s maximum setting:.................1.00 s
6107 BI TRIPENAB =non existent
Binary input feeder-specific TRIP release for busbar short-circuit (refer to chapter 4.5.1.2) = QRQ H[LVWHQW = H[LVWHQW
6108 I<STA-EF:SS =.00 I/Ino
Stabilizing current threshold of the busbar protection with earth fault characteristic minimum setting:...............0.00 I/Ino maximum setting:...............25.00 I/Ino
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-29
Central Unit
6109 I>DIF-EF:SS =.25 I/Ino
Differential current threshold of the busbar protection with earth fault characteristic minimum setting:...............0.05 I/Ino maximum setting:.................0.04 I/Ino
6110 I<STA-EF:CZ =.00 I/Ino
Stabilizing current threshold of the check zone with earth fault characteristic minimum setting:...............0.00 I/Ino maximum setting:...............25.00 I/Ino
6111 I>DIF-EF:CZ =.25 I/Ino
Differential current threshold of the check zone with earth fault characteristic minimum setting:...............0.05 I/Ino maximum setting:.................0.04 I/Ino
Differential current supervision Block 63
The parameters for the differential current supervision consist of: Diff-current limit ,!683(59 and 7',)) 6839 (time delay after which blocking becomes effective). The current limits can be set individually for the bus section-selective protection and the check zone. The time delay is common to all.
6300 SETTINGS: Supervision ?
Start of the block Supervision
6306 DIFF SUPERV =active
Differential current supervision function = LQDFWLYH = DFWLYH
The differential current supervision must be switched on during normal service. Disconnection is only intended for testing purposes (e.g. checking the pick-up characteristic).
6307 T-DIFF SUPV =2 s
Time delay for blocking of protection or alarm minimum setting:...............1 s maximum setting:...............10 s
5-30
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
6308 I>SUPERV:B =.10 I/Ino
Differential current limit for the bus section-selective protection minimum setting:...............0.05 I/Ino maximum setting:.................0.80 I/Ino
6309 I>SUPERV:CZ =.10 I/Ino
Differential current limit for the check zone minimum setting:...............0.05 I/Ino maximum setting:.................0.80 I/Ino
6310 DDIFF SUP BZ =blockAutoReleas
Response to pick-up of the bus section-selective differential current supervision (refer to chapter 4.5.9.3) = DODUP RQO\ = EORFN$XWR5HOHDV (Blocking with automatic release) = EORFN VWRUDJH (Blocking with storage)
6311 DIFF SUP CZ =alarm only
Response to pick-up of the differential current supervision for the check zone (refer to chapter 4.5.9.3) = DODUP RQO\ = EORFN$XWR5HOHDV (Blocking with automatic release) = EORFN VWRUDJH (Blocking with storage)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-31
Central Unit
5.5.2
Block 62
Circuit breaker failure protection
6200 SETTINGS: Bkr.Fail Protec?
6201 STAB FAC:BF =.50
Stabilizing factor for the differential protection principle with CBF mode of operation set to BZ unbalance, trip rep/unbal and trip.rep/unb imp minimum setting:...............0.00 maximum setting:.................0.80
6202 I<STA-EF:BF =.00 I/In
Stabilizing current limit of the breaker failure protection with earth fault characteristic minimum setting:...............0.00 maximum setting:...............25.00 If set to 0.00 this characteristic is not effective.
5.5.3
Supervisory function
The parameters for this function can be divided into four groups: Supervision of the breaker failure protection release (refer e.g. to chapter 4.5.9.6) Isolator supervision (refer e.g. to chapter 4.5.9.4) Supervision function for the linearized current transformers (refer e.g. to chapter 4.5.9.8) Supervision function from the internal cyclic tests (refer e.g. to chapter 4.5.9.9)
Block 63
6300 SETTINGS: Supervision ?
Isolator supervision 6301 ISO TRA TIM =7.00 s
Isolator operating time minimum setting:...............1.00 s maximum setting:.............180.00 s
5-32
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
6302 ISO MAL RES =alarm only
Protection response for isolator malfunction (supervision criteria: running time, breaker faulty and auxiliary voltage failure) = DODUP RQO\ (,VRO\ IOW SOD %;;, ,VRO\ IOW UXQ %;; or %D\ '& IDLO%;;) = EORFN$XWR5HOHDV Upon recognition of an isolator failure, the protection is blocked and the failure is signalled. Blocking is automatically cancelled when the isolator failure no longer persists = EORFN VWRUDJH Upon recognition of an isolator failure, the failure is signalled and the protection is blocked (depending on the setting of parameter %/2&.,1* '$ =(). Blocking is cancelled only when the failure does not exist any longer and the blocking is acknowledged via control'$ =( or via the binary input 5HVHW ,VR0DO%OFN %, )1R =(. = EORFN6WRUUHO (Blocking with storage and release) Upon recognition of an isolator failure, the failure is signalled and the protection is blocked (depending on the setting of parameter %/2&.,1* '$ =(). Blocking is cancelled even if the failure still exists and the blocking has been acknowledged via control'$ =( or via the binary input 5HVHW ,VR0DO%OFN %, )1R =(. An operation not permissible annunciation is output.
6303 BAY DC FAIL =OLD isol status
Treatment of the isolator status if the auxiliary voltage for the isolator status checkback signal fails =2/' LVRO VWDWXV (isolator status) = LVRO &/26('
6304 ISOL ST 1/1 =OLD isol status
Treatment of the isolator status in case of a plausibility error (OPEN and CLOSED signalled at the same time) = 2/' LVRO VWDWXV (isolator status) = LVRO &/26('
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-33
Central Unit
6305 BLOCKING =block BZ
Response of the protection system in case of isolator faults, measured value errors or bay faults = EORFN 3URWHF (Blocking of the entire protection system) = EORFN %= (Blocking of all 3 phases of the protected zone,)
Linearized current transformers 6312 ZERO CR SUP =active
Zero crossing supervision = LQDFWLYH = DFWLYH
After an external fault has been switched off by an external protection device, a demagnetizing DC component may be present in linearized CTs (TPZ-cores), which resembles an internal fault. In order to avoid spurious tripping, the differential current can be monitored to detect a plain DC component. Release of the zero crossing supervision is a prerequisite. This threshold must be set smaller than the differential current threshold ,!',)) %= '$ =(.
6313 I> ZERO =.50 I/Ino
CR
Threshold of the differential current for checking the current zero crossing minimum setting:...............0.15 I/Ino maximum setting:.................4.00 I/Ino
The DC monitoring is performed for each measuring system. The differential current is compared with the set threshold. For the selective protection zones and the check zone, a common limit can be parameterized. Tripping is blocked, unless the measured value falls below the limit within a fixed time. Blocking is maintained until the measured value falls below the limit (refer to chapter 4.5.9.8). Protection and circuit breaker test 6314 AUTO =active TEST
Cyclic testing (refer to chapter 4.5.9.9) = LQDFWLYH = DFWLYH Testing must be operative during normal service, disconnection is only permissible for testing purposes.
5-34
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
6315 TEST FAULT =alarm only
Response for pick-up of the cyclic tests = DODUP RQO\ = EORFN SURWHF After failure clearance, the protection blocking can be released via '$ =( or the protection system is reactivated by restart.
6316 I< MAN TRIP =.05 I/IN
Current threshold for performing the circuit breaker test (refer to chapter 4.5.5.1) minimum setting:...............0.00 I/IN maximum setting:.................0.50 I/IN
Battery supervision 6319 BATTERY = existent CU
Buffer battery in central unit = QRQ H[LVWHQW = H[LVWHQW
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-35
Central Unit
5.6
5.6.1
Read out of information

Introduction
After a fault, annunciations and events provide an overview of important fault data and an insight as to how the protection unit functioned. This information is also important when protection functions are tested during commissioning. Furthermore, they provide information about switching operations, about measured data and about the protection system itself during normal service. For reading out recorded events via the central unit no password input is necessary.
Display of events
The events generated in the 7SS52 are presented to the user in various ways: Indications by means of LEDs on the front plate of the central unit Binary outputs (alarm relays) from module EAZ3 Information via display or via communication program DIGSI In the event of auxiliary voltage failure all event memories are reset.
Start of the alarm blocks 7000 READOUT ANNUNCIATIONS ?
Start of the alarm blocks
The events/indications are grouped as follows: Block 71 Operational indications - Isolator status indications - Unit supervision annunciations Fault events Isolator replica This address block contains the configuration of the bays to the bus sections according to the actual isolator replica recognized by the bay units. The isolator replica is cyclically refreshed. Processor modules ZPS-BSZ 2 and 3 are responsible for the zone-selective busbar protection based on this configuration. Disturbances and failures in the isolator states are detected independently and stored. Block 74 Measured values from the check zone (ZPS-BSZ1) for commissioning - Differential and stabilizing currents Measured values from ZPS-BSZ2 for commissioning of the 12 busbar sections - Differential and stabilizing currents As for block 75 for ZPS-BSZ3
Block 72 Block 73
Block 75
Block 76
Appendix A.3.3 shows some examples for the alarms.
5-36
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
The 7SS52 can store 2 fault records with a duration of 400 ms each. All feeder currents, the differential and stabilizing currents of the 12 bus sections and the check zone are recorded. The resolution of the measured value is 1 ms for a frequency of 50 Hz and 833 ms for 60 Hz. Reading out and presentation of the fault record are supported by the DIGSI communication software.
5.6.2
Operational events
Operational events yield information about the status of the protection system during service. Important events and status changes are chronologically listed from '$ =(. Time information is shown in minutes. Up to 99 operational events are stored. If more events are issued the oldest are overwritten.
Block 71
The input of the password is not required for reading out the operational events buffer. The values are not updated during read-out. Only after re-entering block are the updated values displayed. Operational events can be read out on the operator panel in one of the following ways: By scrolling block by block using the keys (forwards) and (back) until address (operational events) or (fault events) is reached. Direct selection by depressing the MENU key, entering address and finally depressing the ENTER key After selection of '$ =( and scrolling with keys are displayed. the operational events
Events and alarms can be recorded as they come (pick-up) (C) or when they go (dropoff) (G). The operational events for the 7SS52 are summarized in Appendix A.2. There are two types of operational events: Isolator events (changes of status; failures):
Table 5-6
Isolator events (changes of status; failures) Event name Short text Isolator ON Isolator OFF Isol flt place Isol flt run VOLTAGE FAIL Supplementary information Time + isol. name + bay no. Time + isol. name + bay no. Time + isol. name+ bay no. Time + isol. name + bay no. Time + bay no.
Isolator position On Isolator position Off Isolator fault: Switching fault Isolator fault: Runtime exceeded Isolator malfunction DC voltage failure
Notes: For each change of isolator status one event is generated, i.e. either the new isolator status or a faulty status.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-37
Central Unit
Supervisory events Operational events are events which are generated by the continuous self-monitoring process, or which indicate conditions which are not directly connected with protection fault processing and Isolator status events are only registered as Coming Supervisory events are registered as Coming or Going. Each event is tagged with the current relative time counter.
5-38
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
Table 5-7
Supervisory events of the central unit Event Short text Err. PROT BLOCK Err. PROT ACTIVE Id-sup BZ01 Id-sup BZ02 Id-sup BZ03 Id-sup BZ04 Id-sup BZ05 Id-sup BZ06 Id-sup BZ07 Id-sup BZ08 Id-sup BZ09 Id-sup BZ10 Id-sup BZ11 Id-sup BZ12 diff sup CKZ L1 REBOOT DEVICE RESTART VOLTAGE FAIL RESTART AFT CONF Setting Configuration BF Bl err BF COM BIN MON T LED-acknowl Flt rec freezed. Flt rec blocked Flt aut L1 - 1 Flt aut L1 - 2 Flt aut L1 - 3 Meas in sup 15V-superv 0V-superv 15V-superv. CU 24V-superv. CU out of serv. CB fail req restart Rq Chang CT Pol: Request BOS req man Trp Supplementary information Time + C/G Time + C/G Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-No + phase Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-No + phase Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-No + phase Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-No + phase Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-No + phase Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-No + phase Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-No + phase Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-No + phase Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-no.+ phase Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-no.+ phase Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-no.+ phase Time + C/G + ZPS-BSZ-no.+ phase Time + C/G + phase Time + C Time + C Time + C Time + C Time + C/G Time + C/G Time + C/G + bay-no. + phase Time + C/G Time + C Time + C/G Time + C/G Time + C/G + bay-no. + phase Time + C/G + bay-no. + phase Time + C/G + bay-no. + phase Time + C/G + bay-no. Time + C/G + bay-no. Time + C/G + bay-no. Time + C/G + bay-no. Time + C/G + bay-no. Time + C/G + bay-no. Time + C/G + bay-no. Time + C + bay-no. Time + C + bay-no. Time + C/G + bay-no. Time + C/G + bay-no. + phase
Failure with protection block Failure without protection block Diff current supervision: BZ-01 Diff current supervision: BZ-02 Diff current supervision: BZ-03. Diff current supervision: BZ-04 Diff current supervision: BZ-05 Diff current supervision: BZ-06 Diff current supervision: BZ-07 Diff current supervision: BZ-08 Diff.-current-supervision: BZ-09 Diff.-current-supervision: BZ-10 Diff.-current-supervision: BZ-11 Diff.-current-supervision: BZ-12 Diff.-current-supervision: Check zone REBOOT DEVICE RESTART Voltage failure Restart after configuration Setting Configuration Failure: CBF-DI-time exceeded resp. -release outside time-window Failure: CBF-DI-release time exceeded LED-acknowledgment Fault record existent Fault record blocked Failure with protection test BSZ 1 Failure with protection test BSZ 2 Failure with protection test BSZ 3 MCT-supervision I-SUM 15-V-supervision BU 0-V-supervision BU 15-V-supervision CU 24-V-supervision CU Bay out of operation Circuit breaker failure Request start-up 1 Request change CT polarity2 Request bay out of service 3 Request CB test 4
1 A bay unit which was out of service, and switched off with the protection system switched on, is switched on again. Here the bay unit requests transmission of the actual settings from the central unit. The alarm request start-up is issued. The protection system initiates a restart. A@ issues an alarm with indication of the bay 2 Changing the CT polarity in the bay unit via parameter 8UTU6SQIU 96 number. 3 The alarm is issued for control 7hsrvpr in one of the connected bay units. 4 A single or three-phase circuit breaker test is initiated in a bay unit. As a consequence, the central unit generates an alarm with indication of the bay number.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-39
Central Unit
Explanations for the supplementary information: Time C/G Bay-no. ZPS-BSZ no. Phase Relative time value Coming/Going designation (1 to 48) (ZPS-BSZ-2 / ZPS-BSZ-3) L1, L2, L3
Table 5-8
Group alarms Failure with/without protection block in the central unit Alarm name Short text Group alarms Failure with/without protection block Reaction depends on setting of the parameter ,62 0$/ 5(6 '$ =(
Isolator failure (device failure, )1R runtime failure )1R ) Isolator failure auxiliary voltage missing )1R Diff current supervision busbar )1R Diff current supervision check zone )1R 15V supervision CU )1R 24V supervision CU )1R 15V supervision BU )1R 0V supervision BU )1R Measured value supervision I-SUM )1R Failure during protection test )1R
Isol flt place
Isol flt run Bay DC fail
Id-sup BZ
Reaction depends on setting of the parameter ',)) 683 %= '$ =( Reaction depends on setting of the parameter ',)) 683 &= '$ =(
Id-sup CZ
15V-superv. CU 24V-superv. CU 15V-superv. 0V-superv. Meas in sup.
Failure with protection block Failure without protection block
Flt aut
Reaction depends on setting of the parameter =(52 &5 683 '$ =(
5.6.3
Block 72
Fault events
Fault events are created by the protection device with reference to busbar faults and stored consecutively in the event buffer from address '$ =(, with added relative time tags. For each fault event a fault number is allocated. Registration of the fault event starts with the trip command. A maximum of 40 events can be stored. If more events occur, the oldest event will be overwritten. Table 5-9 shows a list of the fault events.
5-40
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
Table 5-9 FNo. 16, 32, 48 17, 33, 49 18, 34, 50 19, 35, 51 20, 36, 52 21, 37, 53 22, 38, 54 23, 39, 55 24, 40, 56 25, 41, 57 26, 42, 58 27, 43, 59 64, 65, 66 68 96 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331
Fault events of the central unit Event name Trip command BZ - section 1 Trip command BZ - section 2 Trip command BZ - section 3 Trip command BZ - section 4 Trip command BZ - section 5 Trip command BZ - section 6 Trip command BZ - section 7 Trip command BZ - section 8 Trip command BZ - section 9 Trip command BZ - section 10 Trip command BZ - section 11 Trip command BZ - section 12 TRIP-repeat No release for trip command CF failure/transfer trip Transfer trip BZ 01 for Kup. o. LS Transfer trip BZ 02 bei Kup. o. LS Transfer trip BZ 03 bei Kup. o. LS Transfer trip BZ 04 bei Kup. o. LS Transfer trip BZ 05 bei Kup. o. LS Transfer trip BZ 06 bei Kup. o. LS Transfer trip BZ 07 bei Kup. o. LS Transfer trip BZ 08 bei Kup. o. LS Transfer trip BZ 09 bei Kup. o. LS Transfer trip BZ 10 bei Kup. o. LS Transfer trip BZ 11 bei Kup. o. LS Transfer trip BZ 12 bei Kup. o. LS Short text TrpBZ01= zzz TrpBZ02= zzz TrpBZ03= zzz TrpBZ04= zzz TrpBZ05= zzz TrpBZ06= zzz TrpBZ07= zzz TrpBZ08= zzz TrpBZ09= zzz TrpBZ10= zzz TrpBZ11= zzz TrpBZ12= zzz TripRep noTripReleas:BXX Transf. Trip TrTripBZ01= zzz TrTripBZ02= zzz TrTripBZ03= zzz TrTripBZ04= zzz TrTripBZ05= zzz TrTripBZ06= zzz TrTripBZ07= zzz TrTripBZ08= zzz TrTripBZ09= zzz TrTripBZ10= zzz TrTripBZ11= zzz TrTripBZ12= zzz Supplementary information Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + fault no. Time + C + Phase + feeder no. Time + C + feeder no. Time + C + feeder no. Time + C + fault no. Time + C + fault no. Time + C + fault no. Time + C + fault no. Time + C + fault no. Time + C + fault no. Time + C + fault no. Time + C + fault no. Time + C + fault no. Time + C + fault no. Time + C + fault no. Time + C + fault no.
Explanations for the supplementary information:

Time: Fault no.: Remarks: Relative time value 16 bit counter, revolving Fault events are only registered Coming
5.6.4
Block 73
Isolator replica
7300 ANNUNC: Isolator replic?
Allocation / operating status of bays
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-41
Central Unit
7301 Bay =on BZ1
01
. . .
7348 Bay =not connected 48
Only bays that been configured are output (max. 48 bays: '$ =(). = RQ %= RQ %= = RQ $% RQ $% = QRW FRQQHFWHG = RXW RI VHUYLFH = PDLQWHQDQFH for 1-bay couplers also: = RQ %=%= RQ $%$%
7349 Sect. isol. =not connected
. . .
7372 Sect. isol. =not connected Legend: BZ: Bus zone no. = 01 to 12
Output of isolators that are configured as sectionalizing isolators (max. 24 sectionalizers: '$ =() and belong to bays of the type IHHGHU ED\, EXVFRXS or VHFWLRQLVRODW. = RQ %=%= RQ $%$%
AB: Auxiliary bus (= bus coupler) section = 01 to 12
5.6.5
Operational measured values

Blocks =(, =( and =( allow display of the currents.
Block 74 7400 ANNUNC: DI/ST curr CZ ?

Measured values of the check zone (ZPS-BSZ1)
5-42
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
7401 Id =0% I/Ino
CZ
L1
Differential current in relation to the normalized nominal Ino for phase L1 The differential currents of the other phases are available under separate addresses '$ (L2) and '$ (L3).
7402 Is =0% I/Ino
CZ
L1
Stabilizing current for phase L1 '$ (L2) '$ (L3)
Block 75 7500 ANNUNC: DI/ST curr BSZ2?

Measured values of the bus zone-selective calculation (ZPS-BSZ2)
75YY Id BZXX Lz-2 =0% I/Ino
Differential current per phase (z) separately displayed for each of the 12 bus sections (XX). Display starting with YY = 01 for L1 and busbar section 01. Each further value in address YY + 2.
75YY Is BZXX Lz-2 =0% I/Ino
Stabilizing current per phase (z) for each of the 12 busbar sections (XX). Bays starting with YY = 02 for L1 and bus section 01. Each further value in address YY + 2.
Block 76 7600 ANNUNC: DI/ST curr BSZ3?

Measured values of the bus zone-selective calculation (ZPS-BSZ3)
76YY Id BZXX Lz-3 =0% I/Ino
Differential current (equivalent to '$ << Id)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-43
Central Unit
76YY Is BZXX Lz-3 =0% I/Ino
Stabilizing current (equivalent to '$ << Is)
In addition to the display of the differential and stabilizing currents, the currents of all bays can be displayed as percentage values. Block 78 7800 ANNUNC: Bay currents ?
Start of the address block for display of the bay currents. Continue by depressing key F3, abort with F4.
I %D\ 1R I %D\ 1R =u v w %
" XX I/IN
Input of the desired bay no. XX and confirm with ENTER. Display of the bay currents for phases L1 (u), L2 (v) and L3 (w). The values refer to the nominal current of the bay current transformer. Each new operation of the ENTER key updates the display.
5.6.6
Fault recording
Fault record buffer 6317 FLTREC RELE =1x0.4 s, auto

Refreshing the fault buffer = [ V DXWR Always the last fault record is stored and available for read-out. A previously stored fault record is overwritten = [ V PDQ After storing two fault records, the fault recording function remains blocked until released by control '$ . = [ V PDQ After storing one fault record with a duration of 0.8 s, the fault recording function remains blocked until released by '$ =(
Block 77
The fault recording annunciations in block 77 are only used by the DIGSI communication software.
5-44
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
7700 ANNUNC: Fault record ?
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-45
Central Unit
5.7
5.7.1
Control in operation
Release of control by bay units
6318 CONTRREL BU =released
The release of the control by the bay units refers to the bay settings RXW RI VHUYLFH and PDLQWHQDQFH = EORFNHG = UHOHDVHG
5.7.2
Block 80
Control functions
8000 CONTROL TEST
/ ?
8300 CONTROL: ReleasFltRecBuf?
The fault record function is activated. With the release command, the fault record buffer is ready for recording measured values of a subsequent fault. If two fault records are stored, both will be erased. This command is executed by depressing key F3.
RELS FLT REC BUF =executed !
Confirmation on display
8400 CONTROL: FreezeFltRecBuf?
Answering this question with key F3 generates a fault record. Pre-fault and post-fault time periods refer to initiation via keypad or the DIGSI communication software.
FREEZFLT REC BUF =executed !
Confirmation
5-46
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
8500 CONTROL: ReleasBloDifSup?
The busbar protection, which was blocked by pickup of the differential current supervision, can be released by this parameter. This control is useful only if the parameters ',)) 683 %= '$ =( or ',)) 683 &= '$ =( are set to EORFN VWRUDJH. The question 5HOHDVH EORFNLQJ GLII6X SHUYLVLRQ" has to be answered by key F3 and the command is executed.
RELS BLO DIF SUP =executed !
Confirmation
8600 CONTROL: ReleasBloIsoMal?
Release blocking by pick-up of the isolator failure supervision (running time, status, auxiliary supply failure) and by test failure (refer to chapter 4.5.9.4). This control is useful only if the parameter ,62 0$/ 5(6 '$ =( is set to EORFN VWRUDJH. Start with key F3. Release blocking by pick-up of the isolator failure supervision (running time, status, auxiliary supply failure) and by test failure (refer to chapter 4.6.10.4). This control is useful only if the parameter '$ =( is set to %ORFN ZLWK VWRUDJH. Start with key F3.
RELS BLO CB MALF =executed !
Confirmation
8700 CONTROL: Reset annun buf?
This command under '$ =( erases the event buffers (operation events '$ =( and fault events '$ =(). Start with key F3.
RESET ANNUNC BUF =executed !
Confirmation
Blocking 8800 CONTROL: Blocking ?

Blocking of the busbar protection TRIP command and the BF protection
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-47
Central Unit
Busbar protection 8801 CONTROL: BLOCK BZ TRIP ?

Blocking of the busbar protection TRIP command
BLOCK BZ TRIP =executed !
Confirmation
8802 CONTROL: RELEASE BZ TRP?
Release of the busbar protection TRIP command
RELEASE BZ TRIP =executed!
Confirmation
8803 CONTROL: BLOCK BF ?
Blocking of the BF protection
BLOCK BF =executed!
Confirmation
8804 CONTROL: RELEASE BF ?
Release of the BF protection
RELEASE BF = e x e c u t e d!
Confirmation
5-48
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
5.8
Block 90
Setting and reading the real-time clock
9000 DATE/TIME
Start of the block Setting the real time clock
17.02.00 09.45.00
The current date and time is displayed under address . Press to scroll to the next address and to scroll to the previous one.
9002 DATE
After pressing the key, a new date can be entered under address . The order of entry is day-month-year, separated by dots; day and month are entered with 2 digits, the year with 4 digits, i.e. ''00<<<<
9003 TIME
A new time can be entered under address . The order of entry is ++0066.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-49
Central Unit
5.9
Test functions
8100 TEST: Auto testing
For protection testing, a test routine is started, which covers the complete protection system from measured value acquisition up to the trip circuits. This test is useful only when the cyclic protection test $872 7(67 '$ =( is switched off. Start the test by depressing the YES key F3.
AUTO TESTING: =Cycl test runni! AUTO TESTING: =executed,all ok
After successful test performance, the protection test is automatically switched off. In case of detection of faults, the event is recorded in the fault buffer and in the operations events buffer. The display shows the text (UURU ! DQQXQF. Reading out and interpreting the fault buffer is described in chapter 8.3.5.
A circuit-breaker trip test can be performed. The pre-requisite for trip testing is: that the respective bay must be taken out of service (refer to chapter 4.5.5.2). feeder current , 0$1 75,3 '$ =( The CB test command is reset after a fixed time of 2 s. Circuit breaker test 8200 TEST: Manual trip
Answer with YES key F3 if circuit-breaker testing should be performed, otherwise continue with
5-50
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Central Unit
MAN TRIP BAY.PH?
Request to enter the bay number and the phase, e.g. input 4.2 (bay 4, phase L2). The input has to be concluded with the ENTER key. A three-phase test is performed if only the bay number is indicated. Prior to performing a CB test, the corresponding bay must be taken out of service (e.g. via 6WDWXV%;; '$ ;;=(). The inscription appears after entering the bay number and phase number, as well as after taking a bay out of service. Confirm with F3 Abort with NO key F4. If test was successful. Otherwise the following text appears: =TEST repeat =Bay non exist
bay
in service !
MAN TRIP BAY.PH? =04.L2?
MANUAL TRIP =executed!
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
5-51
Central Unit
5-52
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
This chapter deals with the functions and settings of the bay unit.
6
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 Introduction Defining the scope of protective functions Marshalling information Serial interfaces Function parameters Read out of information Control in operation Setting and reading the real-time clock Test functions 6-2 6-6 6-7 6-17 6-20 6-29 6-35 6-37 6-38
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-1
Bay Unit
6.1
Introduction
Note Via the front serial interface, comfortable communication is possible using the DIGSI communication software. For operation of the firmware V 1.30, DIGSI version V 3.34 or higher is required. The bay unit can also be operated through the integrated keypad in a device-user dialogue. For setting the operational parameters, it is necessary to enter the password (refer to chapter 3.4.1). The password is required in order to change the settings but not to read out the settings. There are three types of display: Addresses without request for operator input The address is identified by the block number followed by 00 (e.g. for block ). Displayed text forms the heading of this block. No input is expected. By using keys or the next or previous block can be selected. By using keys or the first or last address within the block can be selected and the addresses stepped through. Addresses which require numerical input The display shows the four-digit address, i.e. block and running number (e.g. for block , running number ). The meaning of the parameter is displayed next. The second line shows the value of this parameter. When the relay is delivered a value has been preset. In the following sections these default values are marked. If this value is to be retained no other inputs are necessary. The next (or previous) parameter within the block or the next (or previous) block can be accessed by paging. If the value needs to be altered it can be overwritten using the numerical keys and if applicable the decimal point and/or the change sign (+/-) key. The permissible setting range is given next to the associated box. Values outside this range are rejected. The setting steps correspond to the last decimal place shown in the setting box. Inputs with more decimal places than permitted will be truncated down to the permissible number. The value must be confirmed with the ENTER key! The display then confirms the accepted value. The new parameter, however, is not finally transferred until the parameter setting process is completed (refer to below). Addresses which require text input The display shows the four-digit address, i.e. block and running number (e.g. for block running number ). The meaning of the parameter is displayed next. The second line shows the text of this parameter. When the relay is delivered, a text has been preset. In the following sections these texts are marked. If it is to be retained no input is necessary. The next (or previous) parameter within the block or the next (or previous) block can be accessed by paging. If the text is to be changed, then this is performed by the NO key F4. One of the alternative choices which are tagged to the display boxes in the following sections then appears. If the alternative text is not desired, the F4 key is pressed again, etc. The alternative which is chosen is confirmed with the ENTER key. The following sections include the parameterizing of all setting values with explanations. The arrows and next to the display boxes indicate the method of moving from block to block or within a block. If the meaning of a parameter is unclear it is usually best to retain the preset value. Addresses not in use are skipped (passed over).
6-2
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
If the parameter address is known, direct addressing is possible. This is achieved by depressing key MENU, followed by the four-digit address and subsequently pressing the ENTER key. After direct addressing, paging by means of keys and is possible. The parameterizing process can be ended at any time by depressing one of the keys which changes the parameter block. The displayed question &+$1*( &20 3/(7('? is then answered with the YES key F3. In general, the question as to the completion of parameterizing appears each time a new block is chosen. If further parameters are to be changed the question should be answered by pressing the NO key F4. After completion of the parameterizing process, the changed parameters which so far have only been stored in volatile memories are then permanently and securely stored in EEPROMs. Initial display block 00 When the protection unit is switched on or the operator terminal is connected, firstly the '$ =( and the type identification of the unit is displayed.
0 7SS521 V1.30
The unit introduces itself with its type number and the version of firmware with which it is equipped.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-3
Bay Unit
Operating tree of the bay unit
Quiescent text (Basic status after switching on the FE) 0J7SS521 V1.20 7SS52115CA000AA0
LED Reset LED indication Operational measu red values (4 lines)
2) ESC
ESC
Block headline ESC ESC ESC ESC
Setting value Address range 1000 - 3999
Tests Address range 4000 - 4699
Measured values Address range 5700 - 5999 Previous measured value Next measured value
Marshalling Address range 6000 - 6999
Configuration Address range 7000 - 7899
1) ENTER
ESC ENTER
Confirm question
ESC ENTER
1) ENTER
ESC
Change mode Decimal parameter Increase value Reduce value Text parameter: Scroll forwards Scroll backwards ENTER Confirm value
F1 F2
3rd level Scroll forwards Scroll backwards
Change mode Decimal parameter Increase value Reduce value Text parameter: Scroll forwards Scroll back wards ENTER Confirm value
1) ENTER
ESC
Change mode Scroll forwards Scroll backwards ENTER Confirm value
1) Only possible if a valid password was entered. If no password has yet been entered, then the request to enter the password is displayed. 2) Leaving the related password area terminates the procedure of parameter changing or change of marshallings.
Figure 6-1 Operating tree of the bay unit
6-4
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
6.1.1
Block 71
Integrated operation
In block the quiescent indications for the display can be defined. A password is required.
7000
OP. SYSTEM
Start of configuration blocks
CONFIGURATION
7100
INTEGRATED
Start of the block integrated operation
OPERATION
7101
LANGUAGE
DEUTSCH
Operating language = '(876&+ = (1*/,6+ (default setting)
7120 IL1
OPER.1st L.
Quiescent display in the 4-lines mode for the 1st display line. All operational measured values from chapter A.4.3 can be selected in the change mode by depressing repeatedly the horizontal arrow keys and confirmed
by pressing the ENTER key. = ,/ = ,/ = ,/ = ,( For the check zone, the following additional measured values can be selected: = ,',)) / = ,5(675 / = ,',)) / = ,5(675 / = ,',)) / = ,5(675 /
7121
OPER.1st L.
SECONDARY
The parameter defines the selected operational measured value for the display. The differential and restraint currents are displayed only as percentage (secondary) values. = 6(&21'$5< (display in xxxx.x%) = 35,0$5< (display in xxxx.x A)
The selection of the quiescent displays in the 4-lines mode is carried out in the same manner for the further lines 2 ... 4. The selection of the measured values is stored in the direct addresses '$ )( (2nd line), '$ )( (3rd line) and '$ )( (4th line).
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-5
Bay Unit
6.2
Block 78
Defining the scope of protective functions
7800
SCOPE OF
Beginning of the block Scope of functions
FUNCTIONS
7812
CHARAC. PH
DEFINITE TIME
Characteristic O/C protection phases (only available with the option Backup protection): = '(),1,7( 7,0( = ,19(56( 7,0(
7815
CHARAC-E
DEFINITE TIME
Characteristic O/C protection earth (only available with the option Backup protection): = '(),1,7( 7,0( = ,19(56( 7,0(
The rated system frequency is set under '$ )(.
7899
FREQUENCY
fN 50 Hz
Rated system frequency: = I1 +] = I1 +]
6-6
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
6.3
6.3.1
Marshalling information
Introduction
It is the purpose of the marshalling to allocate logical functions to the hardware binary inputs, command and alarm relays and LEDs. The ex works pre-set alarms can be seen in Table 5-5. The allocation of the inputs and outputs in conformity with the requirements of the specific application is carried out via the integrated keypad and starts with '$ )(. Marshalling starts with selection of the desired binary input, relay or LED. By depressing the ENTER key, the third level of the operating tree is reached. Input of a password is requested. In the third level a marshalling point (out of 20 available) can be selected by operating the horizontal arrow keys This means that for each binary input, relay or LED, 20 logical functions can be marshalled. After selecting the marshalling point, the change mode is entered by depressing the ENTER key twice. In the change mode, the desired event is marshalled to this marshalling point by means of the horizontal arrow keys . The selected functional marshalling is terminated with the key ENTER. When marshalling functions to binary inputs, an additional selection is carried out during scrolling as to whether the input functions in a ZRUNLQJFXUUHQW or TXLHV FHQWFXUUHQW mode. When marshalling the LEDs, the options PHPRUL]HG or QRW PHPRUL]HG can additionally be selected. The third level is left with the key ESC or one of the vertical arrow keys. The password area is left by repeated operation of the ESC key. In case of changes in the settings, the question is asked whether the new settings are to be stored.
6000 MARSHALLING
Start of the marshalling blocks
6.3.2
Block 61
Binary inputs
The bay unit has 20 binary inputs, designated with %,1$5< ,1387 to %,1$5< ,1 387 . Marshalling of the binary inputs is carried out in address block . For each binary input function, working-current or quiescent-current can be selected. A - working current: An input is activated by a NO contact, i.e. control voltage at the input terminals activates the marshalled function; R - quiescent current: An input is activated by a NC contact, i.e. control voltage at the input terminals cancels the function, without control voltage it is active.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-7
Bay Unit
Table 6-1 gives an overview of the marshallable input functions with corresponding function numbers ()1R).
Note Marshalling of one logical function to 2 or more binary inputs is not supported (no logical connection). Each logical function is allocated to one binary input. Marshalling of several different functions to one binary input, however, is allowed. The general diagrams in Appendix A.2 and Table 6-2 show the pre-set binary inputs upon delivery. Marshalling of binary inputs 6100 MARSHALLING BINARY INPUTS
Start of the block Marshalling of binary inputs
6101
BINARY
INPUT 1
Depressing key ENTER displays the marshalled function. Repeated depressing of the ENTERkey starts the change mode.
INPUT 1
Isolator 1on NO
Binary input 1 is pre-set for isolator status 21 for isolator 1 (refer to Table 6-1). Working-current (NO) is selected.
INPUT 1
not allocated
Input 1 is not allocated to any further functions. Alarm numbers 2 to 20 are pre-set for QRW DOORFDWHG, )1R .
The change mode is left by depressing the key ESC.
6-8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
Table 6-1 FNo.
Marshallable binary input functions - bay unit Short text (indication on LC-display) >Time Synchro >Start FltRec >LED reset >Annunc. 1 >Annunc. 2 >Annunc. 3 >Annunc. 4 >CB Test >B/F on >B/F off >O/C Ph on >O/C Ph off >O/C E on >O/C E off >I>> block >I> block >Ip block >IE>> block >IE> block >IEp block >Isolator1on >Isolator1off >Isolator2on >Isolator2off >Isolator3on >Isolator3off >Isolator4on >Isolator4off >Isolator5on >Isolator5off >CBF L1 >CBF L2 >CBF L3 >CBF puls >CBF release >TRIP release >CB OFF >CB man.close >CB not ready >Bay o.of ser. >CBF 3-pole >CBF rel.3p >LS ON >Maintenance Logical functions
3 4 5 11 12 13 14 1156 1401 1402 1701 1702 1711 1712 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 7601 7602 7603 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 7614 7615 7616 7617 7618 7619 7620 7621 7622 7623 7624
>Time synchronization >Start fault recording >Reset LED indicators >User defined annunciation 1 >User defined annunciation 2 >User defined annunciation 3 >User defined annunciation 4 >CB test start >Switch on breaker failure protection >Switch off breaker failure protection >Switch on O/C protection phase >Switch off O/C protection phase >Switch on overcurrent protection earth >Switch off overcurrent protection earth >Overcurrent protection: block stage I>> >Overcurrent protection: block stage I> >Overcurrent protection: block stage Ip >Overcurrent protection: block stage IE>> >Overcurrent protection: block stage IE> >Overcurrent protection: block stage IEp >Isolator 1 - position closed >Isolator 1 - position open >Isolator 2 - position closed >Isolator 2 - position open >Isolator 3 - position closed >Isolator 3 - position open >Isolator 4 - position closed >Isolator 4 - position open >Isolator 5 - position closed >Isolator 5 - position open >Circuit breaker failure start phase L1 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L2 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L3 >Circuit breaker failure start pulse >Circuit breaker failure release >Trip release >Circuit breaker open >Circuit breaker manual close >Circuit breaker not ready >Bay out of service >Circuit breaker failure start 3-pole >Circuit breaker failure release 3-pole >Circuit breaker closed >Maintenance of bay
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-9
Bay Unit
Table 6-2 Direct address 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 1st display line
Pre-set binary inputs - bay unit 2nd display line FNo Note
MARSHALLING BINARY INPUT 1 BINARY INPUT 2 BINARY INPUT 3 BINARY INPUT 4 BINARY INPUT 5 BINARY INPUT 6 BINARY INPUT 7 BINARY INPUT 8 BINARY INPUT 9 BINARY INPUT 10 BINARY INPUT 11 BINARY INPUT 12 BINARY INPUT 13 BINARY INPUT 14 BINARY INPUT 15 BINARY INPUT 16 BINARY INPUT 17 BINARY INPUT 18 BINARY INPUT 19 BINARY INPUT 20
>BINARY INPUTS >Isol1/Closed >Isol1/Open >Isol2/Closed >Isol2/Open >Isol3/Closed >Isol3/Open >Isol4/Closed >Isol4/Open >Isol5/Closed >Isol5/Open >CBF L1 >CBF L2 >CBF L3 >CB-CLOSE com >CBF rel >CB test >CB Open not marshalled >CB disturb >Bay out serv
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
7601 7602 7603 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 7618 7615 1156 7617 1 7619 7620
Isolator status signal Closed for isolator 1 Isolator status signal Open for isolator 1 Isolator status signal Closed for isolator 2 Isolator status signal Open for isolator 2 Isolator status signal Closed for isolator 3 Isolator status signal Open for isolator 3 Isolator status signal Closed for isolator 4 Isolator status signal Open for isolator 4 Isolator status signal Closed for isolator 5 Isolator status signal Open for isolator 5 CBF protection initiation for phase L1 CBF protection initiation for phase L2 CBF protection initiation for phase L3 Close command for bus coupler circuit breaker CBF protection release signal Start three-pole circuit breaker test Bus coupler circuit breaker in Open status No function is allocated to input Circuit breaker failure disturbed Control bay out of service
A: working-contact R: quiescent-contact
6.3.3
Block 62
Alarm relay
The bay unit has one freely marshallable alarm output, designated with ALARM RELAY 1. Marshalling is carried out under '$ )(. Several logical functions (up to 20) can be marshalled to the alarm output. Table 6-3 shows the complete list of all available alarm functions with indication of the function number ()1R). Alarms beginning with ">" are direct checkback signals of the binary inputs and are identical to them. They appear as long as the corresponding binary input is active. The alarm relay is pre-set with %D\ RXW VHUY ()1R )().
6-10
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
Table 6-3 FNo
Marshallable output functions - bay unit Short text (indication on LC display) >Time Synchro >Start FltRec >LED reset >Annunc. 1 >Annunc. 2 >Annunc. 3 >Annunc. 4 >Prot. operat. LED reset I supervision Fail.Battery >CB Test >B/F on >B/F off B/F off B/F active B/F fault B/F Trip >O/C Ph on >O/C Ph off >O/C E on >O/C E off >I>> block >I> block >Ip block >IE>> block >IE> block >IEp block O/C Ph off O/C Ph active O/C E off O/C E active O/C Gen.Fault Fault L1 Fault L2 Fault L3 Fault E O/C Gen.Trip I>> Fault I>> Fault L1 I>> Fault L2 I>> Fault L3 T-I>> expired I>> Trip I> Fault I> Fault L1 I> Fault L2 I> Fault L3 T-I> expired I> Trp Ip Fault Ip Fault L1 Ip Fault L2 Ip Fault L3 Logical functions
3 4 5 11 12 13 14 52 60 161 177 1156 1401 1402 1451 1453 1455 1471 1701 1702 1711 1712 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1751 1753 1756 1758 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1791 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1820 1821 1822 1823
>Time synchronization >Start fault recording >Reset LED indicators >User defined annunciation 1 >User defined annunciation 2 >User defined annunciation 3 >User defined annunciation 4 >Any protection operative LED Reset Measured value supervision of currents, group alarm Failure: Battery >CB test start >Switch on breaker failure protection >Switch off breaker failure protection Breaker failure protection is switched off Breaker failure protection is active Breaker failure: fault detection Trip by breaker failure protection Switch on O/C protection phase >Switch off O/C protection phase >Switch on overcurrent protection earth >Switch off overcurrent protection earth >Overcurrent protection: block stage I>> >Overcurrent protection: block stage I> >Overcurrent protection: block stage Ip >Overcurrent protection: block stage IE>> >Overcurrent protection: block stage IE> >Overcurrent protection: block stage IEp Overcurrent protection phase is switched off Overcurrent protection phase is switched on Overcurrent protection earth is switched off Overcurrent protection earth is switched on General fault detection O/C O/C fault detection phase L1 O/C fault detection phase L2 O/C fault detection phase L3 O/C fault detection earth O/C general trip command O/C fault detection stage I>> O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L1 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L2 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L3 O/C time T-I>> expired O/C protection I>> phase trip O/C fault detection stage I> O/C fault detection stage I> phase L1 O/C fault detection stage I> phase L2 O/C fault detection stage I> phase L3 O/C time T-I> expired O/C protection I> phase trip O/C fault detection stage Ip O/C fault detection stage Ip phase L1 O/C fault detection stage Ip phase L2 O/C fault detection stage Ip phase L3
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-11
Bay Unit
Table 6-3 1824 1825 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 7601 7602 7603 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 7614 7615 7616 7617 7618 7619 7620 7621 7622 7623 7624 7631 7632 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 7639 7640 7641 7642 7643 7644 7645 7646 7650
Marshallable output functions - bay unit T-Ip expired IP Trip IE>>Fault T-IE>> expir IE>> Trip IE> Fault T-IE>expired IE> Trip IEp Fault T-IEp expired IEp Trip >Isolator1on >Isolator1off >Isolator2on >Isolator2off >Isolator3on >Isolator3off >Isolator4on >Isolator4off >Isolator5on >Isolator5off >CBF L1 >CBF L2 >CBF L3 >CBF puls >CBF release >TRIP release >CB OFF >CB man.close >CB not ready >Bay o.of ser. >CBF 3-pole >CBF rel.3p. >LS ON >Maintenance BB Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L1 CBF Trp.rp.L2 CBF Trp.rp.L3 CB Test L1 CB Test L2 CB Test L3 BB intertrip Bay o.of serv Maintenance CB not plaus. CBF Trip L123 End-Flt. Trip Trip blocked CBF-Prot.bloc Fail Com.CU O/C time T-Ip expired O/C protection Ip phase trip O/C fault detection IE>> earth O/C time T-IE>> expired O/C protection IE>> earth trip O/C fault detection IE> earth O/C time T-IE> expired O/C protection IE> earth trip O/C fault detection IEp earth O/C time T-IEp expired O/C protection IEp earth trip >Isolator 1 - position closed >Isolator 1 - position open >Isolator 2 - position closed >Isolator 2 - position open >Isolator 3 - position closed >Isolator 3 - position open >Isolator 4 - position closed >Isolator 4 - position open >Isolator 5 - position closed >Isolator 5 - position open >Circuit breaker failure start phase L1 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L2 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L3 >Circuit breaker failure start pulse >Circuit breaker failure release >Trip release >Circuit breaker open >Circuit breaker manual close >Circuit breaker not ready >Bay out of service >Circuit breaker failure start 3-pole >Circuit breaker failure release 3-pole >Circuit breaker closed >Maintenance of bay Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L1 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L2 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L3 Busbar protection: Intertrip Bay is out of service Maintenance of bay State of circuit breaker not plausible CBF protection: Trip L123 End fault protection: Trip L123 Trip is blocked by Central Unit CBF protection blocked by Central Unit Failure in communication with central unit
6-12
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
6.3.4
Block 63
LED indicators
The bay unit has 18 LEDs for optical event indication. 16 LEDs are freely marshallable and named LED1 to LED16. Each LED can be allocated to several alarms, and likewise several LEDs can be allocated to one alarm. In addition to the logical function, it is defined whether the indication shall be memorized m or not memorized nm. The marshallable alarm functions are listed in Table 6-3 and are identical to the alarm relay functions. The pre-set LED allocations upon delivery can be seen in Table 6-4.
Marshalling LED indicators 6300 MARSHALLING LED INDICATORS
Start of the block Marshalling LED indicators
6301
LED 1
Marshalling for LED 1
Depressing the ENTER key starts the change mode. A password is required.
LED 1
>Isolator 1/on nm
Only 1 alarm function is pre-set for LED 1 ()1R ). The indication is not memorized (nm).
LED 1
not allocated
The level is left by depressing key ESC. The pre-set allocations of LED indications 2 to 16 can in the same way be selected and displayed and, if so desired, changed.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-13
Bay Unit
Table 6-4 Direct address 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310 6311 6312 6313 6314
Pre-set LED indications - bay unit 1st display line LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 LED 9 LED 10 LED 11 LED 12 LED 13 LED 14 2nd display line FNo Note
6315 6316
LED 15 LED 16
>Isolator1on >Isolator1off >Isolator2on >Isolator2off >Isolator3on >Isolator3off >Isolator4on >Isolator4off >Isolator5on >Isolator5off not marsh not marsh Fail Com.CU O/C Gen.Trip BB Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L1 CBF Trp.rp.L2 CBF Trp.rp.L3 CB Test L1 CB Test L2 CB Test L3 End-Flt. Trip BB intertrip Bay o.of serv
nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm
nm m m m m m m m m m nm nm nm
7601 7602 7603 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 1 1 7650 1791 7631 7632 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 7644 7639 7640
Isolator status signal Closed for isolator 1 Isolator status signal Open for isolator 1 Isolator status signal Closed for isolator 2 Isolator status signal Open for isolator 2 Isolator status signal Closed for isolator 3 Isolator status signal Open for isolator 3 Isolator status signal Closed for isolator 4 Isolator status signal Open for isolator 4 Isolator status signal Closed for isolator 5 Isolator status signal Open for isolator 5 No function is allocated to output No function is allocated to output Data communication link to central unit disturbed O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test phase L1 Circuit breaker test phase L2 Circuit breaker test phase L3 End fault protection: Trip L123 Busbar protection: Intertrip Bay out of service
nm: not memorized m: memorized
6.3.5
Block 64
Trip relays
The bay unit contains 5 trip relays, which are designated by TRIP RELAY 1 to 5. Several functions can be marshalled to one trip relay. In the same way it is possible to marshall each logical function to more than one trip relay. Command functions listed in Table 6-3 can be marshalled to the trip relays, too. The trip relays are in the first place determined for TRIP commands and transfer trip signals. Depending on the station configuration and the requirements they may, however, also be used as additional alarm relays. The pre-set functions upon delivery of the devices are summarized in Table 6-5.
Marshalling of the trip relays 6400 MARSHALLING TRIP RELAYS
Start of the block Marshalling of the trip relays
6-14
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
6401
TRIP
Marshalling for trip relay 1
RELAY 1
Depressing the ENTER-key opens the change mode. Password is required. 5 functions are pre-selected for trip relay 1.
1 TRIP REL. 1
CBF Trp.rp.L1
)1R )( Trip repeat phase 1 by CBF protection
TRIP REL. 1
)1R )( 3-phase trip command by busbar protection
BB Trip L123
TRIP REL. 1
)1R )( 3-phase trip repeat by CBF protection
CBF Trp.rp.3p
TRIP REL. 1
)1R )( Trip command to circuit breaker in phase L1 issued by the test function
CB Test L1
TRIP REL. 1
)1R )() General trip command by O/C protection
O/C Gen.Trip
TRIP REL.
no further command functions for trip relay 1
not allocated
Exit from the change mode by depressing key ESC. In the same manner, display and modification of the pre-set allocation for trip relays 2 to 5 can be done after selecting the appropriate address
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-15
Bay Unit
Table 6-5 Direct address 6401
Pre-set trip relay functions - bay unit 1st display line 2nd display line FNo. Note
TRIP RELAY 1
6402
TRIP RELAY 2
6403
TRIP RELAY 3
6404
TRIP RELAY 4
6405
TRIP RELAY 5
O/C Gen.Trip BB Trip L123 Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp.L1 CB Test L1 CBF Trip L123 End-flt. Trip O/C Gen.Trip BB Trip L123 Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp. L2 CB Test L2 CBF Trip L123 End-flt. Trip O/C Gen.Trip BB Trip L123 Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp. L3 CB Test L3 CBF Trip L123 End-flt. Trip O/C Gen.Trip BB Trip L123 Trp.rp.3p CBF Trp.rp. L1 CBF Trp.rp. L2 CBF Trp.rp. L3 CB Test L1 CB Test L2 CB Test L3 CBF Trip L123 End-flt. Trip BB intertrip
1791 7631 7632 7633 7636 7643 7644 1791 7631 7632 7634 7637 7643 7644 1791 7631 7632 7635 7638 7643 7644 1791 7631 7632 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 7643 7644 7639
O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 Circuit breaker test phase L1 CBF protection: Trip L123 End fault protection: Trip L123 O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 Circuit breaker test phase L2 CBF protection: Trip L123 End fault protection: Trip L123 O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test phase L3 CBF protection: Trip L123 End fault protection: Trip L123 O/C general trip command Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test phase L1 Circuit breaker test phase L2 Circuit breaker test phase L3 CBF protection: Trip L123 End fault protection: Trip L123 Busbar protection: Intertrip
6-16
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
6.4
Block 72
Serial interfaces
The device has either one or two serial interfaces: one communication interface in the front panel, also referred to as PC interface, and - depending on the variant ordered a system interface for connection of a central control and storage unit such as the Siemens 678. Communication via these interfaces requires some specific agreements that concern the device identification, the data transmission format and the transmission rate. Block requests in several places the entry of information on these points. The information entered must match the devices that are to be connected. The annunciations that can be processed by the SICAM are stored in the device in a separate table, which is contained in Appendix A.2.2.2.
PC and system interfaces 7200 PC/SYSTEM INTERFACES
Start of the block PC / system interfaces
7201 1
DEVICE ADD.
Device identification number in the substation; applies for both interfaces (PC and system interface). The number can chosen freely but must be unique within the substation system. minimum setting:...............1 maximum setting:............254
7202 1
FEEDER ADD.
Number of feeder in the substation (feeder address); applies for both interfaces (PC and system interface) minimum setting:...............1 maximum setting:.............254
7203 1
SUBST. ADD.
Substation identification number, if more than one substation can be addressed: applies for both interfaces (PC and system interface). minimum setting:...............1 maximum setting:.............254
7208 160
FUNCT. TYPE
Device function type in accordance with VDEW/ ZVEI; the overcurrent protection is of type 160. This address serves mainly for information and should not be changed.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-17
Bay Unit
7209 23
DEVICE TYPE
Device type for identification by the SIEMENS SICAM and DIGSI. This address serves for information only and cannot be changed.
Addresses to apply only for the communication (PC) interface in the front panel. PC interface 7211 PC INTERF.
Data format for the (front panel) PC interface: = ',*6, 9 = $6&,,
DIGSI V3
7215
PC BAUDRATE
9600 BAUD
Transmission rate for the (front panel) serial PC interface: = %$8' = %$8' = %$8' = %$8' = %$8'
7216
PC PARITY
DIGSI V3
Parity of transmission telegrams: = ',*6, 9 = 12 6723 = 12 6723
Addresses to apply only for the system interface (where provided). System interface 7221 SYS INTERF. VDEW COMPATIBLE
Format of annunciations and faults for the system interface: = 9'(: &203$7,%/( = 9'(: (;7(1'(' = ',*6, 9
7222
SYS MEASUR.
VDEW COMPATIBLE
Measurement format for system interface: = 9'(: &203$7,%/( = 9'(: (;7(1'('
7224 =2.0s
SYS GAPS
Transmission gaps for system interface minimum setting:...............0.0 s maximum setting:...............5.0 s
6-18
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
7225
SYS BAUDR.
9600 BAUD
Transmission rate for system interface: = %$8' = %$8' = %$8' = %$8' = %$8'
7227 SYS-SWITCH NO
On-line switch of the system interface from VDEW to DIGSI enabled: = 12 = <(6
Connection of DIGSI V3
Address is only relevant where the system interface is used to communicate with the DIGSI communication software 6<6 ,17(5) ',*6, 9 '$ )(. The user can define here whether remote parameterization via system interface is permissible or not.
7235 NO
SYS PARAMET
Only for connecting DIGSI V3 to the system interface: remote parameterizing via system interface = 12 = <(6
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-19
Bay Unit
6.5
6.5.1
Block 11
Function parameters
Substation data
Setting of the operation parameters requires password input (refer to chapter 3.4.2). The settings can be displayed without password, but not altered. After the password is accepted, parameterizing can be started. As a commissioning support, the current transformer starpoint can also be changed locally in the bay unit in parallel to the setting in the central unit &7 32/%;; '$ ;;=(.
1000
PARAMETERS
Netzdaten 1100 POWERSYSTEM DATA

Start of the block Power system data
1101
CT STARPNT
TOWARDS LINE
Current transformer starpoint = 72:$5'6 /,1( = 72:$5'6 %86%$5
1141 0.15s
T TRIP
Minimum trip command duration minimum setting:...............0.01 s maximum setting:..............32.00 s
6.5.2
Block 12
Phase fault overcurrent protection (option)
1200
O/C PROT.
Start of the block Overcurrent protection phases
PHASES
1201 ON
O/C PHASES
Overcurrent protection for phase faults = 21 = 2))
6-20
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
At first, the high-set overcurrent stage I>> is set ('$ )( to )(). This stage is often used for current grading before high impedances, e.g. transformers, motors or generators. This stage is always a definite time stage, independent on which characteristic is set for the I> stage. It is set such that it picks up on short-circuits into this impedance. The set times are pure delay times which do not include the operating time of the protection. If the high-set overcurrent stage I>> is not used, set the time T-I>> to 1.
1202
I>>
2.00 I/In
Pick-up value of the high-set stage I>> minimum setting:...............0.05 IN maximum setting:...............25.00 IN
1203
T-I>>
0.10 s
Trip delay of the high-set stage I>> minimum setting:...............0.00 s maximum setting:...............60.00 s or (no trip with I>> for phase faults)
1206 NO
MEAS.REPET
Measurement repetition; Default setting: NO = 12 = <(6
The backup protection of the bay unit can be used as definite time overcurrent protection or inverse time overcurrent protection. This function mode has been selected during configuration in chapter 6.2 (&+$5$& 3+ '$ )(). In this block 12, only those parameters are available which are associated with the function mode of the selected overcurrent protection. For inverse time, a choice can be made between three tripping time characteristics defined in IEC 60255-3. The characteristic for phase faults is selected in '$ )(. Inverse time O/C protection 1211 CHARACTER. NORMAL INVERSE
For inverse time overcurrent protection only: Characteristic of the overcurrent stage I> for phase faults, can be: = 1250$/ ,19(56(, acc. to IEC 60255-3 (type A) = 9(5< ,19(56(, acc. to IEC 60255-3 (type B) = (;75(0(/< ,19(56, acc. to IEC 60255-3 (type C)
,! '$ )( and 7,! '$ )( are relevant only in case the definite time characteristic has been chosen under (&+$5$& 3+ = '(),1,7( 7,0( '$ )(, chapter 6.2). The maximum load current determines the setting of the overcurrent stage I>. Pick-up on overload must be excluded since the unit operates in this mode as short circuit protection with adequate short tripping time and not as overload protection. If the overcurrent stage I> is not used, set the time 7,! to .
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-21
Bay Unit
Definite time O/C protection 1212 I> 1.00 I/In
For definite time overcurrent protection only: Pick-up value of the overcurrent stage I> for phase faults minimum setting:...............0.05 IN maximum setting:...............25.00 IN
1213
T-I>
0.50 s
For definite time overcurrent protection only: Trip delay of the overcurrent stage I> for phase faults minimum setting:...............0.00 s maximum setting:...............60.00 s or (no trip with I> for phase faults)
,S '$ )( and 7,S '$ )( are relevant only in case an inverse time characteristic has been chosen under (&+$5$& 3+ = ,19(56( 7,0( '$ )(, chapter 6.2). It must be considered that, according to IEC 60255-3, the protection picks up only when at least 1.1 times the set value is exceeded. If the overcurrent stage Ipis not used then set the time 7,S to . If it is set to 0 , the protection trips after the inherent operating time.
1214
Ip
1.00 I/In
For inverse time overcurrent protection only: Pick-up value of the inverse time overcurrent stage Ip for phase faults minimum setting:...............0.10 IN maximum setting:...............4.00 IN
1215 0.50
T-Ip
Trip time delay for the inverse time O/C stage Ip minimum setting:...............0.05 s maximum setting:...............10.00 s or 0 (trip after the inherent operating time) or (no trip with Ip for phase faults)
When the definite time characteristic is chosen, the fundamental waves of the measured currents are evaluated for pick-up. When one of the inverse time characteristics is chosen (&+$5$& 3+ = ,19(56( 7,0( '$ )(, chapter 6.2), a choice can be made under 506 )250$7 '$ )( whether the fundamental waves of the measured currents are evaluated, or whether the true r.m.s. values including harmonics and d.c. component are calculated for evaluation.
For inverse time overcurrent protection only: RMS format for pick-up of inverse time overcurrent protection for phase faults = )81'$0(17$/ = 758( 506
1216
RMS FORMAT
FUNDAMENTAL
Finally, 0$1&/26( '$ )( determines which stage is effective if the circuit breaker is manually closed. A prerequisite is that the manual close command for the breaker is repeated via a binary input to the relay so that it is informed about manual
6-22
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
closing of the breaker. ,1())(&7,9( means that the stages operate according to the settings in addresses 1201 to 1215.
1221
MAN. CLOSE
I>> UNDELAYED
Overcurrent stage which is effective during manual closing of the circuit breaker: = ,!! 81'(/$<(' = ,!,S 81'(/$<(' = ,1())(&7,9(
6.5.3
Block 15
Earth fault overcurrent protection (option)
1500 EARTH
O/C PROT.
Beginning of the block Overcurrent protection for earth faults
1501 ON
O/C EARTH
Earth fault overcurrent time protection = 21 = 2))
At first, the high-set stage IE>> is set ('$ )( to '$ )E), if used. For determination of the setting values similar considerations are valid as for the phase fault stage I>> (refer to chapter 6.5.2). If the stage IE>> is not used, set the time 7,(!! to .
Pick-up value of the high-set stage IE>> for earth faults minimum setting:...............0.05 IN maximum setting:...............25.00 IN
1502
IE>>
0.50 I/In
1503
T-IE>>
0.50 s
Trip delay of the high-set stage IE>> for earth faults minimum setting:...............0.00 s maximum setting:...............60.00 s or (no trip with IE>> for earth faults)
1506 NO
EAS.REPET
Measurement repetition; Default setting: NO = 12 = <(6
The bay unit can be used as definite time overcurrent protection or inverse time overcurrent protection. Selection for earth faults is independent of that for phase faults. The function mode has been selected during configuration in (&+$5$&( '$ )(, chapter 6.2). In this block 15, only those parameters are available
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-23
Bay Unit
which are associated with the function mode of the selected overcurrent protection for earth faults. For inverse time, a choice can be made between three tripping time characteristics defined in IEC 60255-3. The characteristic for earth faults is selected in '$ )(.
1511
CHARACTER.
NORMAL INVERSE
For inverse time overcurrent protection only: Characteristic of the overcurrent stage I> for earth faults, can be: = 1250$/ ,19(56(, acc. to IEC 60255-3 (type A) = 9(5< ,19(56(, acc. to IEC 60255-3 (type B) = (;75(0(/< ,19(56, acc. to IEC 60255-3 (type C)
The pick-up values and the trip time delays for earth faults can be set separately. This allows in many cases to set a separate grading plan for earth faults, with shorter trip times. ,(! '$ )( and 7,(! '$ )( are relevant only in case the definite time characteristic has been chosen (&+$5$& ( = '(),1,7( 7,0( '$ )(, chapter 6.2). The minimum earth fault current determines the setting of the overcurrent stage IE>. If the overcurrent stage IE> is not used, set the time 7,(! to . Definite time O/C protection 1512 IE> 0.20 I/In
For definite time overcurrent protection only: Pick-up value of the overcurrent stage IE> for earth faults minimum setting:...............0.05 IN maximum setting:...............25.00 IN
1513 T-IE> 0.50 s
Trip delay for the overcurrent stage IE> for earth faults minimum setting:...............0.00 s
maximum setting:...............60.00 s
,(S '$ )( and 7,(S '$ )( are relevant only in case an inverse time characteristic has been chosen (&+$5$& ( = '(),1,7( 7,0( '$ )(, chapter 6.2. This allows in many cases to set a separate grading plan for earth faults, with shorter trip times. It must be considered that, according to IEC 60255-3, the protection picks up only when at least 1.1 times the set value is exceeded. If the overcurrent stage IEp is not to be effective at all, 7,(S can be set to . If the overcurrent stage IEp is not used then set the time 7,(S to . If it is set to 0, the protection trips after the inherent operating time.
6-24
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
Inverse time O/C protection 1514 IEp> 0.10 I/In
For inverse time overcurrent protection only: Pick-up value of the inverse time overcurrent stage IEp> for earth faults minimum setting:...............0.10 IN maximum setting:.................4.00 IN
1515 0.50
T-IEp>
Trip delay for the inverse time overcurrent stage IEp> for earth faults minimum setting:...............0.05 maximum setting:...............10.00 or 0 (trip after the inherent operating time) or (no trip with IEp for earth faults)
When the definite time characteristic is chosen, the fundamental waves of the measured currents are evaluated for pick-up. When one of the inverse time characteristics is chosen (&+$5$& ( = ,19(56( 7,0( '$ )(, chapter 6.2), a choice can be made under 506 )250$7 '$ )( whether the fundamental wave of the measured current is evaluated, or whether the true r.m.s. value including harmonics and d.c. component is calculated for evaluation.
For inverse time overcurrent protection only: RMS format for pick-up of inverse time overcurrent protection for phase faults = )81'$0(17$/ = 758( 506
1516 RMS FORMAT FUNDAMENTAL
Finally, 0$1 &/26( '$ )( determines which stage is effective if the circuit breaker is manually closed. A prerequisite is that the manual close command for the breaker is repeated via a binary input to the relay so that it is informed about manual closing of the breaker. ,1())(&7,9( means that the stages operate according to the settings in addresses 1501 to 1515.
Overcurrent stage which is effective during manual closing of the circuit breaker. = ,(!! 81'(/$<(' = ,(! ,(S 81'(/$<(' = ,1())(&7,9(
1521
MAN. CLOSE
IE>> UNDELAYED
6.5.4
Block 28
Delay times for user-defined annunciations

The bay unit has four user-defined annunciations each of which is allocated to a time stage. Each of these four time stages can be started by its own binary input )1R )(. The pick-up delay T-Annunc. is set for each time stage separately '$ )(. If a time stage is controlled by a binary input, an annunciation is output after the pickup delay 7$QQXQF has elapsed. These annunciations can be defined by the user and marshalled to alarm relays, LEDs or trip relays.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-25
Bay Unit
Delay times for user-defined annunciations
2800
DELAYTIMES
Start of the block Delay times for user-defined annunciations
ANNUNCIATIONS
2801
T-Annunc.1
1.00 s
Delay time for user-defined annunciation 1 minimum setting:...............0.00 s maximum setting:..............10.00 s
2802
T-Annunc.2
1.00 s
Delay time for user-defined annunciation 2 minimum setting:...............0.00 s maximum setting:...............10.00 s
2803
T-Annunc.3
1.00 s
2804
T-Annunc.4
1.00 s
6.5.5
Block 39
Circuit breaker failure protection (option)

The overcurrent protection of the bay unit includes a circuit breaker failure protection that works independently of the central breaker failure protection.
Circuit breaker failure protection 3900 BREAKER FAILURE PROTEC.
Start of the block Circuit breaker failure protection
3901 OFF
B/F PROT.
Breaker failure protection function = 2)) = 21
3911
I> B/F
0.25 s
Pick-up value of the current threshold of the circuit breaker failure protection minimum setting:...............0.10 I/In maximum setting:..............4.00 I/In
6-26
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
3912
T-B/F
0.25 s
Trip time delay of the circuit breaker failure protection minimum setting:...............0.06 s maximum setting:..............60.00 s
6.5.6
Block 74
Fault recordings
7400
FAULT
Start of the block Fault recordings
RECORDINGS
7402
INITIATION
STORAGE BY FD.
Start/storage condition for fault recording (each with general fault detection as reference instance and general fault detection as storage criterion) = 6725$*( %< )' = 6725$*( %< 75,3 = 67$57 :,7+ 75,3
7410
T-MAX
1.00 s
Maximum time period of one fault record minimum setting:...............0.30 s maximum setting:.................5.00 s
7411
TPRE
0.10 s
Pre-trigger time before the reference instant ('$ )() for starting the fault recording minimum setting:...............0.05 s maximum setting:.................0.50 s
7412
T-POST
0.10 s
Post-fault time for stopping the fault recording after the storage criterion disappears minimum setting:...............0.05 s maximum setting:.................0.50 s
7431
T-BINARY IN
0.50 s
Storage time when fault recording is initiated via a binary input, pre-trigger '$ )() and postfault '$ )( times are additive minimum setting:...............0.10 s maximum setting:.................5.00 s or , i.e. as long as the binary input is energized (but not longer than 70$; '$ )()
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-27
Bay Unit
7432
T-KEYBOARD
0.50 s
Storage time when fault recording is initiated via the membrane keyboard, pre-trigger '$ )() and post-fault '$ )( times are additive minimum setting:...............0.10 s maximum setting:.................5.00 s
6-28
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
6.6
Read out of information

After a disturbance in the power system, annunciations provide an overview of the most important data of the fault event and of the device function; they are used to check the execution of function at testing and commissioning. In addition, annunciations supply during operation information about the status conditions of measuring data and about the device itself. No password is required to call annunciations. There are various ways of accessing the annunciations generated in the device: by means of the LEDs on the front panels of the devices, by means of binary outputs (signal relays) via the devices connections; by means of the display of the device front panel or on a PC monitor via the operating interface; by means of transfer to the central control room via the rear serial interface. Most annunciations can be marshalled to the LEDs and binary outputs (refer to chapter 6.3); multiple and common annunciations are possible in this context. To configure the transfer of annunciations to a central processing system or to a control room, the necessary configuration data must be entered in block 72 (refer to chapter 6.4). Annunciations start with address and are structured as follows:
Block 51 Block 52 Block 53 Block 54 Block 56 Operational annunciations Annunciations of the last fault Annunciations of the last fault but one Annunciations of the third last fault Annunciations for the switching statistics; these are counters for trip command, accumulated interrupted current and last trip current. Display of operational measured values
Block 57
For a complete list of all the signal and output functions generated in the device with the associated function numbers ()1RV), refer to Appendix A.2.2. The list also states the location to which each annunciation can be signalled.
Start of the annunciation blocks
5000 ANNUNCIATIONS
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-29
Bay Unit
6.6.1
Block 51
Operational annunciations
Next to the annunciation there is an indication of whether it is issued COMING only (C with events) or COMING and GOING (C/G with status conditions). The first annunciation shows as an example the date and time in the first display line and the annunciation text marked COMING in the second display line.
Operational annunciations
5100 OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS
Start of the block Operational annunciations
11.12.99 12:02:00,20 CBF Trip L123 :C
1st line: Date and time of the event or the change of status 2nd line: Annunciation text, in the example marked Coming
6.6.2
Fault annunciations
Here the annunciations of the last three power system faults can be read out. These are sorted from the newest to the oldest and located in addresses , , . When a new fault arrives, the system deletes the data of the oldest one. Each fault buffer can store up to 25 annunciations. No password is required. 1st line: Date and time of the event or the change of status 2nd line: Annunciation text, in the example marked Coming
Blocks 52 to 54
Last power system fault 5200 FAULT LAST
Start of the block Last fault
11.12.99 Syst. Flt. 5
Under index number 1, the display shows the date and the serial number of the power system fault
6-30
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
6.6.3
Block 56
Annunciations for circuit breaker operating statistics

Provided that the bay unit is of the type that has overcurrent protection, the device counts the number of trip commands issued by the bay unit. In addition, at every trip command the system determines the interrupted current, outputs it under the fault annunciations and adds it up in a memory register. The counter and memory readings are buffered against auxiliary voltage failures; they can be read out under address . No password is required. In block the counters can be reset to zero. Example:
CB operating statistics 5600 CB OPERAT. STATISTICS
Start of the block Circuit breaker operating statistics
5604
Trip No =
Number of trip commands: 0 to 65,535
xxxxxx
5607 146.9
L1/In=
Summated current tripped for phase L1
5608 146.9
L2/In=
5609 146.9
L3/In=
5610
IL1/In
Last trip current for phase L1
I/In=2.68
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-31
Bay Unit
5611
IL2/In
I/In=2.68
5612
IL3/In
I/In= 2.68
6.6.4
Block 57
Read out of operational measured values

Display of operational measured values is requested under address block . For each address, one measured value is displayed. No password is required. Apart from this, four operational measured values can be displayed simultaneously, one value per display line. These operational measured values are displayed by depressing the LED push-button. Exit from this mode by any other key. The measured values which shall be displayed in the 4-line mode are selected in parameter block '$ )( (refer to chapter 6.1.1). The displayed measured values are refreshed at a rate of 0.5 s. Current values are displayed in percent of nominal quantities. Frequencies are displayed in Hertz. The following operational measured values can be displayed:
Operational measured values 5700 OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES
Start of the block Operational measured values
5701
MEAS. VALUE
Current of phase L1 (display in %)
IL1 [%]=100.0%
5702
MEAS. VALUE
IL2 [%]=101.0%
5703
MEAS. VALUE
IL3 [%]=101.5%
6-32
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
5704
MEAS. VALUE
Earth current (display in %)
IE [%]=1.1%
5705
MEAS. VALUE
Current in phase L1
IL1 =1000.3A
Current in phase L2
5706
MEAS. VALUE
IL2 =1001.5A
5707
MEAS. VALUE
Current in phase L3
IL3 =1000.6A
5708
MEAS. VALUE
Earth current
IE =1.8A
5709
MEAS. VALUE
ID1 [%]=.1%
Phase-related operational measured value of the differential current in the check zone (Display in percent)
The differential current display for phases L2 and L3 follow under direct addresses '$ )( and '$ )(.
5712
MEAS. VALUE
Phase-related operational measured value of the restraint (stabilizing) current of the check zone.
ISL1 [%]=203.5% The restraint currents for phases L2 and L3 are displayed after selecting addresses '$ )( and '$ )(.
5715
MEAS. VALUE
Nominal frequency in Hertz Values are displayed from I > 0.1IN
f [Hz]=50.1 Hz
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-33
Bay Unit
Examples for the 4-line mode IL1 [%]=100.1% IL2 [%]=100.3% IL3 [%]=101.0% IE [%]= 1.0%
The display is requested by the push-button LED or from the initial display ('$ )() by depressing key ENTER. Selection of the measured values for display is done in address block 71 (refer to chapter 6.1.1).
IL1 IL2
=1000.3A =1001.5A 4.1%
Example for display of absolute and percentage values.
IDL1[%]=
ISL1[%]= 102.5%
6-34
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
6.7
Block 45
Control in operation
For any maintenance work in the bay, it has to be taken out of service or put into maintenance mode. First of all, local operation must be authorized for all bays from the central unit under address &21755(/ %8 '$ =(. Depressing the function key F1 leads directly to the mode 6ZLWFKLQJ ED\ RXW RI VHUYLFH '$ )(. If the bay is already out of service, function key F1 puts back the 6ZLWFKLQJ ED\ LQ VHUYLFH. Depressing the function key F3 leads directly to the mode 6ZLWFKLQJ ED\ LQ PDLQWHQDQFH '$ )(. If the bay is already in maintenance, function key F3 restores the former status (toggle mode).
Control function 4500 COMMUNICATI ON CENTRAL UNIT
4501
Com. CU
BAY OUT OF SER.?
Start command 6ZLWFKLQJ ED\ RXW RI VHUYLFH by depressing key ENTER. Repeat this operation. The result is shown in the display as a feedback %$< 287 2) 6(5
4502
Com. CU
BAY IN SERVICE ?
Start command 6ZLWFKLQJ ED\ LQ VHUYLFH by depressing key ENTER. Repeat this operation. The result is shown in the display as a feedback %$< ,1 6(5 .
4503
Com. CU
BAY IN MAINTEN. ?
Start command 6ZLWFKLQJ ED\ LQ PDLQWHQDQFH by depressing key ENTER. Repeat this operation. The result is shown in the display as a feedback %$< ,1 0$,17(1
Block 82
The annunciations for circuit breaker operating statistics (chapter 6.6.3) are stored in EEPROMS in the bay unit so that they are not lost if the auxiliary voltage fails. Counters can be reset to zero in block . Entry of the password is required for resetting buffers and counters, except for reset of the LEDs (address ). Counters are reset separately for the different groups of buffers, counters and annunciations. Scroll to the individual prompts by pressing the or key. Press the YES key to confirm the reset. The display now shows a message that the item has been reset. If you do not want to reset it, press the NO key or scroll to the next item.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-35
Bay Unit
Reset annunciations 8200 RESET
Start of the block Reset
Prompt for resetting the LED memories.
8201 LED ?
RESET
EXECUTED
The device shows (;(&87(' in the 2nd display line to acknowledge the reset.
8202
RESET
Prompt for resetting the operational annunciations buffer.
OPERAT.ANNUNC. ?
8203
RESET
Prompt for resetting the buffer for power system fault annunciations and the fault value buffers.
FAULT ANNUNC. ?
8204
RESET
Prompt for resetting the counter of switching operations (trip and reclose commands)
COUNTERS ?
8205
RESET
Prompt for resetting the summated trip currents to 0
TOTAL Isc ?
While the buffers are being reset (this may take some time), the display shows ,1 352*5(66. After completion of the reset, an acknowledge message is displayed, e.g.
8202
RESET
SUCCESSFUL
6-36
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
6.8
Block 81
Setting and reading the real-time clock
8100
SETTING
Start of the block Setting the real time clock
REAL TIME CLOCK
01.05.2000 16:30:52
At first, the current date and time is displayed under address . Press to scroll to the next address and to scroll to the previous one.
8102
DATE
After pressing the key, a new date can be entered under address . The order of entry is day-month-year, separated by dots; day and month are entered with 2 digits, the year with 4 digits, i.e. ''00<<<<
8103
TIME
A new time can be entered under address . The order of entry is hours-minutes-seconds, separated by dots, each with 2 digits, i.e. ++0066.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-37
Bay Unit
6.9
Block 40
Test functions
The bay units allow easy testing of the trip circuits and the circuit breaker by means of the local operation facilities. The three-phase test is initiated through the bay unit by depressing function key F2 (direct addressing to '$ )(). Pre-requisites for the test routine are that the bay is out of service and that the bay current is below the setting value , 0$1 75,3 '$ =(. The circuit breaker test can also be initiated per phase. For this purpose go to direct address '$ )( and then scroll back by until the desired test option is reached.
Circuit breaker test 4000 TESTS

Address block for tests and commissioning support
4400
CB TEST
After selection of the desired test it is initiated by depressing key ENTER.
LIVE TRIP
4401
CB TRIP
Circuit breaker test phase L1
CB POLE 1 ?
4402
CB TRIP
CB POLE 2 ?
4403
CB TRIP
CB POLE 3 ?
4404
CB TRIP
Circuit breaker test three-phase
CB THREE-POLE ?
The test is initiated by confirmation of the question with key ENTER.
6-38
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Bay Unit
The test result is shown in the display. Depressing the key ESC or test block and jumps back to the higher operation level.
leaves the
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
6-39
Bay Unit
6-40
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Installation and Commissioning
This chapter is intended for experienced commissioning personnel who are thoroughly familiar with the commissioning of protection and control systems, with the management of power systems and with the relevant safety rules and guidelines. In certain cases modifications of the hardware may be necessary to match the protection system to the station data. For the subsequent commissioning tests primary switchgear (circuit breakers, isolators) must be operated.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4
Installation and connection Checking the connections Testing Commissioning with primary values
7-2 7-6 7-7 7-20
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7-1
7.1
Installation and connection

The operating conditions must be in accordance with VDE 0100/5.73 and VDE0105 part 1/7.83.
Caution!
The modules of digital protection equipment contain CMOS circuits. These must not be withdrawn or inserted under live conditions! The modules must be handled with care so that any possibility of damage due to static discharges is prevented. When handling individual modules, the recommendations relating to the handling (of electrostatically endangered devices) must be observed. Modules fitted in the unit are not endangered.
7.1.1
Version for panel surface mounting (BU, CU)

The bay unit as well as the surface-mounted casing of the central unit are each fitted to the panel by 4 screws (dimension drawings can be seen in chapters 9.8.1 and 9.8.2). A solid low-ohmic and low-inductive operating earth has to be connected to the casings side wall using an M4 screw. Earth tapes according to DIN 72333 Form A are suitable for this. Screw-type terminals are provided for the electrical connections. The conductors must be solid, or stranded with connector sleeves. For the connection of the optical signals, fiber-optic cables with pre-fabricated FSMA plugs are used; proper strain relief must be ensured. The surface-mounted casing of the central unit has cable glands at the bottom side. They ensure the degree of protection of the casing and the strain relief for the cables.
7.1.2
Bay unit for panel or cubicle flush mounting

Open both inscription strips on the front cover, making accessible 4 elongated holes. Insert unit into the panel cutout or cubicle mounting frame and fix with four screws (dimension drawings are shown in chapter 9.8.2). Connect earthing screw at the units rear side with the protection earth of the panel or cubicle. A solid low-ohmic and low-inductive operating earth has to be connected to the casings rear wall using at least one M4 screw. Earth tapes according to DIN 72333 Form A are suitable for this. Make electrical connections via the snap-in or screw-type connection modules of the unit. Special care has to taken to the designations of the snap-in connection modules. The fiber-optic connection is made by means of FSMA screw connectors; proper strain relief must be ensured.
7-2
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7.1.3
Subrack version of the central unit

The subrack with degree of protection IP 20 is suitable for mounting in panels and cubicles. It is fixed from the front side with at least four screws. Make sure that the fixing flanges at both sides fully contact the surface (dimension drawings are shown in chapter 9.8.2). Connect the earthing terminal on the casings outside (refer to Figure 9-4) with the protection earth of the panel or cubicle. A solid low-ohmic and low-inductive operating earth via the earthing terminal is essential (DIN 72333 Form A.). Make electrical connections via the snap-in or screw-type connection modules of the unit. For the connection of the optical signals, fiber-optic cables with pre-fabricated FSMA plugs are used; proper strain relief must be ensured. The FO cables must be connected in the sequence of the programmed bay units. The marking system at the devices rear side supports the connection.
7.1.4
Cubicle version of the central unit

For installation secure fixing of the cubicle to the floor must be ensured. A solid low-ohmic and low-inductive earthing has to be provided for the cubicle. Earthing must be done by using the screw-type connection of the cubicle which is marked with the earthing symbol. In case of more than one cubicle, all cubicles must be connected with each other by a solid low-ohmic connection.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7-3
7.1.5
Connection of two bay units to one bus coupler bay

In the 7SS52 a bus coupler can be equipped with two bay units, e.g. where there are more than two current transformers or where more than 5 isolators must be monitored. The type of bay must be set to EXVFRXS %D\ under 7<3( %;; '$ ;; =(. Both bay units are totally identical in their design and occupy 2 consecutive bays in the configuration scheme of the protection.
7.1.5.1
Connection With two bay units and only one current transformer in the bus coupler, the current inputs of both bay units are connected in series per phase (refer to Figure 7-1). Recognition of the isolator status is carried out separately via the binary inputs of each bay unit. The trip command and transfer trip contacts of both bay units must be connected in parallel. In this case, further binary input functions (e.g. CBF initiation, CBF release, TRIP release, CB fail) must be connected in parallel.
BU1
BU2
Figure 7-1 Connection of the current inputs of the bay units in bus couplers with only one current transformer
7-4
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7.1.5.2
Configuration For the bay unit without current transformer, the parameter &7 '$ ;;=( is set to QRQ H[LVWHQW. /2&%;;
The setting of the parameter &7 32/%;; '$ ;;=( for the bay unit with current transformer is the same as for a feeder bay. If the current inputs are wired as shown in Figure 7-1, the current direction for the bay unit without current transformer has to be inversed by means of the parameter &7 32/%;; '$ ;;=(. An example is shown in Figure 7-2. The setting of the parameter for the transformation ratio &7 1250%;; '$ ;;=( must be the same for both bay units.
BU1
BU2
BU3
BU4
Figure 7-2 Configuration example for a 2-bay bus coupler with one current transformer
BU
CT polarity '$ ;;=( Line side Line side Bus side Line side
CT location '$ ;;=( busside, tow. line busside, tow. line non existent busside, tow. line
1 2 3 4
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7-5
7.2
Checking the connections Warning!

Some of the following test steps will be carried out in presence of hazardous voltages. They shall be performed only by qualified personnel which is thoroughly familiar with all safety regulations and precautionary measures and pay due attention to them. The connections are shown in Appendix A.6. The configuration options for the binary inputs are described in chapter 5.3 and chapter 6.3. Before switching on the protection system, all electrical and optical external connections have to be checked for correct interface: Switch off the MCB for the DC supply in the power supply rack. Check the continuity and correctness of all current transformer circuits against the plant and connection diagrams: Are the current transformers correctly earthed? (refer to chapter 5.2.5) Are the polarities of the current transformers connections consistent? Is the phase relationship of the current transformer consistent? Fiber-optic connections between central unit and bay units Check the tripping circuits through to the circuit breakers (no primary switching as yet). Check the control wiring to and from other devices. Check the signal circuits. Measure the auxiliary voltage at the cubicle terminals; check its polarity and the polarity of the digital input connection. If connections are correct, then the auxiliary voltage MCB can be closed. After the protection system has run up successfully, the disturbance indication (LED red) extinguishes and the operation indication (LED green) lights up on the central unit as well as on each connected bay unit.
7-6
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7.3
7.3.1
Testing
General
Pre-requisite for commissioning is the completion of the installation procedures detailed in chapter 3.
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property damage. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the applicable safety regulations. Particular attention must be drawn to the following: The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor before any other electrical connection is made. Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply voltage or to the measuring and test quantities. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply voltage (storage capacitors!). The limit values stated in chapter 9, Technical Data must not be exceeded at all, not even during testing and commissioning.
Caution!
The secondary terminals of current transformers must be short-circuited before the secondary circuit to the bay unit is opened! If a test switch is installed which automatically short-circuits the current transformer secondary leads, then it is sufficient to move this switch to the Test position. The short-circuit switch must, however, be checked beforehand. It is recommended to perform testing with the actual setting values of the protection system. If these are not (or not yet) known then testing should be carried out with the preset values. The following testing procedures are based on the preset setting values; for other setting values formulae have been provided. As measuring is performed selectively per phase, two 1-phase current sources with individually adjustable currents are sufficient.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7-7
Note The measuring accuracy which can be achieved depends on the electrical performance data of the test sets. The accuracy stated in chapter 9, Technical Data can only be achieved if the reference conditions according to DIN VDE 0435/part 303 or IEC 255 are met and if precision instruments are used. Generally, tests using secondary test sets are to be regarded as being functional tests. During all tests it is important to check that the proper indications appear on the LEDs and the proper signals appear at the outputs of the remote signalling relays.
7.3.2
Testing the pick-up values of the busbar protection

The test currents are injected directly into the bay units measuring inputs. The nominal current of the bay unit is 1A or 5A, depending on the version. Figure 7-3 illustrates the set-up for the bus section-selective protection. The test set is disconnected by the feeder trip signals. The test set-up for the check zone is illustrated in Figure 7-4. If bus selectivity is to be tested, then a few bays can be connected to the second bus (if necessary by simulation of isolator status).
Test setup
7.3.2.1
Bus section-selective measuring The check zone must be set more sensitive than the bus section-selective protection, so that the release from the check zone is issued before the release from the bus section-selective protection. Example: The characteristic for the bus section-selective protection with diff-current limit ,!',)) %= '$ =( = 2.0 Ino and stabilizing factor 67$% )$&%= '$ =( = 0.8 is to be tested. The setting for the check zone is then: diff-current limit ,!',)) &= '$ =( = 0.5 Ino and stabilizing factor 67$% )$&&= '$ =( = 0.5. Settings: The diff-current supervision must be switched off, i.e. the parameter ',)) 683(59 '$ =( must be changed over to inactive so that the diff-current supervision does not block the protection during testing. After the test, it must be reactivated. The differential current limit and the stabilizing factor must be set as required for the bus section-selective protection and the check zone. The overcurrent limits ,!75,3 % '$ ;;=( for the related bays have to be set to 0.
7-8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Test setup
2 bays (no sectionalizing isolators, no couplers) with the same normalization factor (CT transformation ratio) are used for testing. Bays 1 and 2 are connected via the isolators to the same busbar.
Test current I Bay unit 1 TRIP FO Central unit Alarm Diff supervision (BB section or check zone) Test current I FO Bay unit 2 For testing the diff-current limit for supervisory function (refer to chapter 7.3.3) Test set
Figure 7-3 Test set-up for testing the characteristic for the bus section-selective protection
Test steps: 1. Test currents I1 and I2 must have a phase difference of 180. To check the phase angle, an identical current (0.5 IN) is injected through feeder 1 and feeder 2 from the test set. With the correct phase angle and connection, the diff-current must amount to almost zero and the stabilizing current must be 2 x the test current. If the differential current is not zero, then the polarity of the current in one feeder must be reversed. Display of the differential and stabilizing currents via the corresponding block addresses , and . Differential current limit Stabilizing factor 2. With I2 = 0, the current I1 is increased until a trip signal is initiated. The current in feeder 1 is then the diff-current limit ,!',)) %= '$ =(. 3. A constant current I1, which is smaller than the set diff-current limit, is fed into feeder 1 from the test set. The current I2 in feeder 2 is slowly increased until the protection picks up. Magnitudes: Differential current is then I = | I1 + I2 | and Stabilizing current | I | = | I1 | + | I2 |. Stabilizing factor K = I / | I | = | I1 + I2 | / (| I1 | + | I2 |) For the characteristic | I2 - I1 | = K [| I1 | + | I2 |] Since I1 and I2 have a phase angle difference of 180 the following is obtained: I2 (1 - K) = I1 (1 + K) or I2 = I1 (1 + K) / (1 - K). With k = 0.8 it follows that I2 = 9 I1 The test is repeated with different constant currents I1 (correct shape of the characteristic is given in Figure 7-5).
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7-9
7.3.2.2
Check zone The bus section-selective protection must be set more sensitive than the check zone, so that the release from the bus section-selective protection is issued before the trip from the check zone. Example: The characteristic for the check zone with diff-current limit ,!',)) &= '$ =( = 2.0 Ino and stabilizing factor 67$% )$&&= '$ =( = 0.8 is to be checked. The setting for the bus section-selective protection is then the diff-current limit ,!',)) %= '$ =( = 0.5 Ino and stabilizing factor 67$% )$&%= '$ =( = 0.5. Settings: as for bus-zone-selective protection
Test set-up
For the tests, three bays (with the same normalizing factor) were used. Sectionalizing isolators, couplers and sectionalizers must not be used for the tests. Bays 1 and 2 are connected via the isolators to the same busbar. The current inputs in the 7SS52 for these bays are connected with opposite polarity (refer to Figure 7-4). The third bay 3 is connected to a different busbar.
Test current I 1
A Test set
FO
Bay unit 1
Central unit
FO
Bay unit 2
Test current I2 A
FO
L+
Bay unit 3
TRIP
Figure 7-4 Test set-up for the check zone
Test steps: 1. The currents in bays 1 and 2 must flow in opposite directions. In order to check this, a current of 0.5 IN is injected into feeders 1 and 2. With correct connections, the diff-current must be almost zero and the stabilizing current 2 x test current. If the differential current is not zero, the polarity of one feeder current must be reversed. Display of the differential and stabilizing currents via the corresponding block addresses , and .
7-10
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Differential current limit
2. With I1 = 0, current I2 is increased until the measuring system allocated to bay 3 issues a trip command. Then current I2 is the differential current limit ,!',)) &= '$ =(. 3. Bays 1 and 2 are injected with a constant current I1 from the test set. The current I2 in bay 3 is slowly increased until the protection trips. I2 is then the differential current and I1 the stabilizing current (refer to chapter 4.1.5). The stabilizing factor is then K = I2/I1. 4. The test is repeated with different constant currents I1 (correct shape of the characteristic is given in Figure 7-5). Remark: The stabilizing current of the ZPS-BSZ1 shown under '$ =( does not consider the special treatment according to chapter 4.1.5.
Stabilizing factor
Differential current I k = 0.8
Differential current limit
= arctan (0.8) Stabilizing current I
Figure 7-5 Pick-up characteristic of busbar protection
7.3.3
Checking the differential current limit for differential current supervision

As in chapter 7.3.2, Test setup. Time measurement is possible directly with modern test sets.
Test setup
7.3.3.1
Bus section-selective protection The check zone must have a higher setting than the bus section-selective protection, so that the differential current supervision of the check zone picks up after that of the bus section-selective protection. Example: The supervision for the bus section-selective protection with diff-current limit ,!683(59%= '$ =( = 0,2 I/Ino is to be checked. The time 7',)) 6839 '$ =( is to be set to 2.0 s. The setting for the check zone ,!683(59&= '$ =( could then be set to 0.8 I/Ino.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7-11
Settings: In order for the diff-current supervision to block the protection, it must be operative, i.e. the parameter ',)) 683(59 '$ =( must be set to DFWLYH. The differential current limit ,!683(59%= '$ =( and the blocking time for the diff-current supervision ',)) 683 %= '$ =( are set as required. The overcurrent limits ,!75,3 %;; '$ ;;=( for the respective bays must be parameterized to 0. Test steps: Parameter ',)) 683 %= '$ =( set to EORFN: 1. Bays 1 and 2 are connected to separate busbars. 2. Current I1 in bay 1 is gradually increased until differential current supervision is indicated. The current is recorded and must correspond to the set pick-up limit ,!683(59%= '$ =(. 3. A current of 4 x IN is injected in feeder 2. With correct protection operation, the portable test set is disconnected from feeder 2. Test steps 2. and 3. should prove that the diff-current supervision is bus-sectionselective. Parameter ',)) 683 %= '$ =( set to DODUP RQO\: 1. Bays 1 and 2 must be connected to the same bus section. The current I1 in bay 1 is increased gradually until the alarm appears. Then a current 4 x IN is switched on. With correct functioning, a trip command is given. Time delay In order to measure the time delay for diff-current blocking, a current of 2 x the set diffcurrent limit ,!683(59%= '$ =( is injected by portable test set into feeder 1. Test set is disconnected by the diff-current supervision signal. The measured time corresponds to the set time 7',)) 6839 '$ =(.
7.3.3.2
Check zone The bus section-selective protection must have a higher setting than the check zone, so that the check zone supervision picks up before the bus section-selective protection. Example: The supervision for the check zone is to be checked with diff-current limit ,!683(59&= '$ =( = 0.2 I/Ino. The time 7',)) 6839 '$ =( should be set to 2.0 s. The setting for the bus section-selective protection ,!683(59%= '$ =( could then be 0.8 I/Ino. Settings: ',)) 683(59 '$ =( set to DFWLYH. ,!683(59%= '$ =( = 0.80 I/Ino ,!683(59%= '$ =( = 0.20 I/Ino 7',)) 6839 '$ =( = 2 s
7-12
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Test steps: 1. Checking pick-up limit and time delay The current in feeder 1 is slowly increased until the supervision of the check zone picks up. The measured current must correspond to the set current ,!683(59%= '$ =(. Time measurement is performed as in chapter 7.3.3, Bus section-selective protection. Time delay 2. Checking the blocking When the diff-supervision of the check zone picks up, the protection can be blocked ',)) 683 &= '$ =( EORFN or an alarm can be issued ',)) 683 &= '$ &= = DODUP RQO\. Bays 1 and 2 are connected to the same bus. The current in feeder 1 is slowly increased until the supervision of the check zone picks up. In feeder 2, a current of 4 x IN is injected. If parameter ',)) 683 &= '$ =( was set to EORFN, no trip commands are issued.
7.3.4
Testing the pick-up values for controlled tripping

As in chapter 7.3.2, Test setup. Example: The overcurrent limit ,!75,3 for tripping should be checked for two feeders. Settings: In order to prevent the diff-current supervision from blocking the protection during testing, it must be turned off, ',)) 683(59 '$ =(. The differential current limits for the bus section-selective protection ,!',)) 66 '$ =( and for the check zone ,!',)) &= '$ =( are both set to 1.0 I/Ino. The overcurrent limit for bay 1 ,!75,3 %;; '$ ;; is set to 2.0 I/In and for bay 2 to 0. Test steps: 1. Bays 1 and 2 are connected to the same busbar. 2. The current in bay 1 is slowly increased via the test set. When reaching approximately 1 x IN bay unit 2 must issue a trip command, because the overcurrent limit for this bay was set to 0. Bay unit 2 must issue a trip command at 2 x IN.
Test setup
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7-13
7.3.5
7.3.5.1
Functional testing of circuit-breaker failure protection

Pick-up characteristic in mode of operation forced bus zone unbalance The test setup is illustrated in Figure 7-6. Example: The pick-up characteristic is defined by following settings: Differential current limit: ,!%) %;; '$ ;;=( = 0.5 I/IN Stabilizing factor: 67$% )$&%) '$ =( = 0.5 Settings: To prevent the diff-current supervision from blocking the protection, it must be turned off: ',)) 683(59 '$ =(.
Test setup
A FO L+ TRIP Bay unit 1 Central unit FO Bay unit 2
Test current I 1
Initiation L+ CBF A Test current I 2 Test set
Figure 7-6 Test set-up for checking the characteristic of the circuit-breaker failure protection function
The supervision of the CB failure protection initiation must be switched off, i.e. the parameter %)%,02'%;; '$ ;;=( must be set to QR 6XS. The breaker failure protection %)2302'%;; '$ ;;=( is parameterized bay-specifically to the operation mode %= XQEDODQFH. The differential current limit ,!%) %;; '$ ;;=( and the stabilizing factor 67$% )$&%) '$ =( are set to the required values. Test steps: 1. Bays 1 and 2 are connected via the isolators to the same busbar. 2. The test currents I1 and I2 must have the same phase angle. In order to check the phase angle, an identical current (0.5 IN) is sent through bay 1 and bay 2 from test set with the same normalization. With the correct phase angle and connections, the diff-current and the stabilizing current must be nearly 2 x the test current. Otherwise the polarity of the current in one feeder must be reversed. Display of the differential and stabilizing currents is requested by the corresponding address blocks , and .
7-14
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
3. Bay unit 1 is injected with a constant current I1 via the test set. After initiation by the feeder protection (trip signal) in bay 2, the measured value of bay 2 is continuously unbalanced. The current in bay 2 is slowly increased until the protection trips. 4. The differential current is then | I1 + I2 | and the stabilizing current is | I1 | + | I2 |. The stabilizing factor is then differential current/stabilizing current K = | I1 - I2 | / | I1 | + | I2 | 7.3.5.2 Checking the time delay with mode of operationforced bus zone unbalance or I>query The test set-up for the measurement of the time delay is illustrated in Figure 7-6. Verstimmung The two feeders are normalized to the same value (same CT transformation ratio). The polarity of the CTs is connected such that the current (approx. 2 IN) before unbalance corresponds to an external short-circuit (through current) (Diff current approx. zero). I>query A current of approx 2 x ,!%) unit for testing. %;; '$ ;;=( is injected into one bay
Test steps
Time measurement is started when the feeder protection trip signal is simulated for feeder 2. The timer is stopped by the trip signal of the busbar protection. The measured time corresponds to the delay time for unbalance plus protection trip time.
7.3.6
7.3.6.1
General recommendations for setting the protection

Busbar protection Differential current supervision ,!683(59%= '$ =( !683(59&= '$ =( Range: 0.05 to 0.80 I/Ino
Recommended setting for the bus section-selective protection (BZ): = 0.10 I/Ino for the check zone (CZ): = 0.10 I/Ino Time for protection blocking/alarm 7',)) 6839 '$ =( Range: Recommended setting: 1.0 to 10 s = 2.0 s
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7-15
Differential current pickup for tripping ,!',)) %= '$ =( ,!',)) Range:
&= '$ =(
0.2 to 4.0 I/Ino
In a first step, the lowest fault current to be expected in case of a busbar fault is to be determined. The set value should also include an additional 20% margin of for reliable pickup. On this basis, the highest permissible setting can be calculated from the above figures. Stabilizing factor k 67$% )$&%= '$ =( 67$% )$&&= '$ =( The following two criteria are important for the selection of k: Type of current transformer linear or conventional. Conventional CTs with closed iron cores transmit the DC component with little reduction. Linearized CTs, however, reduce the DC component considerably. The burden factor u of the current transformers. This factor is calculated from the maximum continuous short-circuit current Isc and that current Is at which CT saturation starts: u = IK / IS The saturation current Is is derived from the rated current IN and the operational overcurrent number n: IS = IN . P or IS = IN . n
The operational overcurrent number results from the CT data and the actual burden of the current transformer: n = (Pn + Pi) . n / (Pb + Pi) Pn = rated CT burden Pb = connected burden (protection + leads + interposing CT if applicable) Pi = internal burden of main current transformer The k factor to be set is then: K > u / 4 . (u - 1) with (u 2)
When choosing k, the largest burden factor u of all the CTs in the outgoing feeders from the busbar must be considered. Response to diff-supervision ',)) 683 %= '$ =( ',)) 683 &= '$ =( Setting possibilities: Recommended setting Selective measuring '$ =(: Check zone '$ =(: DODUP RQO\, EORFN$XWR5HOHDV oder EORFN VWRUDJH EORFN DODUP RQO\
7-16
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Earth fault characteristic Pick-up value of the differential current limit (selective measuring) ,!',)()66 '$ =( Recommended: 80% of the lowest 1-pole earth field current to be expected Pick-up value of the differential current limit (check zone) ,!',)()&= '$ =( Recommended: 70% of the lowest 1-pole earth field current to be expected Limitation of characteristic (selective measuring) ,67$()66 '$ =( Recommended: depends on the maximum stabilizing current to be expected and on the CT behavior. Limitation of characteristic (check zone) ,67$()&= '$ =( Recommended: 90% of ,67$()66 '$ =(
7.3.6.2
Breaker failure protection Operation mode of the CBF (binary input) %)%,02'%;; '$ ;;=( Setting possibilities: Recommended setting: - FKDQHO QR6XS ZLWK6XS - FKDQHO QR6XS ZLWK6XS - or FKDQHO ZLWK6XS during operation - or FKDQHO QR6XS during test
Operation mode of the CBF (bay-selective) %)2302'%;; '$ ;;=( Setting possibilities: - %= XQEDODQFH - QRQ H[LVWHQW - H[WHUQDO - WULS UHSXQEDO - ,!TXHU\ - WULS UHS,!TXHU depends on the protection concept chosen
Recommended setting:
Stabilizing factor for the pick-up characteristic in the unbalance mode of operation TRIP rep/unbal and TRIP/UNB pulse Range: Recommended setting: - 0 to 0.8 - refer to chapter 7.3.6.1
Current threshold of stabilizing current for earth fault characteristic ,67$()%) '$ =( Setting possibilities: Recommended setting: 0.00 to 25.00 I/IN depends on the maximum stabilizing current to be expected and on the CT behavior
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7-17
Current threshold for current-controlled operating mode BZ unbalance, I> query %)2302'%;; '$ ;;=(, also current threshold for TRIP command reset, bay-selective setting in parameter !%) %;; '$ ;;=( Setting possibilities: Recommended setting: 0.10 to 2.00 I/IN approx. 50% of the lowest short-circuit current to be expected
Time delay for the breaker failure protection processing 1-phase 7%)3 '$ ;;=( and 3-phase 7%)3 '$ ;;=( Range: Recommended setting: 0.05 to 10 s 2 x circuit-breaker trip time
Time delay for TRIP repeat 7755(3%;; '$ ;;=( Range: Recommended setting: 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.12 s
7.3.6.3
Supervisory functions Isolator running time ,62 75$ 7,0 '$ =( Range: Recommended setting: 1 to 180 s depends on the isolator
Isolator malfunction response ,62 0$/ 5(6 '$ =( Setting possibilities: - DODUP RQO\ - EORFN$XWR5HOHDV - EORFN VWRUDJH - EORFN6WRUUHO DODUP RQO\
Recommended setting:
Cyclic test $872 7(67 '$ =( Setting possibilities: Recommended setting: DFWLYH / LQDFWLYH DFWLYH
Differential current supervision ',)) 683(59 '$ =( Setting possibilities: Recommended setting: DFWLYH / LQDFWLYH DFWLYH during operation; LQDFWLYH during test
7-18
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Zero crossing supervision =(52 &5 683 '$ =( Setting possibilities: Recommended setting: DFWLYH / LQDFWLYH DFWLYH &5 '$ =(
Diff-current limit for zero crossing measurement ,! =(52 Range: Recommended setting: 0.15 to 4.0 I/Ino
less than differential current threshold ,!',)) )$8/7
Protection response during pick-up of automatic testing 7(67 '$ =( Setting possibilities: Recommended setting: DODUP RQO\ / EORFN SURWHFW DODUP RQO\
Supervision time of breaker failure protection release 769)58$;; '$ ;;=( Range: Recommended setting: 0.02 to 15.00 s 15.00 s
Delay time for supervision of the CBF release 7%)0&,%;; '$ ;;=( Range: Recommended setting: 0.06 to 1.00 s 0.06 s
7.3.6.4
Overcurrent release of the bay trip command (selectable per bay in ,!75,3 %;; '$ ;;=() Range: Recommended setting: 0.00 to 25.00 I/IN (IN = rated current of current transformers in feeder) depends on the lowest short-circuit current to be expected
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7-19
7.4
Commissioning with primary values

All secondary test sets must be removed. Measuring inputs must be connected. The installation instructions according to chapter 7.1 and chapter 7.2 must have been completed. For the primary tests, the switchgear must be connected and switched on.
Warning!
Primary tests may only be conducted by qualified personnel who are fully conversant with the commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the network and with the safety regulations and precautions (switching, earthing, etc.).
7.4.1
Checking the current transformer polarity with the load current

Remarks: For checking the CT polarity, a load current of at least 0.1/CT normalization factor nCT in the bay is required; e.g. for nCT = 1 a 10% of the nominal current is required. Where the current is not sufficient for testing, testing of such bays must be performed with a primary test setup. Test steps: 1. Read out isolator replica by direct addressing '$ =(. The indications represent the station status (which isolator is connected to which busbar). 2. Take all feeders out of service with 6WDWXV %;; '$ ;;=(); '$ )( or via the binary inputs of the bay units. Read out commissioning measured values for ZPS-BSZ1 to 3 ('$ =( for ZPS-BSZ1, '$ =( for ZPS-BSZ2 and '$ =( for ZPS-BSZ3). If the protection is functioning properly, the diff-current for ZPS-BSZ2 and ZPS-BSZ3 should be nearly zero and under ZPS-BSZ1 the actual diff-current with the set CT polarity should be displayed, since taking the feeders out of service should have no effect on ZPS-BSZ1. On the bay units the differential and stabilizing currents of the check zone are also displayed. This allows immediate local check of modified CT polarities via &7 67$5317 '$ )(. For further commissioning work, the diff-current in ZPS-BSZ1 is only read after all CTs have been set to the correct polarity. 3. One feeder at a time is released in turn and the differential and stabilizing currents are read out via '$ =(, '$ =(. The results must be equal to feeder current x normalizing factor (CT ratio &7 1250%;; '$ ;;=(). Otherwise, the CT ratio must be checked for correctness. This step is repeated individually for each feeder. At the conclusion of this, all feeders are taken RXW RI VHUYLFH (6WDWXV %;; '$ ;;=().
7-20
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
4. The feeder with the largest current connected to busbar X is put into service and the diff-current on ZPS-BSZ2 and 3 is recorded. 5. Next, the feeder connected to busbar X with the second largest current is put into service. If the load direction is the same as for the feeder in step 4, then the diffcurrent should be greater provided the polarity of the CT is correct. Otherwise, the polarity of the CT must be reversed by changing the setting in the correct DA (e.g. &7 32/$<< '$ <<=( for feeder YY) (refer to chapter 7.3.3). For opposite load direction, suitable measures must be adopted. 6. Step 5 is repeated until all feeders of BZ X have been taken into service. 7. Steps 4, 5 and 6 are repeated for all other busbars. At the end of these measurements, the diff-current should amount to almost zero. 8. Diff-current and stabilizing current of ZPS-BSZ1 are read out via '$ =( The diff-current must be almost zero and the stabilizing current must correspond to the average value of the sum of the magnitudes. 9. If the station conditions permit, busbar coupling via isolators and bus tie bay the above described tests should be repeated in order to check the bus preference and the current transformer polarity in the bus coupler bay.
7.4.2
Checking the connections of the inputs for initiation of the circuit-breaker failure protection
Subsequent to chapter 7.4.1 the tests below can be performed: Test steps: 1. The supervision for the CB failure protection initiation 67$% )$&%) '$ =( must be switched off and mode of operation %= XQEDODQFH must be selected specifically for each bay with%)2302'%;; '$ ;;=( 2. The CB failure protection for one feeder is initiated. The differential and stabilizing currents are displayed under '$ =(. The differential current must be equal to the feeder current with CB failure protection initiation x normalizing factor (IDIFF = 2 x IBAY). factor. The stabilizing current should be the same before and after the initiation. This step is repeated for each feeder. Following the conclusion of the test, the supervision for the CB failure protection initiation 67$% )$&%) '$ =( is released.
7.4.3
Checking the alarms and trip signals

The circuit-breaker test can be performed by current injection or by a manual trip command, which generates a protection trip command or a trip command via '$ =( (refer to chapter 5.7.1) or '$ )( (refer to chapter 6.9). Before starting the test, the corresponding feeder has to be taken out of service. Following this step the circuit breaker test may be performed.
Trip signals
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
7-21
Alarms
The test of the alarm relays and LEDs of the central unit is supported by the DIGSI software. Energizing and de-energizing is carried out automatically after selection of the corresponding alarm relay number. Optical and acoustical indicators should be used to check the alarm relays.
7.4.4
Switching the protection into service

All setting values should be checked again, in case they were altered during the tests. Switching the miniature circuit breakers of the DC supply OFF and ON cancels all alarms (including operations alarms) '$ and the fault record memory '$ of the central unit. The ready for operation LED (green) at the ZE must be on. The failure indication (red) must be off. All trip signals can now be switched through. If a test switch is available, it must be in the service position. No alarm may be present on the EAZ3 module(s).
7-22
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Maintenance and Repair
This chapter describes the maintenance procedures that are necessary and recommended to ensure the continuous reliability of the SIPROTEC 7SS52 protection device. It tells you which components should be checked and/or replaced on a routine basis and what to do in case of malfunctions of the device. The chapter is intended both for personnel in charge of operation and for protection engineers.
8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6
General Recommendations for maintenance Fault analysis Repair Service conditions Interchangeability
8-2 8-3 8-5 8-18 8-19 8-20
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8-1
8.1
General
The 7SS52 does not require any special maintenance. All circuits processing measured values and signals are designed in static technique. As the protection is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs through the measuring systems up to the coils of the trip relays, device faults are automatically annunciated. This yields an enhanced availability of the protection system. Maintenance tests at short intervals therefore become superfluous.
8-2
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8.2
Recommendations for maintenance

Functional tests of the protection system are recommended in intervals of 5 years.
Warning!
Before executing tests or maintenance works it has to be ensured that there arises no danger for personnel and that the tests do not influence station components which are in service.
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property damage. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the applicable safety regulations. Particular attention must be drawn to the following: The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor before any other electrical connection is made. Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply voltage or to the measuring and test quantities. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply voltage (storage capacitors!). The limit values stated in chapter 9, Technical Data must not be exceeded at all, not even during testing and commissioning.
Danger!
The secondary terminals of current transformers must be short-circuited before the secondary circuit to the bay unit is opened! If a test switch is installed which automatically short-circuits the current transformer secondary leads, then it is sufficient to move this switch to the Test position. The short-circuit switch must, however, be checked beforehand. Check of all measuring circuits with regard to the accuracy requirements For this purpose test currents have to be injected into each bay unit, their magnitude lying in the nominal current range (selected between 0.8 and 1.2 IN) as well as in the fault current range (Itest > 6.3 IN). In order to avoid a protection trip, an external fault has to be simulated. When testing with fault current, attention has to be paid to eventual thermal overloading of the input current transformers. Currents up to 30 x IN are permissible for a duration of 10s. After this a cooling down period should be allowed. The magnitude of the injected current value is monitored by means of reading the bay current at the central unit '$ =( or the bay unit '$ )(. A tolerance of up to 5 % is permissible.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8-3
Functional test of the trip circuits per bay unit. They are checked using the integrated supplementary function circuit breaker test (refer to sections 5.7.1 and 6.9). Check the function of the binary inputs in the bay units and the central unit Both states of the binary inputs are simulated. The reaction of the protection to the selected input signal can be analysed via the LED indications or by means of the contents in the operations or fault event memories.
q Check the alarm outputs
Apart from the alarm relay M1 in the bay units the function of K5 (transfer trip) has to be tested. This can be achieved by simulating the marshalled function or if this causes difficulties, configuration to the function circuit breaker test is recommended. Then the function can be started by integrated operation. After completion of the test, the original configuration has to be re-established.
The functional check of the alarm relays is supported by software (refer to chapter 5.3, Test alarm relays?).
8-4
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8.3
Fault analysis
Disturbances of digital protection devices are in most cases caused by component failures. Practical experience also shows that environmental conditions (e.g. short electromagnetic interference beyond the values guaranteed by the manufacturer) may in few cases initiate failure alarm. Continuous failures in the protection system or its components are indicated at the central unit by changing the operations indication from LED green, to the red LED failure and reset of the alarm relay device failure. Additionally the protection system is blocked in order to avoid overfunction. In the event of a failure of a bay unit or the transmission link between bay unit and central unit, the availability of the intact system can be ensured by setting the fault response %/2&.,1* '$ =( to %ORFN %=. The disturbance can be caused by: Failures in the central unit (Failure or defect in the auxiliary voltage supply, module failure) Failures in one of the connected bay units (interruption of power supply, defective measuring circuit, module failure) Interruption of the communication link to one of the bay units (defective transmission or reception modules, interrupted FO link, increased number of transmission errors) Guided by the various failure causes, a systematic analysis has to be carried out. The user is supported in this by the protection system's diagnostic information: Central unit operational event buffer fault event buffer operational events marshalled to LEDs (refer to chapter 5.3) LED indications on the modules Bay unit operational events marshalled to LEDs (refer to chapter 6.3.4) operational event buffer
8.3.1
Analysis of operational events

The central unit's operational events provide first hand information about the cause of a registered device failure. If operational events which have been marshalled to LEDs are missing, then the operational event buffer in the central unit has to be interrogated '$ =(. The user gets information about auxiliary voltage failure, pick-up of the differential current supervision, errors in the measured value supervision of the bay units and failure detection by the cyclic test.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8-5
Detected failures in the bay unit are indicated with their bay number in order to locate the failure. Thus the failure can further be located locally in the bay. Operational events which support identification of a failure are e.g.: Disturbance of the power supply Failure detection by the measured value supervision.
8.3.2
Checking the auxiliary voltage supply

The alarm of auxiliary voltage failure in the protection device can be caused by a device failure as well as by disturbances in the external wiring. It should be checked whether the auxiliary voltage can be measured with adequate magnitude and correct polarity, the ON/OFF switch for the integrated converter on the front plate of the FE or behind the front plate of the ZE is in ON position, the modules are correctly fitted and locked and the fuses in the power supply section of the FE (module SAF) or ZE (module SV) have not blown. The explanation of the LED indication of the power supply module in the central unit is given in chapter 8.3.4.
8.3.3
Replacement of fuses
The power supply modules SV in the central unit and SAF in the bay units are protected against short-circuit by fine-wire fuses. For checking or replacement of these fuses, the units front plates has to be opened after loosening the fixing screws. The SV is located at the extreme right mounting place in the subrack of the ZE (refer to Figure 2-2). This module can be withdrawn from the subrack after switching off the auxiliary voltage and loosening the module lock). The module SAF of the bay unit (refer to Figure 2-4) can be withdrawn from the casing after removing the front ribbon cable. For easy removal of the modules the extraction tool, which is part of the delivery, may be used.
Warning!
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply voltage (storage capacitors!).
8-6
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges across the modules connectors, printed conductors and connection pins have to be avoided by previously contacting earthed metal parts. The withdrawn modules should be placed vertically on the laboratory table. The use of a conductive surface (e.g. EMC mat) is recommended for the modules in order to avoid electromagnetic discharging via components. The location of the fuse element can be seen in Figures 8-1 and 8-2. After checking the fine-wire fuses, the module is inserted into the casing. Care must be taken that the module is fixed correctly and firmly contacted with the rear-side plug connector. Then the removed electrical connections have to be re-established and the front cover closed. Please note that the switch for the power supply SV in the central unit is not accessible with closed front plate. The device is switched ON. If the auxiliary voltage failure continues to be indicated, there must be a failure or short-circuit in the internal power supply. The power supply module should be sent to the factory.
SAF module
ON/OFF switch
Front view
ON/OFF switch
Fuse: version G (5 x 20 mm), medium slow, 2 A, 250 V
Figure 8-1 Location of the fine-wire fuse in the power supply module SAF of the bay unit
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8-7
The following standard fuses are used as input fuses: Fuse, version G (5 x 20 mm), slow SV variant 48/60 V: 6MA1890-1AC13: 8 A; 250 V 110/125 V: 6MA1890-1AC14: 4 A; 250 V 220/250 V: 6MA1890-1AC15: 2 A; 250 V
Plug connector
Typ Nr. UE UA 115V 230V
Bottom side
Input fuse
Figure 8-2 Location of the fine-wire fuse in the power supply module SV of the central unit
8.3.4
Check of the LEDs on the modules

The modules ZPS-SBK, ZPS-BSZ, ZPS-SK and SV are equipped with LED indications which are visible after opening the front plate of the central unit.
Warning!
For testing and commissioning, the ruling safety regulations for working in high-voltage installations have to be obeyed. Some of the following test steps will be carried out in presence of hazardous voltages. They shall be performed only by qualified personnel which is thoroughly familiar with all safety regulations and precautionary measures and pay due attention to them. 5 LEDs are located vertically on the modules ZPS. The functions of their indications are described below. ZPS-SBK
Table 8-1 LED ZPS-SBK RED H1 o GRN H1 o YELL1 H2 YELL2 H3 YELL3 H4 Status
Normal operation status Failure status (diagnosis by means of fault buffer required)
o bright dark
dim flashing
8-8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Detected system failures cause reset of the protection device. If such a failure cannot be eliminated by a restart, a second restart is attempted. After three unsuccessful restart attempts the protection is automatically taken out of service and the failure is indicated by the alarm relay 'HYLFH IDLOXUH. This is indicated on the ZPS-SBK by flashing of the 3rd yellow LED (H4). The cause for the failure which blocked the protection is read from the fault buffer. Depressing keys F2 and 1 indicates at the LC-display the latest status information in the fault record buffer. When communicating via the software DIGSI, the contents of the fault record buffer are directly displayed after selecting the protection device. The further analysis is described in chapter 8.3.5. ZPS-BSZ
Table 8-2 LED ZPS-BSZ RED H1 o o GRN H1 o YELL1 H2 o YELL2 H3 YELL3 H4 Status
Normal operation status Failure status Start-up not completed successfully (diagnosis by means of fault buffer required)
ZPS-SK
Table 8-3 LED ZPS-SK RED H1 o GRN H1 o YELL1 H2 YELL2 H3 YELL3 H4 Status
Fault-free cyclic process Failure of one bay unit or one channel Failure of the SK module
o o bright dark
dim flashing
Fault-free processing is indicated by the green LED. In the event of a module failure, the red LED lights up. In the event of failure of a configured bay, but normal function of the module, additionally the green LED flashes. Depressing the push-button S5, which is located under the LEDs, causes a reset of the ZPS-BSZ and ZPS-SK modules. Depressing the push-button on the ZPS-SBK causes a system reset, the ZE is started up. In addition the setting parameters related to the bay units are updated without restart.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8-9
Table 8-4
Power supply module of the central unit Color Function
LED designation +5 V +15 V -15 V +15 V -15 V +24 V
Green Green Green Green Green Green
Auxiliary voltage for supply of the processor boards and for the alarm relay device failure Auxiliary voltage not used for the central unit Auxiliary voltage exclusively for contrast control of the LC display Alarm relay voltage Auxiliary voltage not used for the central unit Alarm relay voltage
LED ON means that the corresponding auxiliary voltage is available. If the LED indication fails completely, then the auxiliary voltage supply must be checked (chapter 8.3.2) or the fine-wire fuse needs to be replaced (chapter 8.3.3). Defective power supplies must be replaced.
8.3.5
Fault indication and analysis of the fault buffer

System faults are recorded in a fault record buffer for posterior analysis and in most cases indicated directly at the 4-line LC-display (plain text). The display characterizes a more detailed specification of the failure (eventually indication of the faulty processor board or bay unit) and an operating instruction (e.g. faulty bay unit can be taken out of service, if the failure cannot be eliminated immediately).
Fault BU-No. 04 no reception Bay 04 o.serv.->go on exit Monitor <ESC>
Display in case of auxiliary voltage failure of bay unit no 4
No. of cards wrong act: 05 must: 06 Error Buffer <F2> exit Monitor <ESC>
Display in case of missing ZPS-SK-no 2 (e.g. with 9 existing bays)
Read-out of the fault record buffer contents can only be executed from the monitor function of the central unit. This function is entered by a triple system reset. The fault buffer contains only information in the hexadecimal format.
8-10
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
The detailed meaning of the displayed information can be interpreted only by the manufacturer. Therefore in the event of detected disturbances the manufacturer should be contacted. The status events in the fault buffer can be read out either by using the integrated keypad of the central unit or supported by the DIGSI communication program. After starting the monitor function and confirming by depressing key F2, the monitor initial display appears. Key 1 starts read out of the fault buffer. By depressing key 1 again, the up to 20 status events can be displayed one after the other.
02.00 0000 0000 0000 00 00000000 00000000
Display
Operation via DIGSI displays all 20 status events on the screen after entering the key sequence XFO. The display has the following meaning:
aa.bb cccc dddd eeee ff gggggggg hhhhhhhh
a b c d e f g h
SNR FNR TNR FI1 FI2 FI3
Number of the status event Type of failure Task number Failure information 1 Failure information 2 Failure information 3 Date in the format DD.MM.YY Time in the format HH:MM:SS
The first event which will be read out is the most recent system event. In most cases this is the information that the protection has attempted the third restart. The cause for this event can be found in the following events which are read out. These events were written previously as can be seen from the relative time tag. To leave the fault buffer, depress the ESC key on the keypad twice. In most cases, disturbances occurring out of an operational situation can be eliminated by replacing modules. Table 8-5 shows a list of some typical status events from the fault buffer, which help the operation personnel in locating the fault cause. If the fault cannot be clearly identified, the contents of the fault buffer should be sent to the manufacturer. After saving the status events, a new restart may be attempted by switching the central unit OFF and ON again.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8-11
Table 8-5
Status events TNR (HEX) FI1 FI2 FI3 Description of fault (countermeasures) Plain text indication yes yes
Cons. FNR no. (HEX) 1. 2. 03 04
1 102 600 1 601 600 600 100 1000 0 0C 10 0 0D 0E 0F 20 21 22 00YY 0 1
Slave module (ZPS-BSZ or ZPS-SK) cannot be addressed (substitution of module recommended) More than one ZPS module with identical coding (change jumper allocation or states of the switches (refer to chapter A.7.1) Overflow of the event buffer (events are lost!) More than 24 sectionalizers configured Protection system malfunction after three failed restart attempts (analysis of the subsequent fault buffer entries) Failure on the ZPS-SBK module (replace module)
3. 4. 5. 6.
07 0D 0F 0F
1 1 1 1
7.
0F 13
600 10D
1 1
Defective module detected (must be replaced) The defective module is identified by FI1: YY = 02; ZPS-BSZ1 YY = 03; ZPS-BSZ2 YY = 04; ZPS-BSZ3 YY = 05; ZPS-SK1 ... YY = 0A ZPS-SK6 Error in the station configuration (Check the configured number of bays and isolators; check number and location of the bus couplers and sectionalizers; verify sequence of configuration (bus coupler before feeder bay before sectionalizer)
8.
0F
601 602
1002 1004 1007 1008 1004
1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9. 10.
13 15
200 10E
Module ZPS-SBK defective (replace module) equivalent to fault no 3 (verify number of configured feeder bays, bus sections and bus coupler sections) ZPS-BSZ1 defective ZPS-BSZ2 defective ZPS-BSZ3 defective (replace the affected module) ZPS-SBK defective ZPS-BSZ1 defective ZPS-BSZ2 defective ZPS-BSZ3 defective (replace the affected module)
yes yes
11.
15
200 600 200 600
yes
12.
16
yes
8-12
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Table 8-5
Status events TNR (HEX) 2200 2220 2235 2236 2239 223A 6200 6235 6236 6239 623A FI1 FI2 FI3 Description of fault (countermeasures) Plain text indication yes
Cons. FNR no. (HEX) 13. 16
00YY 00YY 00YY 00YY 00YY 00YY 00YY 00YY 00YY
00YY ZPS/FE defective (substitution of module/FE) The affected module or FE is marked by FI1 / FI3 (in Hex): YY = 01 ZPS-SBK YY = 02 ZPS-BSZ1 YY = 03 ZPS-BSZ2 00YY YY = 04 ZPS-BSZ3 YY = 05 ZPS-SK1 ... YY = 0A ZPS-SK6 YY = 65 FE1 ... YY = 94 FE 48 XX ZPS-BSZ No. YY Bay No. Failure detected by cyclic test routine ZZ Test result VV Phase (L1=1, Filter failure: discrepancy set/actual L2=2,L3=3) value Auxiliary voltage failure detected Test result Meaning (ZZ) F0; F51 missing TRIP (release) from ZPS-BSZ1 missing TRIP from F2; F6 ZPS-BSZ2 missing TRIP from F3; F7 ZPS-BSZ3 F4; F9; FF no check-back signal from BU after command output ZPS-SBK defective (replace module) ZPS-BSZ1 defective (replace module) ZPS-BSZ2 defective (replace module) ZPS-BSZ3 defective (replace module) 5 V-auxiliary voltage failure for ZPS modules detected Error on ZPS-BSZ1 Error on ZPS-BSZ2 Error on ZPS-BSZ3
14.
19
600 201 124 XXYY 0 ZZVV 0
15.
1A
102 600 123 102 600
0 1
1 2 3 4 1
yes
16.
1D
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8-13
Table 8-5
Status events TNR (HEX) 600 FI1 FI2 FI3 Description of fault (countermeasures) Plain text indication yes
Cons. FNR no. (HEX) 17. 1F
XXYY
ZZVV
The number of the modules fitted in the central unit (XXYY) differs from the configured station design (ZZVV) (requires verification of the configuration; eventually also verification of the coding of the modules according to chapter A.7) If the programmed configuration data are unknown, then the data must be programmed by means of an initial start-up (system boot). If configuration data and design match, then the first module indicated to be missing must be replaced. Failure on a ZPS-SK module (replace module) FI3 indicates the number of the affected module 5 Hex = ZPS-SK1; 0A Hex = ZPS-SK6
18.
20
0005 ... 000A
yes
19.
21
00YY Failure of a bay unit communication Causes may lie in a defective LMZ module, in a defective FO cable, in a defective bay unit or a defective connection plug. The affected transmission channel is marked by FI3: 64Hex + Chan. No. Hex. f.i. Channel 1 = (100+1) Dez = 65 Hex
yes
1 F0 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FF
Missing TRIP (release) from ZPS-BSZ1 Missing TRIP from ZPS-BSZ2 Missing TRIP from ZPS-BSZ3 No check-back signal from BU after command output TRIP signal from ZPS-BSZ1 (release) still present TRIP signal from ZPS-BSZ2 still present TRIP signal from ZPS-BSZ3 still present Check-back signal from BU after command reset still present Test job not OK Check-back signal from BU without test job and TRIP command (overfunction)
Notes on Table 8-5: The information fields not occupied in the table are of minor importance for fault analysis or can only be interpreted by the manufacturer.
8-14
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8.3.6
Analysis of failures in the communication

The following components of the protection participate in the protection-internal fast data transmission:
Plug connector
Electrical/optical converter for 8 channels each

Figure 8-3 Components for data transmission
FO cable
In the event of failed start-up, indicated by the red LED failure, the faulty data link has to be located. In the event of a failure of a bay unit or the transmission link between bay unit and central unit, the availability of the intact system can be ensured by setting the fault response %/2&.,1* '$ =( to %ORFN %=. The protection system may continue in service after the faulty bay was taken out of service. The setting bay out of service can be selected under 6WDWXV%;; '$ ;;=(. During the commissioning period or if failures were detected, the data transmission links have to be tested individually. For this procedure a station configuration with less bays (e.g. 4) is initially selected. For this purpose, the 5th bay is configured QRQ H[LVWHQW by parameter %$< 67$ % '$ =(. If start-up is completed correctly after switching on the central unit, then further bays can be configured as H[LVWHQW, until the original configuration of the station is reached. Failures in data transmission can be located by a specific test run. Test run of the ZPS-SK The FO connection of the concerned channel is linked by a fiber-optic cable from transmitter to receiver. Test run can be set by fitting a jumper at location X34 on the ZPS-SK. The parameter for cyclic testing $872 7(67 '$ =( must be set to LQDFWLYH for the test run. The red LED H1 flashes and thus indicates the test run. The configured bays are checked. At least one channel must be faulty if the green LED H1 (refer to Figure A-6) flashes. In that case the yellow LEDs indicate the highest channel that is faulty.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8-15
Table 8-6 LED
ZPS-SK RED H1 GRN H1 YELL1 H2 YELL2 H3 YELL3 H4 Status
o o o o o o o o o bright dark
dim flashing
o o o o
o o o o
o o o o
Test run ZPS-SK Failure in channel 1 Failure in channel 2 Failure in channel 3 Failure in channel 4 Failure in channel 5 Failure in channel 6 Failure in channel 7 Failure in channel 8
By connecting the two FO terminals, the transmission channel can be checked for interruptions (for max. FO cable lengths of 750 m). An FO coupler (part of the delivery) is used to connect the FSMA plugs. After finishing the test, the jumper must be removed and the cyclic protection test $872 7(67 '$ =( set to DFWLYH.
FO connection FO cable 4 3 2 1
Supplementary interface Central unit
Figure 8-4 Connection of the interface points for the test run
8-16
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Test run of the bay unit If the test of the ZPS-SK was run successfully, t is very likely that a failure in the bay unit caused the channel disturbance. Fitting jumper no. 5 on the PFE module activates a test function (refer to Figure 8-5). The supplementary interface at the bay unit (refer to Figure 9-1 and Figure 8-4) simulates the central unit for the test run. To run the test, the transmitter of the interface to the central unit is connected to the receiver of the supplementary interface and the receiver of the interface to the central unit is connected to the transmitter of the supplementary interface by a FO cable (FO cables are delivered together with the central unit). In the event of a transmission error in control or alarm direction, the alarm )DLO Com.CU )1R )( is issued. This alarm can be allocated to an LED. After about 0.5 s service without failure, the alarm is cancelled.
PC interface
8 7 6 54 32 1
Test function Operation without central unit Fit jumper to location 5
Figure 8-5 Location of jumpers on the PFE module of the bay unit
Start-up can be completed successfully even with a failed bay (FE or FO link defective). To achieve this, the faulty bay must be taken RXW RI VHUYLFH. This is set in 6WDWXV%;; '$ ;;=(. The corresponding bay must be isolated from the protection zone by means of the primary switchgear. The protection system allows service of the fault-free bays until the defective bay unit or FO cable is replaced.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8-17
8.4
Repair
It is recommended to refrain strictly from repairing units or modules, because they contain especially selected components, which must be handled according to the regulations for EED (electrostatic endangered devices). In the first place, special techniques are required for working with the printed circuit boards, so that the flow-soldered boards and sensitive components are not damaged. Therefore, if a defect cannot be eliminated by the operations described in chapter 8.3, it is recommended to send the complete unit or defective module back to the manufacturer. Suitable transportation packing has to be used. Mechanical impact protection according to IEC 255-21-1 class 2 and IEC 255-21-2 class 1 must be ensured. In case it is unavoidable to replace single modules, the EED-regulations have to be followed (handling of electrostatic endangered devices).
Warning!
Even after switching off the auxiliary voltage or withdrawing the module, dangerous voltages may be present (capacitor storage)!
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges via the components, printed conductors and connection pins must under all circumstances be avoided by previous contact with earthed metal parts. This applies in the same way for replacing components in sockets, such as EPROMs or EEPROMs. Suitable electrostatic protecting packing has to be used for mailing. Modules fitted in the unit are not endangered. After replacement of devices or modules, complete parameterizing is required. Details are given in chapter 5 and chapter 6.
8-18
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8.5
Service conditions
Static protective devices are designed for use in standard relay rooms and compartments so that with proper installation electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC) is ensured. The following should also be heeded (if applicable): All contactors and relays which operate in the same cubicle or on the same relay panel as the digital protection equipment should, as a rule, be fitted with suitable spike quenching elements. All external measuring leads in substations from 100 kV upwards should be screened with a screen capable of carrying power currents. No special measures are normally necessary for medium-voltage substations. It is not permissible to withdraw or insert individual modules under voltage. In the withdrawn condition, some components are electrostatically endangered; during handling, the EED standards (for electrostatically endangered devices) must be observed. Modules fitted in the unit are not endangered.
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
8-19
8.6
Devices
Interchangeability
Protective devices in housings or racks fitted at the factory are delivered complete and can be interchanged as a unit with identical ordering codes. The threshold of binary inputs has to be matched with the station data. Plug-in modules are, in general, interchangeable if the type designations up to the oblique stroke are identical (the characters behind the slash contain internal factory data which do not normally affect the inter-changeability). With modules ZPS, however, the address settings must be checked and with modules EAZ the address setting and threshold setting must be checked and adapted by jumpers. Individual modules of the bay unit should not be replaces. After replacement of digital devices or modules, complete parameterizing is required. Details are given in chapter 5 and chapter 6.
Modules
Central unit
Bay unit
8-20
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Technical Data
9
General data General device data Busbar protection Circuit breaker failure protection Overcurrent protection Standards and guidelines Ancillary functions Dimensions 9-2 9-3 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-13 9-14
This chapter describes the technical specifications of the SIPROTEC 7SS52 protective relay and of its functions, including limits that may on no account be exceeded. The electrical and functional data for the maximum scope of functions are followed by the mechanical data and the dimension drawings.
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
9-1
Technical Data
9.1
General data
Table 9-1
General data Minimum duration of TRIP command Minimum current limit for reset of signal I / IN1 Setting range I / IN1 Setting range in s Busbar arrangement (max.) 0.02 to 1.0 s (in steps of 0.01) 0.2 to 2.0 (in steps of 0.1) 0 to 25 (in steps of 0.01) 1 to 180 (in steps of 0.01) Quadruple or triple busbar with transfer busbar; up to 16 couplers and 24 sectionalizers2, 12 bus sections, 12 coupler bus sections.3 48 (including bus couplers and sectionalizers)
TRIP command
Overcurrent release of TRIP signals Isolator running time Busbar (BB) configuration
Number of bays
1 Nominal current of the feeder current transformer (1 or 5 A) 2 1 longitudinal sectionalizer (without current transformer) = 1 bay 3 Sections which serve exclusively for coupling of bus sections; no feeder bays
9-2
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Technical Data
9.2
General device data
Table 9-2
General device data Rated current IN Rated frequency fN Thermal overload capacity in current path continuous for 10 s for 1 s Dynamic overload capacity (1 half-cycle) Burden current inputs at IN = 1 A current inputs at IN = 5 A Rated auxiliary voltage Uaux central unit bay unit Permissible tolerance of rated auxiliary voltage Uaux Max. ripple Power consumption (dependent on station configuration) quiescent central unit bay unit energized central unit bay unit Back-up time after auxiliary voltage failure 1 A or 5 A 50 / 60 Hz 4 x IN 30 x IN 100 x IN 250 x IN < 0.1 VA < 0.2 VA
Input circuits
Voltage supply
DC 48/60, 110/125, 220/250 V DC 60 to 250 V -20 to +15% 12%
35 to 80 W 12 W 42 to 92 W 16 W 50 ms (with UH 60 V)
Digital inputs
Number central unit bay unit Voltage range Nominal control voltage DC Pick-up threshold Drop-off threshold Current consumption
7 20 DC 24 to 250 V (thresholds selectable by plug-in jumpers) 24, 60, 110, 220 V 0.8 x UN 0.65 x UN approx. 1.6 mA / input
Alarm contacts
Number of relays marshallable central unit bay unit not marshallable central unit bay unit Switching capacity MAKE/BREAK Switching voltage Permissible current continuously
16 / 32 (each 1 NO contact) 1 (1 NO contact) 1 (2 NC contacts) 1 (2 NC contacts) 20 W / VA AC / DC 250 V 1A
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
9-3
Technical Data
Table 9-2 Command contacts (bay unit)
General device data
Number of relays Switching capacity CLOSE OPEN Switching voltage permissible current continuously 0.5 s
4 (each 2 NO contacts) 1 (1 NO contact) 1000 W / VA 30 W / VA AC / DC 250 V 5A 30 A
Light emitting diodes (central unit)
Ready for service (green) Failure indication (red) Marshallable indications (red) Ready for service (green) Failure indication (red) Isolator states (marshallable) red green Alarms (marshallable) red LC display central unit bay unit Sealed keypad central unit bay unit
1 1 16 / 32 1 1 5 5 6
(bay unit)
Operate, display
4 lines x 20 characters 4 lines x 16 characters 24 keys 12 keys
Serial interfaces Communication interface front (central unit) connection Baud rate 9-pin D-SUB ISO 2110 1200 to 38400 bauds (bay unit) Diagnosis interface connection Baud rate Interface for high-speed data communication connection Baud rate fiber-optic cable optical wavelength permissible cable attenuation transmission distance character quiescent status
9-pin D-SUB ISO 2110 1200 to 19200 bauds
(bay or central unit)
FSMA plug connector 1200 Kbauds glass fiber 62.5/125 m 820 nm max. 8 dB max. 1.5 km1 light off
9-4
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Technical Data
Table 9-2 Casings (central unit)
General device data
Cubicle Surface-mounted casing (wall-mounted) SIPAC subrack (bay unit) Casing (7XP20) with window pane without window pane Terminals Degree of protection acc. to EN 60 529
IP 54 IP 54 IP 20
IP 51 IP 30 IP 21
Dimensions and weights SIPAC subrack (central unit) Surface-mounted casing (bay unit) Flush mounted Surface-mounted
14.3 kg 43.0 kg 8.1 kg 11.8 kg
1 Determination of the maximum distance
8 dB reserve cable attenuation L max = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------attenuation factor of FO cable

- typ. reserve for ageing and temperature drift 2 to 3 dB - plug attenuation (FSMA): ca. 0.3 dB/plug - FO attenuation coefficient (glass fiber 62.5/125 mm) 3.5 dB / km
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
9-5
Technical Data
9.3
Busbar protection
Table 9-3
Busbar protection Stabilized differential current measurement Overcurrent I / INorm1 Stabilizing factor k for bus section-selective protection Stabilizing factor k for the check zone 0.2 to 4.00 (in steps of 0.01)
Characteristic
Setting ranges
0.1 to 0.8 (in steps of 0.01)
0.1 to 0.8 (in steps of 0.01)
Diff-current supervision Setting ranges
Current limit value I / INorm1 Time delay Typical trip time
0.05 to 0.8 (in steps of 0.01)2 1.0 to 10 s (in steps of 1)2 15 ms
Tripping time
1 INorm = normalized nominal current referred to the current transformer with the highest ratio (base CT) 2 Identical setting ranges for the zone-selective protection and the check zone
9-6
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Technical Data
9.4
Circuit breaker failure protection
Table 9-4
Circuit breaker failure protection One or two-channel initiation Individually selectable per feeder: Current sensor TRIP repeat (1/3-phase) with current sensor Forced unbalance (1-step) Forced unbalance (1/3phase; (2-step) with TRIP repeat TRIP by external CBF protection (tripping via isolator replica of busbar protection) plus for each mode (except for TRIP by external CBF): low-current mode plus for modes with TRIP repeat: pulse mode Overcurrent I / IN Stabilizing factor k Time delay for unbalance/current sensor Time delay for trip signal repeat Overcurrent I / IN2 Time delay 0.2 to 2.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0 to 0.8 (in steps of 0.01) 0.05 to 1.00 s (in steps of 0.01) 0 to 1.00 s (in steps of 0.01) 0.2 to 2.00 (0.01) 0.05 to 1 s (0.01)
Control modes Modes of operation (with external initiation)
Setting ranges
Circuit-breaker failure protection (for busbar short-circuit)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
9-7
Technical Data
9.5
Overcurrent protection
Table 9-5
Overcurrent protection in the bay unit Definite or inverse time overcurrent protection High-set stage I>> (phase) I / IN High-set stage IE>> (earth) I / IN Trip time delays T-I>>, T-IE>> Overcurrent stage I> (phase) I / IN Overcurrent stage IE > (earth) I / IN Trip time delays T-I >, T-IE> Inverse time O/C stage IP (phase) I / IN Inverse time O/C stage IE (earth) I / IN Trip time delays T-IP, T-IE Characteristics 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.00 to 60.00 s or 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.05 to 25.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.00 to 60.00 s or 0.10 to 4.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.10 to 4.00 (in steps of 0.01) 0.00 to 10.00 or Normal inverse (IEC 60255-3 type A) Very inverse (IEC 60255-3 type B) Extremely inverse (IEC 60255-3 type C)
Characteristic
Setting ranges
Definite time overcurrent protection Inverse time overcurrent protection
9-8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Technical Data
9.6
Standards and guidelines
Table 9-6
Electrical tests This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within certain voltage limits (Lowvoltage Directive 73/23/EEC). The product conforms with international standards of series IEC 60255 and the German standard DIN 57435 /Part 303 (corresponds to VDE 0435/Part 303). This product was developed and manufactured for utilization in industrial installations according to the EMC standards. High voltage test (routine test), all circuits except auxiliary voltage input High voltage test (routine test), only auxiliary voltage input Impulse voltage test (type test), all circuits, class III This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081 and EN 50082 for EMC directive, and with the standards EN 602556 for the lowvoltage directive.
CE conformity, regulations
Insulation tests IEC 255-5; DIN VDE 0435 part 303 EN 60255-6
2 kV (r.m.s. value), 50 Hz, 1 min 2.8 kV DC, 1 min both polarities 5 kV (peak value), 1.2 / 50 s, 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative pulses in intervals of 5 s
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
9-9
Technical Data
Table 9-6
Electrical tests Radio disturbance voltage on lines, only auxiliary voltage, EN 55011, DIN VDE 0875 part 11, IEC CISPR 11 Disturbance field intensity EN 55011, DIN VDE 0875 part 11, IES CISPR 11 150 kHz to 30 MHz, limit value class B
EMC tests for radio transmission EN 50081-2 (technical generic standard)
30 to 1000 MHz, limit value class B
EMC tests against radio disturbances IEC 255-6, IEC 255-22 (international product standards) EN 50082-2 (technical generic standard) DIN VDE 0435 part 303 (German product standard for protection devices)
High-frequency test (1MHz test) IEC 255-22-1, DIN VDE 0435 part 303; class III Attenuated oscillation IEC 15C(SC)102 Discharge of static electricity IEC 255-22-2; IEC 1000-4-2; VDE 0847 part 4-2; EN 61000-4-2; class III Exposure to HF field, amplitude-modulated IEC 1000-4-3; VDE 0847 part 3; EN 61000-4-3; class III Exposure to HF field, pulse-modulated IEC 77B(Sec)136; ENV 50204; VDE 0847 part 204; class III Fast transient disturbance / burst IEC 255-22-4; IEC 1000-4-4; EN 61000-4-4; VDE 0847 part 4-4; class IV
2.5 kV longitudinal; 1 kV transversal; 1 MHz; t = 15 s; 400 pulses per s; test duration 2 s; RI = 200 2.5 kV; 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 50 MHz; RI = 50 6 kV contact discharge; 8 kV air discharge; both polarities; 150 pF; RI = 330 10 V/m (r.m.s. value, non-modulated); 80 to 1000 Mhz; 80 %; 1 kHz; AM 10 V/m (r.m.s. value); 900 MHz G 5 MHz; repetition frequency 200 Hz; ED 50 %
Protective conductor: 1 kV / 5 kHz; all circuits: 4 kV / 2.5 kHz; 5 / 50 ns; 5 kHz, burst duration = 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities; RI = 50 , test duration 1 min
9-10
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Technical Data
Table 9-6
Electrical tests High-energy pulse / surge EN 61000-4-5; EN 50082-2; IEC 1000-4-5; auxiliary voltage input DC / signal lines: class III HF on lines IEC 1000-4-6; VDE 0843 part 6; EN 61000-4-6; class III Power system-frequency magnetic field IEC 1000-4-8; IEC 255-6; EN 60255-6; EN 61000-4-8; VDE 0847 part 4-8; class IV Auxiliary voltage inputs / signal lines 1 kV sym. / 2 kV asym. 5 pulses, both polarities
EMC tests against radio disturbances IEC 255-6, IEC 255-22 (international product standards) EN 50082-2 (technical generic standard) DIN VDE 0435 part 303 (German product standard for protection devices)
10 V (r.m.s value); 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80%; 1 kHz; AM; RI = 150 30 A/m; continuously; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz; 0.5 mT
Table 9-7
Mechanical tests Permissible mechanical impact in service (severity 12 acc. to SN 29010 T.2)
Mechanical impact IEC 255-21-1, class II; IEC 68-2-6, test Fc
sinusoidal 10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm amplitude; 60 to 150 Hz; 1 g acceleration; frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min; 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes sinusoidal 5 to 8 Hz; 7.5 mm amplitude; 8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration; frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min; 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
during transport (severity 23 acc. to SN 29010 T.2)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
9-11
Technical Data
Table 9-8
Climatic conditions Permissible ambient temperature in service for storage during transport during start-up Humidity in operation
Climatic conditions EN 60255-6 IEC 255-6 DIN VDE 0453 part 303
-10 to +55 C (bay unit) 0 to +55 C (central unit) -25 to +70 C -25 to +70 C -10 to +55 C (bay unit) 0 to +55 C (central unit) Yearly mean 75% relative humidity, on 30 days in the year up to 95% relative humidity, moisture condensation not permissible
We recommend to install the devices so that they are not subject to direct sunlight and strong fluctuations in temperature which could lead to moisture condensation. Commissioning at temperatures 0 C is permissible only if site conditions ensure that no command output can be activated before the device temperature has reached 0 C.
9-12
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Technical Data
9.7
Ancillary functions
Table 9-9
Ancillary functions Current monitoring per feeder Auxiliary voltage monitoring Cyclic test Check of the data transmission between central unit and bay units Memory tests Feeder currents Range Tolerance IL1; IL2; IL3; IE in A primary and in % IN 0 to 6000% IN typically 2% of measured value IdL1; IdL2; IdL3 IsL1; IsL2; IsL3 0 to 6000% IN f in Hz (I > 0.1IN) fN 5Hz 0.1 Hz IL1; IL2; IL3 in A primary and in % IN 0 to 1000% IN typically 2% of measured value IdL1; IdL2; IdL3 IsL1; IsL2; IsL3 in % IN
Self-diagnosis functions
Operational measured values (bay unit)
Differential and restraint (stabilizing) currents of the check zone Range Frequency Range Tolerance (central unit) Feeder currents Range Tolerance
Differential and restraint (stabilizing) currents of all bus sections (separate for ZPS-BSZ1; ZPSBSZ2 and ZPS-BSZ3) Range Event recording Storage of the last 99 operational events and 40 fault events Storage time (from busbar TRIP or external initiation
0 to 1000% IN
Fault recording
-100 to +300 ms (1 or 2 fault records), -300 to +500 ms (1 fault record)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
9-13
Technical Data
9.8
Dimensions
9.8.1
Bay unit
Side view
Front view
7.5 Terminals 29 to 78
36.5
Reset button (LED) 1.5
Diagnostics interface Terminals 1 to 28
Attention: minimum distance to other devices required due to permissible bending radius of the fiber-optic cable ( 90 mm)!
Supplementary interface (serial) FO interface to central unit Detail Z: FO interface FO interface Bottom view
12.7 12.7 12.7
Figure 9-1 Dimensional drawing of 7XP2040-1 for panel surface mounting (all dimensions in mm)
9-14
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Technical Data
Figure 9-2 Dimensional drawing of 7XP2040-2 for panel or cubicle flush mounting (all dimensions in mm)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
9-15
Technical Data
Horizontal position Vertical position Sequential number Current connections e.g. 5C1
Figure 9-3 Connection plugs (rear view) for flush-mounted casing (example)
Voltage connections e.g. 5B4
9-16
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Technical Data
9.8.2
Central unit
Front view 482.6 464.8 Side view 15.5
Serial communication interface Modular terminal block
57.2
76.2
57.2
Top view Attention: minimum distance to other devices required due to permissible bending radius of the fiber-optic cable ( 90 mm)!
Figure 9-4 Mechanical dimensions of the subrack
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
9-17
Technical Data
Rear view
Connection module
FO interfaces to bay units
Figure 9-5 Connection plugs (rear view) of the subrack
9-18
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Technical Data
Front view
Side view
Glass door with square key lock
Rear view
Bottom view
Slots for FO Cable glands (for auxiliary supply and signal connection cables) Note: earthing connection inside the casing
Figure 9-6 Mechanical dimensions of the surface-mounted casing
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
9-19
9-20
Appendix
A
This appendix is mainly a reference for experienced user. It contains ordering information, general diagrams and connection diagrams, and tabular listings of all settings and system data for the full scope of device functions. A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 Data for selection and ordering Operational and fault events Tabular overview of direct addresses - Central unit Tabular overview of direct addresses - Bay unit Basis for selection of the stabilization factor k Connection diagrams Jumper settings (central unit) Jumper settings of the bay unit Abbreviations A-2 A-6 A-28 A-39 A-48 A-49 A-52 A-56 A-60
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-1
Appendix
A.1
Data for selection and ordering

Table A-1 gives an overview of the available variants of the components (central unit, bay units) of the protection system 7SS52 and their ordering codes. Necessary ancillary devices and the available documentation for their application with corresponding ordering codes are added.
Table A-1
Selection and ordering data for central unit Order No.
Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52 CENTRAL UNIT Rated aux. voltage of converter DC 48, 60 V DC 110, 125 V DC 220, 250 V Mechanical design in subrack ES902C in surface-mounted casing in 8MF cubicle Fitted for 8 bays 16 bays 24 bays 32 bays 40 bays 48 bays Fitted alarm modules 16 alarms 32 alarms Communication language German English
7SS52
3 4 5
A B F
A B C D E F
1 2
1 2
A-2
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Table A-2
Ancillary devices of the central unit
Ancillary devices The following ancillary devices are contained in the delivery of the central unit:
The plastic bag that is attached to the back of the casing contains:
Extraction handle for boards FO Simplex indoor cable, length 0.2 m (2 off) FO coupler Inscription film Torx socket wrench insert T8, T10, T20 Diskette with PC communication program DIGSIand template for arrangement of the text on the inscription strips Diskette with firmware
Plug-in jumpers for boards
Table A-3
Selection and ordering data for bay unit Order No.
Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52 BAY UNIT Rated current at 50/60 Hz 1A 5A Rated auxiliary voltage of converter DC 48 V DC 60 to 250 V Mechanical design in casing 7XP2040-2 for flush mounting in panel / cubicle in casing 7XP2040-1 for surface mounting on panel in casing 7XP2040-2 for flush mounting in panel or cubicle without glass cover Fault recording function without with Ancillary functions without with overcurrent time protection Interface with data transfer to control center without serial interface with serial interface for fiber-optic cable
7SS52
A 0
1 5
2 5
C D E
0 1
0 1
A C
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-3
Appendix
ANCILLARY COMPONENTS PC communication program DIGSI for busbar protection German English Connection cable 7SS52-PC (9-pole; D-SUB)
Order No.
7XS5010-0AA00 7XS5010-1AA00 7XV5100-4
Documentation Information leaflet LSA 2.2.7: Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52 Operation manual: Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection SIPROTEC 7SS52
Order No. E50001-K5722-A171-A1
E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-4
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
ANCILLARY COMPONENTS
Order No.
Fiber-optic connections central unit to bay units FO-Duplex outdoor cable with non-metallic anti-rodent protection, PE sheath 2GG 62.5/125 m hollow conductor filled FO-Duplex indoor cable, sturdy design 2G 62.5/125 m; halogen-free and flame-retardant, without FSMA plug single-end pre-fabricated with FSMA plug double-end pre-fabricated with FSMA plug 100 meter lengths: Length 0 m Length 100 m Length 200 m Length 300 m Length 400 m Length 500 m Length 600 m Length 700 m Length 800 m Length 900 m 10 meter lengths: Length 0 m Length 10 m Length 20 m Length 30 m Length 40 m Length 50 m Length 60 m Length 70 m Length 80 m Length 90 m 1 meter lengths: Length 0 m Length 1 m Length 2 m Length 3 m Length 4 m Length 5 m Length 6 m Length 7 m Length 8 m Length 9 m 1 2 Plain text order required for non-standardized lengths Before delivery, the non-metallic rodent protection is stripped at both ends on a length of 1 m. Extended stripping lengths (max. 2.5 m) have to be ordered by plain text. A B C D E F G H J K A B C D E F G H J K 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6XV81000 B B 1 0
1,2
6XV8100-
0 1 2
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-5
Appendix
A.2
Operational and fault events

Explanations for the following event list of the central unit (see Table A-4):
Autom BF BI BN BSZ BSZ1 BSZ2 BSZ3 BU BZ 01 ... 12 C C/G CB CBF Chs. Coup CU CZ FE FN FNo. GA No. I-SUM Id-sup Iso Isol Isol i IsolFlt L1, L2, L3 m M OE Req. Run
1 2 3 4
Automatic testing Breaker failure Binary input Bay number Protection board Protection board 1 (= Check zone) Protection board 2 Protection board 3 Bay unit Bus zone 01 ... 12 Coming annunciation Coming/Going annunciation Circuit breaker Circuit breaker failure protection Check sum Coupler Central unit Check zone Fault event Fault number Function number Group alarm number Summation current algorithm Differential current supervision Isolator Isolator Isolator i (i = 1 to 5) Isolator fault Phases LED indication is stored ( "memorized) Measurand Operational event Request Runtime Annunciation not marshallable (cannot be allocated to relay or LED) 0/1 depending on the setting of '$ 0/1 depending on the setting of '$ 0/1 depending on the setting of '$ Event not marshallable (cannot be allocated to relay or LED)
A-6
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
A.2.1
A.2.1.1
Alarms from the central unit

PC, LC display and relays/LED
Table A-4
Alarms from the central unit Logical function Short text (text on LC display) Err. PROT BLOCK Err. PROT ACTIVE REBOOT DEVICE RESTART VOLTAGE FAIL RESTART AFT CONF Setting Configuration LED-reset flt rec frozen flt rec blocked out of serv.:BXY Maintenance :BXY BU fail :BXY No IsoOper/Maint TRPBZ01 L1= zzz TRPBZ02 L1= zzz TRPBZ03 L1= zzz TRPBZ04 L1= zzz TRPBZ05 L1= zzz TRPBZ06 L1= zzz TRPBZ07 L1= zzz TRPBZ08 L1= zzz TRPBZ09 L1= zzz TRPBZ10 L1= zzz TRPBZ11 L1= zzz TRPBZ12 L1= zzz TRPBZ01 L2= zzz TRPBZ02 L2= zzz TRPBZ03 L2= zzz TRPBZ04 L2= zzz TRPBZ05 L2= zzz TRPBZ06 L2= zzz TRPBZ07 L2= zzz ATRPBZ08 L2= zzz GA No. Relay/ LED No. 1,1,m 2,2,m # # # # # # # # 6,6 12,12 12,12 3,3 13,13 m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m C C C C C/G C/G C C/G C/G C/G+BN C/G+BN C/G+BN C/G C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN Alarm characteristic C/G
FNo. Event buffer 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE
Error with protection blocking Error without protection blocking System initialize Reset of system processors Voltage failure Restart after configuration Parameter setting in progress Configuration in progress RED reset Fault record available Fault recording blocked Bay out of service Maintenance of bay Bay unit failure Isolator operation not permitted (group alarm) Trip command for bus zone 01 L1 Trip command for bus zone 02 L1 Trip command for bus zone 03 L1 Trip command for bus zone 04 L1 Trip command for bus zone 05 L1 Trip command for bus zone 06 L1 Trip command for bus zone 07 L1 Trip command for bus zone 08 L1 Trip command for bus zone 09 L1 Trip command for bus zone 10 L1 Trip command for bus zone 11 L1 Trip command for bus zone 12 L1 Trip command for bus zone 01 L2 Trip command for bus zone 02 L2 Trip command for bus zone 03 L2 Trip command for bus zone 04 L2 Trip command for bus zone 05 L2 Trip command for bus zone 06 L2 Trip command for bus zone 07 L2 Trip command for bus zone 08 L2
15 0 76,77,80 76,77,81 76,77,82 76,77,83 76,77,84 76,77,85 76,77,86 76,77,87 76,77,88 76,77,89 76,77,90 76,77,91 76,78,80 76,78,81 76,78,82 76,78,83 76,78,84 76,78,85 76,78,86 76,78,87
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-7
Appendix
Table A-4
Alarms from the central unit Logical function Short text (text on LC display) TRPBZ09 L2= zzz TRPBZ10 L2= zzz TRPBZ11 L2= zzz TRPBZ12 L2= zzz TRPBZ01 L3= zzz TRPBZ02 L3= zzz TRPBZ03 L3= zzz TRPBZ04 L3= zzz TRPBZ05 L3= zzz TRPBZ06 L3= zzz TRPBZ07 L3= zzz TRPBZ08 L3= zzz TRPBZ09 L3= zzz TRPBZ10 L3= zzz TRPBZ11 L3= zzz TRPBZ12 L3= zzz TripRep L1:BXY TripRep L2:BXY TripRep L3:BXY Trip blocked noTripReleas:BXY EF charact.activ Device trip Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip BZ01 Trip BZ02 Trip BZ03 Trip BZS04 Trip BZ05 Trip BZ06 Trip BZ07 Trip BZ08 Trip BZ09 Trip BZ10 Trip BZ11 Trip BZ12 BF blocked M M M M M M M M M MS M M MS M M M GA No. Relay/ LED No. m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m 14,14,m 14,14,m 14,14,m 10,10 m 16,16,m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m 15,15,m 11,11 C+BN C/G Alarm characteristic C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+BN C+BN C+BN C/G C+BN C/G
FNo. Event buffer 40 41 42 43 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 64 65 66 67 68 69 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 96 97 FE OE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE OE FE OE
Trip command for bus zone 09 L2 Trip command for bus zone 10 L2 Trip command for bus zone 11 L2 Trip command for bus zone 12 L2 Trip command for bus zone 01 L3 Trip command for bus zone 02 L3 Trip command for bus zone 03 L3 Trip command for bus zone 04 L3 Trip command for bus zone 05 L3 Trip command for bus zone 06 L3 Trip command for bus zone 07 L3 Trip command for bus zone 08 L3 Trip command for bus zone 09 L3 Trip command for bus zone 10 L3 Trip command for bus zone 11 L3 Trip command for bus zone 12 L3 Trip repeat L1 Trip repeat L2 Trip repeat L3 BZ trip blocked No release of trip command Earth fault characteristic active Device trip (group alarm) Trip command L1 (group alarm) Trip command L2 (group alarm) Trip command L3 (group alarm) Trip command for BZ 01 (group al.) Trip command for bus zone 02 (group alarm) Trip command for BZ 03 (group al.) Trip command for BZ 04 (group al.) Trip command for BZ 05 (group al.) Trip command for BZ 06 (group al.) Trip command for BZ 07 (group al.) Trip command for BZ 08 (group al.) Trip command for BZ 09 (group al.) Trip command for BZ 10 (gr. alarm) Trip command for BZ 11 (group al.) Trip command for BZ 12 (group al.) Breaker failure/Transfer trip CBF blocked
76,78,88 76,78,89 76,78,90 76,78,91 76,79,80 76,79,81 76,79,82 76,79,83 76,79,84 76,79,85 76,79,86 76,79,87 76,79,88 76,79,89 76,79,90 76,79,91 0 -
Transf. Trip:BXY
A-8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Table A-4
Alarms from the central unit Logical function Short text (text on LC display) BF BI err:L1:BXY GA No. Relay/ LED No. 7,7 Alarm characteristic C/G+BN
FNo. Event buffer 98 OE
Fault: CBF-BI L1 Time exceeded or CBF-BI release outside time window Fault: CBF-BI L2 Time exceeded or CBF-BI release outside time window Fault: CBF-BI L3 Time exceeded or CBF-BI release outside time window Fault: CBF-BI 3-pole Time exceeded Fault: CBF-BI release 1-pole Time exceeded Fault: CBF-BI release 3-pole Time exceeded Isolator 1 position CLOSED Isolator 1 position OPEN Isolator 1 status fault Isolator 1 fault: run time Isolator 2 position CLOSED Isolator 2 position OPEN Isolator 2 status fault Isolator 2 fault: run time Isolator 3 position CLOSED Isolator 3 position OPEN Isolator 3 status fault Isolator 1 fault: run time Isolator 4 position CLOSED Isolator 4 position OPEN Isolator 4 status fault Isolator 4 fault: run time Isolator 5 position CLOSED Isolator 5 position OPEN Isolator 5 status fault Isolator 5 fault: run time Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 01 Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 02 Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 03 Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 04 Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 05 Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 06 Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 07 Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 08
99
OE
BF BI err:L2:BXY
7,7
C/G+BN
100
OE
BF BI err:L3:BXY
7,7
C/G+BN
101 102 103 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139
OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE
BF BI err 3p:BXY BFcomBIerr1p:BXY BfcomBIerr3p:BXY Isol 1 ON:BXY
151 152 151 152 151 152 151 152 151 152 153 153 153 153 153 153 153 153
7,7,m 7,7,m 7,7,m # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # m m m m m m m m
C/G+BN C/G+BN C/G+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G
Isol 1 OFF:BXY Isol1Flt pla:BXY Isol1Flt run:BXY Isol 2 ON:BXY Isol 2 OFF:BXY Isol2Flt pla:BXY Isol2Flt run:BXY Isol 3 ON:BXY Isol 3 OFF:BXY Isol3Flt pla:BX Isol3Flt run:BXY Isol 4 ON:BXY Isol 4 OFF:BXY Isol4Flt pla:BXY Isol4Flt run:BXY isol 5 ON:BXY isol 5 OFF:BXY isol5Flt pla:BXY isol5Flt run:BXY BZ 01 blocked BZ 02 blocked BZ 03 blocked BZ 04 blocked BZ 05 blocked BZ 06 blocked BZ 07 blocked BZ 08 blocked8
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-9
Appendix
Table A-4
Alarms from the central unit Logical function Short text (text on LC display) BZ 09 blocked BZ 10 blocked BZ 11 blocked BZ 12 blocked IsoOp notPerm. Bay DC fail :BXY CB fail :BXY Isol flt place M Isol flt run M Block BZ selec M Isol flt alarm Id-Sup L1 CZ Id-Sup L2 CZ Id-Sup L3 CZ Id-Sup CZ M Id-sup BZ01 L1-2 Id-sup BZ02 L1-2 Id-sup BZ03 L1-2 Id-sup BZ04 L1-2 Id-sup BZ05 L1-2 Id-sup BZ06 L1-2 Id-sup BZ07 L1-2 Id-sup BZ08 L1-2 Id-sup BZ09 L1-2 Id-sup BZ10 L1-2 Id-sup BZ11 L1-2 Id-sup BZ12 L1-2 Id-sup BZ01 L2-2 Id-sup BZ02 L2-2 Id-sup BZ03 L2-2 Id-sup BZ04 L2-2 Id-sup BZ05 L2-2 Id-sup BZ06 L2-2 Id-sup BZ07 L2-2 Id-sup BZ08 L2-2 Id-sup BZ09 L2-2 Id-sup BZ10 L2-2 Id-sup BZ11 L2-2 Id-sup BZ12 L2-2 Id-sup BZ01 L3-2 159 159 159 0/1
3
FNo. Event buffer 140 141 142 143 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 192 OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE
GA No.
Relay/ LED No. m m m m 13,13 9,9,m 9,9,m 9,9,m 9,9,m
Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 09 Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 10 Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 11 Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 12 Isolator operation not permitted in case of isolator fault Failure of isolator aux. voltage CB failure Isolator fault: status (group alarm) Isolator fault: run (group alarm) BZ blocked by iso./BU/test fault (group alarm) Isolator fault alarm Diff-current supervision: CZ L1 Diff-current supervision: CZ L2 Diff-current supervision: CZ L3 Diff-current superv.: CZ (group al.) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 02 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 03 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 04 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 05 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 06 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 07 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 08 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 09 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 10 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 11 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 02 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 03 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 04 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 05 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 06 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 07 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 08 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 09 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 10 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 11 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L3 on BSZ2
153 153 153 153 0/11 0/12 0/1 0

2
Alarm characteristic C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G+BN C/G+BN
C/G m m m 8,8,m C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G
256,258,260 m 256,257,261 m 256,257,262 m 256,257,263 m 256,257,264 m 256,257,265 m 256,257,266 m 256,257,267 m 256,257,268 m 256,257,269 m 256,257,270 m 256,257,271 m 256,258,260 m 256,258,261 m 256,258,262 m 256,258,263 m 256,258,264 m 256,258,265 m 256,258,266 m 256,258,267 m 256,258,268 m 256,258,269 m 256,258,270 m 256,258,271 m 256,259,260 m
A-10
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Table A-4
Alarms from the central unit Logical function Short text (text on LC display) Id-sup BZ02 L3-2 Id-sup BZ03 L3-2 Id-sup BZ04 L3-2 Id-sup BZ05 L3-2 Id-sup BZ06 L3-2 Id-sup BZ07 L3-2 Id-sup BZ08 L3-2 Id-sup BZ09 L3-2 Id-sup BZ10 L3-2 Id-sup BZ11 L3-2 Id-sup BZ12 L3-2 Id-sup BZS01 L1-3 Id-sup BZ02 L1-3 Id-sup BZ03 L1-3 Id-sup BZ04 L1-3 Id-sup BZ05 L1-3 Id-sup BZ06 L1-3 Id-sup BZ07 L1-3 Id-sup BZ08 L1-3 Id-sup BZ09 L1-3 Id-sup BZ10 L1-3 Id-sup BZ12 L1-3 Id-sup BZ12 L1-3 Id-sup BZ01 L2-3 Id-sup BZ02 L2-3 Id-sup BZ03 L2-3 Id-sup BZ04 L2-3 Id-sup BZ05 L2-3 Id-sup BZ06 L2-3 Id-sup BZ07 L2-3 Id-sup BZ08 L2-3 Id-sup BZ09 L2-3 Id-sup BZ10 L2-3 Id-sup BZ11 L2-3 Id-sup BZ12 L2-3 Id-sup BZ01 L3-3 Id-sup BZ02 L3-3 Id-sup BZ03 L3-3 Id-sup BZ04 L3-3 Id-sup BZ05 L3-3 Id-sup BZ06 L3-3 GA No. Relay/ LED No. Alarm characteristic C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G
FNo. Event buffer 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 240 241 242 243 244 245 OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE
Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 02 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 03 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 04 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 05 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 06 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 07 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 08 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 09 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 10 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 11 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 01 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 02 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 03 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 04 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 05 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 06 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 07 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 08 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 09 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 10 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 11 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.:BZ 12 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 02 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 03 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 04 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 05 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 06 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 07 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 08 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 09 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 10 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 11 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 02 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 03 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 04 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 05 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 06 L3 on BSZ3
256,259,261 m 256,259,262 m 256,259,263 m 256,259,264 m 256,259,265 m 256,259,266 m 256,259,267 m 256,259,268 m 256,259,269 m 256,259,270 m 256,259,271 m 256,257,260 m 256,257,261 m 256,257,262 m 256,257,263 m 256,257,264 m 256,257,265 m 256,257,266 m 256,257,267 m 256,257,268 m 256,257,269 m 256,257,270 m 256,257,271 m 256,258,260 m 256,258,261 m 256,258,262 m 256,258,263 m 256,258,264 m 256,258,265 m 256,258,266 m 256,258,267 m 256,258,268 m 256,258,269 256,258,270 256,258,271 256,259,260 m 256,259,261 m 256,259,262 m 256,259,263 m 256,259,264 m 256,259,265 m
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-11
Appendix
Table A-4
Alarms from the central unit Logical function Short text (text on LC display) Id-sup BZ07 L3-3 Id-sup BZ08 L3-3 Id-sup BZ09 L3-3 Id-sup BZ10 L3-3 Id-sup BZ11 L3-3 Id-sup BZ12 L3-3 Id-sup BZ Id-sup L1 BZ Id-sup L2 BZ Id-sup L3 BZ Id-sup BZ01 Id-sup BZ02 Id-sup BZ03 Id-sup BZ04 Id-sup BZ05 Id-sup BZ06 Id-sup BZ07 Id-sup BZ08 Id-sup BZ09 Id-sup BZ10 Id-sup BZ11 Id-sup BZ12 15V-superv CU 24V-superv. CU 15V-superv. :BXY 5 V-superv. :BXY 0 V-superv. :BXY Batt. superv. CU Batt.sup.BU :BX Meas in sup.:BXY Flt aut L1 -1:BXY Flt aut L1 -2:BXY Flt aut L1 -3:BXY Flt aut L2 -1:BXY Flt aut L2 -2:BXY Flt aut L2 -3:BXY Flt aut L3 -1:BXY Flt aut L3 -2:BXY Flt aut L3 -3:BXY Req restart :BXY M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M GA No. Relay/ LED No. Alarm characteristic C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G
FNo. Event buffer 246 247 248 249 250 251 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 304 OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE
Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 07 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 08 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 09 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 10 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 11 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: L1 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: L2 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: L3 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 02 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 03 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 04 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 05 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 06 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 07 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 08 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 09 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 10 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 11 (group alarm) Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 (group alarm) 15V supply supervision CU 24V supply supervision CU 15V supply supervision BU 5V supply supervision BU 0V supply supervision BU Battery supervision CU Battery supervision BU Measured value supervision I-SUM Failure in auto. testing: BSZ1 L1 Failure in auto. testing: BSZ2 L1 Failure in auto. testing: BSZ3 L1 Failure in auto. testing: BSZ1 L2 Failure in auto. testing: BSZ2 L2 Failure in auto. testing: BSZ3 L2 Failure in auto. testing: BSZ1 L3 Failure in auto. testing: BSZ2 L3 Failure in auto. testing: BSZ3 L3 Request restart
256,259,266 m 256,259,267 m 256,259,268 m 256,259,269 m 256,259,270 m 256,259,271 m 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 297 297 297 297 297 297 297 297 297 0/14 312 8,8,m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m 4,4,m 4,4,m 4,4,m 4,4,m 4,4,m 4,4 4,4 3,3,m # # # # # # # # # 5,5,m #
C/G C/G C/G+BN C/G+BN C/G+BN C/G C/G+BN C/G+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN
Failure in auto. testing (group alarm) Fault autom. M
A-12
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Table A-4
Alarms from the central unit Logical function Short text (text on LC display) RqChangCTPol :BXY Req.bayOutSe :BXY Req.Mainten. :BXY Req.manTrpL1 :BXY Req.manTrpL2 :BXY Req.manTrpL3 :BXY Req.manTL123 :BXY Request BU M GA No. Relay/ LED No. # # # # # # # m m m m m m m m m m m m Alarm characteristic C+BN C+BN C/G+BN C/G+BN C+BN C+BN C+BN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN C+FN
FNo. Event buffer 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE
Request change of CT polarity Request bay out of service Request maintenance of bay Request manual trip L1 Request manual trip L2 Request manual trip L3 Request manual trip L1 L2 L3 Request bay unit (group alarm)
312 312 312 312 312 312 312 -------------
Transfer trip BZ 01 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ01= zzz Transfer trip BZ 02 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ02= zzz Transfer trip BZ 03 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ03= zzz Transfer trip BZ 04 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ04= zzz Transfer trip BZ 05 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ05= zzz Transfer trip BZ 06 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ06= zzz Transfer trip BZ 07 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ07= zzz Transfer trip BZ 08 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ08= zzz Transfer trip BZ 09 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ09= zzz Transfer trip BZ 10 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ10= zzz Transfer trip BZ 11 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ11= zzz Transfer trip BZ 12 for coup. w/o CB TrTripBZ12= zzz
A.2.1.2
Binary inputs of the central unit

Table A-5 BI FNo. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Allocation of binary input texts to binary inputs Short text >Reset LED >Freeze FltRecBuf >ReleaseFltRecBuf >Reset Id-Block >Reset IsoMalBlck >Reset annuncBuff >Blocking BF >Blocking BZ Trip >ReleaseEF char. >Sync. Date/Time Logical function Reset LED Freeze fault record buffer Release fault record buffer Reset blocking of differential current supervision Reset blocking of isolator malfunction Reset annunciation buffer Blocking of breaker failure protection Blocking of BZ protection (BZ Trip) Release earth fault characteristic Synchronize date and time Allocated to binary input 1 2 -4 5 ----3
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-13
Appendix
A.2.1.3
Group alarms of the central unit

Group alarm Alarm FNo 14 67 149 151 152 153 159 256 278 279 280 283 297 Logical function Bay unit failure BZ trip blocked Failure of isolator aux. voltage Isolator fault: status Isolator fault: run BZ blocked by iso./BU/test fault Diff-current superv.: CZ Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 15V supply supervision BU 5 V supply supervision BU 0 V supply supervision BU Measured value supervision I-SUM Failure in auto.testing Failure of isolator aux. voltage Isolator fault: status Isolator fault: run Diff-current superv.: CZ Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 15V supply supervision CU 24V supply supervision CU Battery supervision CU Battery supervision BU Failure in auto.testing Maintenance of bay Trip command for bus zone 01 L1 ... 59 ... Trip command for bus zone 12 L3 Trip command for bus zone 01 L1 ... 27 ... Trip command for bus zone 12 L1
FNo 0
Description Error with protection blocking
Error without protection blocking
149 151 152 159 256 276 277 281 282 297
15 76
Isolator operation not permitted AUS-Geraet
13 16
77
Trip command L1
16
A-14
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Group alarm FNo 78 Description Trip command L2 32 ... 43 79 Trip command L3 48 ... 59 80 Trip command for bus zone 01 48 49 50 ... 91 ... Trip command for bus zone 12 27 43 59 151 Isolator fault: status 114 118 122 126 130 152 Isolator fault: run 115 119 123 127 131 153 BZ blocked by iso./BU/test fault 132 ... 143 159 Diff-current superv.: CZ 156 157 158 256 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 160 ... 251 ... FNo
Alarm Logical function Trip command for bus zone 01 L2 ... Trip command for bus zone 12 L2 Trip command for bus zone 01 L3 ... Trip command for bus zone 12 L3 Trip command for bus zone 01 L3 Trip command for bus zone 02 L3 Trip command for bus zone 03 L3 ... Trip command for bus zone 12 L1 Trip command for bus zone 12 L2 Trip command for bus zone 12 L3 Isolator1: status fault Isolator2: status fault Isolator3: status fault Isolator4: status fault Isolator5: status fault Isolator1: fault: run time Isolator2: fault: run time Isolator3: fault: run time Isolator4: fault: run time Isolator5: fault: run time Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 01 ... Blocked by iso./BU/test fault: BZ 12 Diff-current supervision: CZ L1 Diff-current supervision: CZ L2 Diff-current supervision: CZ L3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L1 on BSZ2 ... Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L3 on BSZ3
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-15
Appendix
Group alarm FNo 257 Description Diff-curr. sup.: L1 160 ... 219 258 Diff-curr. sup.: L2 176 ... 235 259 Diff-curr. sup.: L3 192 ... 251 260 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 160 176 192 208 224 240 ... 271 ... Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 171 187 203 219 235 251 297 Failure in auto.testing 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 ... FNo
Alarm Logical function Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L1 on BSZ2 ... Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L2 on BSZ2 ... Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L3 on BSZ2 ... Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L3 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L2 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 01 L3 on BSZ3 ... Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L1 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L2 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L3 on BSZ2 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L1 on BSZ3 Diff-curr. sup.: BZ 12 L2 on BSZ3 I-Diff.-berw.: SS 12 L3 on BSZ3 Failure in auto.testing: BSZ 1 L1 Failure in auto.testing: BSZ 2 L1 Failure in auto.testing: BSZ 3 L1 Failure in auto.testing: BSZ 1 L2 Failure in auto.testing: BSZ 2 L2 Failure in auto.testing: BSZ 3 L2 Failure in auto.testing: BSZ 1 L3 Failure in auto.testing: BSZ 2 L3 Failure in auto.testing: BSZ 3 L3
A-16
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Group alarm FNo 312 Description Request bay unit 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 FNo
Alarm Logical function Request restart Request change of CT polarity Request bay out of service Request maintenance of bay Request manual trip L1 Request manual trip L2 Request manual trip L3 Request manual trip L1 L2 L3
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-17
Appendix
A.2.2
A.2.2.1
Annunciations of the bay unit

PC, LC display and binary inputs/outputs . FNo. Op/Ft
Function number of annunciation Operation/Fault annunciation C, C/G: Coming (pick-up)annunciation, Coming (pickup)/Going (drop-off) annunciation M : Measurand Earth fault annunciation I: can be marshalled to binary input O: can be marshalled to binary output (LED, trip/signal relays)
Ear IO
Table A-6 FNo. 3 4 5 11 12 13 14 51 52 56 60 61 62 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 110 111 115 116 120 121
Annunciations of the bay unit Short text >Time Synchro >Start FltRe >LED reset >Annunc. 1 >Annunc. 2 >Annunc. 3 >Annunc. 4 Dev.operative Prot. operat. Initial start LED reset LogMeasBlock Test mode Param.running Param. Set A Param. Set B Param. Set C Param. Set D Wrong SW-vers Wrong dev. ID Annunc. lost Annu. PC lost Flt.Buff.Over E/F Buff.Over Oper.Ann.Inva Flt.Ann.Inval Logical functions >Time synchronization >Start fault recording >Reset LED indicators >User defined annunciation 1 >User defined annunciation 2 >User defined annunciation 3 >User defined annunciation 4 Device operative / healthy Any protection operative Initial start of processor system LED Reset Logging and measuring functions blocked Test mode Parameters are being set Parameter set A is active Parameter set B is active Parameter set C is active Parameter set D is active Wrong software version Wrong device identification Annunciations lost (buffer overflow) Annunciations for PC lost Fault annunciation buffer overflow E/F buffer overflow Operational annunciations invalid Fault annunciations invalid C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C C C C Ear O O C Op St Ear IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO
A-18
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Table A-6 FNo. 122 123 124 129 135 136 137 138 139 143 144 145 150 154 159 161 177 203 204 205 206 244 301 302 303 502 521 522 523 561 601 602 603 604 651 652 653 654 694 1000 1004 1005 1006
Annunciations of the bay unit Short text E/F.Prot Inva Stat.Buff.Inv LED Buff.Inva VDEW-StateInv Chs Error Chs.A Error Chs.B Error Chs.C Error Chs.D Error Failure 15V Failure 5V Failure 0V Failure I/O Fail. TripRel LSA disrupted I supervision Fail.Battery Flt.RecDatDel Flt.Rec.viaBI Flt.Rec.viaKB Flt.Rec.viaPC D Time= Syst.Flt Fault E/F Det. Dev. Drop-off IL1/In= IL2/In= IL3/In= Manual Close IL1[%] = IL2[%] = IL3[%] = IE[%] = IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = IEa = f [Hz] = Trip No= Logical functions Earth fault annunciations invalid Statistic annunciation buffer invalid LED annunciation buffer invalid VDEW state invalid Error in check sum Error in check sum for parameter set A Error in check sum for parameter set B Error in check sum for parameter set C Error in check sum for parameter set D Failure of internal 15 VDC power supply Failure of internal 5 VDC power supply Failure of internal 0 VDC power supply Failure in I/O module Supervision trip circuit LSA (system interface) disrupted Measured value supervision of currents, group al. Failure: Battery Fault recording data deleted Fault recording initiated via bin.input Fault recording initiated via keyboard Fault recording initiated via PC interface Diff. time of clock synchronism Fault in the power system Flt. event w. consecutive no. E/Flt.det. in isol/comp.netw. General drop-off of device Interrupted current: Phase L1(I/In) Interrupted current: Phase L2(I/In) Interrupted current: Phase L3(I/In) Circuit breaker manually closed (pulse) Current in phase IL1 [%] = Current in phase IL2 [%] = Current in phase IL3 [%] = IE[%]= Current in phase IL1 = Current in phase IL2 = Current in phase IL3 = Operational measurement: IEa= Frequency f [Hz] = Number of trip commands issued Summated current tripped IL1/In Summated current tripped IL2/In Summated current tripped IL3/In C M M M M M M M M M M M M M C/G C C C C C/G C C C C M C/G C C Ear Op C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G O O St Ear IO
IL1/In= IL2/In= IL3/In=
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-19
Appendix
Table A-6 FNo. 1015 1016 1017 1156 1174 1181 1401 1402 1451 1453 1455 1471 1701 1702 1711 1712 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1751 1753 1756 1758 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782
Annunciations of the bay unit Short text IL1/In= IL2/In= IL3/In= >CB Test CB in Test CB Test Trip >B/F on >B/F off B/F off B/F active B/F fault B/F Trip >O/C Ph on >O/C Ph off >O/C E on >O/C E off s >I>> block >I> block >Ip block >IE>> block >IE> block >IEp block O/C Ph off O/C Ph active O/C E offs O/C E active O/C Gen.Fault Fault L1 Fault L2 Fault L3 Fault E Fault L1 Fault L1E Fault L2 Fault L2E Fault L12 Fault L12E Fault L3 Fault L3E Fault L13 Fault L13E Fault L23 Fault L23E Logical functions Last trip current L1 IL1/In= Last trip current L2 IL2/In= Last trip current L3 IL3/In= >CB test start Circuit breaker test in progress Circuit breaker test: General trip >Switch on breaker fail protection >Switch off breaker fail protection Breaker fail protection is switched off Breaker failure protection is active Breaker failure : fault detection Trip by breaker failure protection >Switch on O/C protection phase >Switch off O/C protection phase >Switch on overcurrent protection earth >Switch off overcurrent protec. earth >Overcurrent protection:block stage I>> >Overcurrent protection:block stage I> >Overcurrent protection:block stage Ip >Overcurrent protec.: block stage IE>> >Overcurrent protection:block stage IE> >Overcurrent protection:block stage IEp Overcurrent prot. phase is switched off Overcurrent prot. phase is active O/C protection earth is switched off O/C protection earth is active General fault detection O/C O/C fault detection phase L1 O/C fault detection phase L2 O/C fault detection phase L3 O/C fault detection earth O/C fault detection L1 only O/C fault detection L1-E O/C fault detection L2 only O/C fault detection L2-E O/C fault detection L1-L2 O/C fault detection L1-L2-E O/C fault detection L3 only O/C fault detection L3-E O/C fault detection L1-L3 O/C fault detection L1-L3-E O/C fault detection L2-L3 O/C fault detection L2-L3-E C C C C C C C C C C C C C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G IO IO IO IO O O IO O O O O O O C C C/G C/G C IO IO O O O O IO IO IO IO IO Op M M M IO St Ear IO
A-20
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Table A-6 FNo. 1783 1784 1785 1791 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 7601 7602 7603 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612
Annunciations of the bay unit Short text Fault L123 Fault 123E Fault E O/C Gen.Trip I>> Fault I>> Fault L1 I>> Fault L2 I>> Fault L3 T-I>> expired I>> Trip I> Fault I> Fault L1 I> Fault L2 I> Fault L3 T-I> expired I> Trip Ip Fault Ip Fault L1 Ip Fault L3 Ip Fault L3 T-Ip expired Ip Trip IE>> Fault E T-IE>> expir IE>> Trip IE> Fault E T-IE> expired IE> Trip IEp Fault T-IEp expired IEp Trip >Isolator1on >Isolator1off >Isolator2on >Isolator2off >Isolator3on >Isolator3off >Isolator4on >Isolator4off >Isolator5off >Isolator5off >CBF L1 >CBF L2 Logical functions O/C fault detection L1-L2-L3 O/C fault detection L1-L2-L3-E O/C fault detection E only O/C general trip command O/C fault detection stage I>> O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L1 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L2 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L3 O/C time TI>> expired O/C protection I>> phase trip O/C fault detection stage I> O/C fault detection stage I> phase L1 O/C fault detection stage I> phase L2 O/C fault detection stage I> phase L3 O/C time TI> expired O/C protection I> phase trip O/C fault detection Ip O/C fault detection Ip phase L1 O/C fault detection Ip phase L2 O/C fault detection Ip phase L3 O/C time TIp expired O/C protection Ip phase trip O/C fault detection IE>> earth O/C time TIE>> expired O/C protection IE>> earth trip O/C fault detection IE> earth O/C time TIE> expired O/C protection IE> earth trip O/C fault detection IEp earth O/C time TIEp expired O/C protection IEp earth trip >Isolator 1 - position closed >Isolator 1 - position open >Isolator 2 - position closed >Isolator 2 - position open >Isolator 3 - position closed >Isolator 3 - position open >Isolator 4 - position closed >Isolator 4 - position open >Isolator 5 - position closed >Isolator 5 - position open >Circuit breaker failure start phase L1 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L2 C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C C C C C C C C C C C C C Op C C C C C O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO St Ear IO
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-21
Appendix
Table A-6 FNo. 7613 7614 7615 7616 7617 7618 7619 7620 7621 7622 7623 7624 7630 7631 7632 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 7639 7640 7641 7642 7643 7644 7645 7646 7650 7651 7660 7661 7662 7663 7664 7665
Annunciations of the bay unit Short text >CBF L3 >CBF puls >CBF release >TRIP release >CB OFF >CB man.close >CB not ready >Bay o.of ser >CBF 3-pole >CBF rel.3p. >LS ON >Maintenance BB flt.detect BB Trip L123 CBF Trp.rp.3p L123 CBF Trp.rp.L1 CBF Trp.rp.L2 CBF Trp.rp.L3 CB Test L1 CB Test L2 CB Test L3 BB intertrip Bay o.of serv Maintenance CB not plaus. CBF Trip L123 End-Flt. Trip Trip blocked CBF-Prot.bloc Fail Com.CU Param.f.CU IDL1 [%] = IDL2 [%] = IDL3 [%] = ISL1 [%] = ISL2 [%] = ISL3 [%] = Logical functions >Circuit breaker failure start phase L3 >Circuit breaker failure pulse >Circuit breaker failure release >Trip release >Circuit breaker open >Circuit breaker manual close >Circuit breaker not ready >Bay out of service >Circuit breaker failure start 3-pole >Circuit breaker failure release 3-pole >Circuit breaker closed >Maintenance of bay Busbar protection: Fault detected Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L1 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L2 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L3 Busbar protection: Intertrip Bay is out of service Maintenance of bay State of circuit breaker not plausible CBF protection: Trip L123 End fault protection: Trip phase L123 Trip is blocked by Central Unit CBF protection blocked by Central Unit Failure in communication w.Central Unit Receiving parameters from Central Unit CZ: Differential current phase L1 [%] = CZ: Differential current phase L2 [%] = CZ: Differential current phase L3 [%] = CZ: Stabilising current phase L1 [%] = CZ: Stabilising current phase L2 [%] = CZ: Stabilising current phase L3 [%] = C/G C/G C/G C M M M M M M C/G C/G C/G C C Op C C C/G C/G C/G C C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C C C C C C C C C C O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O St Ear IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO
A-22
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
A.2.2.2
Communication interface to control center (LSA) (DIN 19244 and acc. to VDEW/ZVEI) FNo. Op/Ft
Function number of annunciation Operation/Fault annunciation C, C/G: Coming (pick-up)annunciation, Coming (pick-up)/Going (drop-off) annunciation V: Annunciation with Value M: Measurand Number of annunciation for former LSA (DIN 19244) according to VDEW/ZVEI Compatible Annunciation Annunciation for General Interrogation Binary Trace for fault recordings F unction type p= 160: according to the configured Function type Information number
LSA No. CA GI BT Typ Inf
Table A-7 FNo. 11 12 13 14 51 52 55 56 59 60 61 62 63 95 110 112 140 143 144 145 150
Annunciations of the bay unit for communication interface to control center Logical function Ann. Op Ft 24 25 26 27 1 CA 8 6 13 CA CA CA 11 9 10 CA 97 98 99 101 GI GI GI GI GI CA GI GI GI GI p p p 135 p 135 135 p 135 135 135 135 19 20 21 83 22 130 131 47 163 164 165 170 CA CA C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C C C C C/G C/G C/G C/G C C C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G SICAM CA CA CA CA CA GI GI GI GI GI GI VDEW/ZVEI GI BT BT BT BT BT Type p p p p 135 p p p Inf 27 28 29 30 81 18 4 5
>User defined annunciation 1 >User defined annunciation 2 >User defined annunciation 3 >User defined annunciation 4 Device operative / healthy Any protection operative Re-start of processor system Initial start of processor system Real time response to LSA LED Reset Logging and measuring functions blocked Test mode PC operation via system interface Parameters are being set Annunciations lost (buffer overflow) Annunciations for LSA lost General internal failure of device Failure of internal 15 VDC power supply Failure of internal 5 VDC power supply Failure of internal 0 VDC power supply Failure in I/O module
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-23
Appendix
Table A-7 FNo. 154 160 161 301 302 303 501 511 521 522 523 561 601 602 603 604 1174 1181 1451 1453 1455 1471 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1751 1753 1754 1755 1756 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765
Annunciations of the bay unit for communication interface to control center Logical function Ann. Op Ft 100 C/G C/G C/G C/G C C/G C/G C W W W C M M M M C/G C C/G C/G C C C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G CA CA CA CA CA GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI BT GI GI GI CA 142 143 GI GI BT BT 2 SICAM CA CA CA CA GI GI GI VDEW/ZVEI GI BT Type p p p 135 135 135 150 150 150 150 150 150 134 134 134 134 151 151 166 166 166 166 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 p p p p p Inf 36 46 32 231 232 233 151 161 171 172 173 211 125 125 125 125 74 81 151 153 155 171 1 2 3 4 5 6 21 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 84 64 65 66 67
Supervision trip circuit Common alarm Measured value supervision of currents Fault in the power system Flt. event w. consecutive no. /Flt.det. in isol/comp.netw. General fault detection of device General trip of device Interrupted current: Phase L1(I/In) Interrupted current: Phase L2(I/In) Interrupted current: Phase L3(I/In) Circuit breaker manually closed (pulse) Current in phase IL1 [%] = Current in phase IL2 [%] = Current in phase IL3 [%] = IE[%]= Circuit breaker test in progress Circuit breaker test: General trip Breaker fail protection is switched off Breaker failure protection is active Breaker failure : fault detection Trip by breaker failure protection >Overcurrent protection:block stage I>> >Overcurrent protection:block stage I> >Overcurrent protection:block stage Ip >Overcurrent protec.: block stage IE>> >Overcurrent protection:block stage IE> >Overcurrent protection:block stage IEp Overcurrent prot. phase is switched off Overcurrent prot. phase is active O/C protection phase is switched off I> O/C protection phase is switched off Ip O/C protection earth is switched off O/C protection earth is active O/C prot. earth is switched off IE> O/C prot. earth is switched off IEp General fault detection O/C O/C fault detection phase L1 O/C fault detection phase L2 O/C fault detection phase L3 O/C fault detection earth
A-24
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Table A-7 FNo. 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1791 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 7601
Annunciations of the bay unit for communication interface to control center Logical function Ann. Op Ft C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C/G C/G C/G C C C/G C/G C/G C C C/G C/G C/G C C C/G C C C/G C C C/G C C C/G GI CA GI GI GI CA GI GI GI CA GI GI GI CA GI GI GI BT SICAM CA VDEW/ZVEI GI BT Type 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 p 60 60 60 60 p 60 60 60 60 p 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 p 60 60 60 194 Inf 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 68 46 47 48 49 91 50 51 52 53 90 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 92 64 65 66 51
O/C fault detection L1 only O/C fault detection L1-E O/C fault detection L2 only O/C fault detection L2-E O/C fault detection L1-L2 O/C fault detection L1-L2-E O/C fault detection L3 only O/C fault detection L3-E O/C fault detection L1-L3 O/C fault detection L1-L3-E O/C fault detection L2-L3 O/C fault detection L2-L3-E O/C fault detection L1-L2-L3 O/C fault detection L1-L2-L3-E O/C fault detection E only O/C general trip command O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L1 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L2 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L3 O/C time TI>> expired O/C protection I>> phase trip O/C fault detection Ip phase L1 O/C fault detection Ip phase L2 O/C fault detection Ip phase L3 O/C time TI>> expired O/C protection I> phase trip O/C fault detection Ip phase L1 O/C fault detection Ip phase L2 O/C fault detection Ip phase L3 O/C time TIp expired O/C protection Ip phase trip O/C fault detection IE>> earth O/C time TIE>> expired O/C protection IE>> earth trip O/C fault detection IE> earth O/C time TIE> expired O/C protection IE> earth trip O/C fault detection IEp earth O/C time TIEp expired O/C protection IEp earth trip > Isolator 1 - position closed
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-25
Appendix
Table A-7 FNo. 7602 7603 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 7614 7615 7616 7617 7618 7619 7620 7621 7622 7623 7624 7630 7631 7632 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 7639 7640 7641 7642 7643 7644 7645 7646 7650
Annunciations of the bay unit for communication interface to control center Logical function Ann. Op Ft C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C/G C C C C C C C/G C C/G C/G C C C/G C/G C/G C C C C C C C C C C/G C/G C/G C C C/G C/G C/G GI GI GI GI GI GI BT BT GI GI BT BT BT BT BT GI GI BT BT BT GI BT BT SICAM CA GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI BT BT BT BT BT VDEW/ZVEI GI BT Type 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 194 Inf 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 90 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 120 123 124 125 126 127 128 121
>Isolator 1 - position open >Isolator 2 - position closed >Isolator 2 - position open >Isolator 3 - position closed >Isolator 3 - position open >Isolator 4 - position closed >Isolator 4 - position open >Isolator 5 - position closed >Isolator 5 - position open >Circuit breaker failure start phase L1 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L2 >Circuit breaker failure start phase L3 >Circuit breaker failure pulse >Circuit breaker failure release >Trip release >Circuit breaker open >Circuit breaker manual close >Circuit breaker not ready >Bay out of service >Circuit breaker failure start 3-pole >Circuit breaker failure release 3-pole >Circuit breaker closed >Maintenance of bay Busbar protection: Fault detected Busbar protection: Trip in phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L123 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L1 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L2 CBF protection: Trip repeat phase L3 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L1 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L2 Circuit breaker test: Trip phase L3 Busbar protection: Intertrip Bay is out of service Maintenance of bay State of circuit breaker not plausible CBF protection: Trip L123 End fault protection: Trip phase L123 Trip is blocked by Central Unit CBF protection blocked by Central Unit Failure in communication w.Central Unit
A-26
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Table A-7 FNo. 7643 7644 7645 7646 7650 7651 7660 7661 7662 7663 7664 7665
Annunciations of the bay unit for communication interface to control center Logical function Ann. Op Ft C C C/G C/G C/G C M M M M M M GI GI GI SICAM CA VDEW/ZVEI GI BT BT BT BT Type 194 194 194 194 194 194 134 134 134 134 134 134 Inf 125 126 127 128 121 122 125 125 125 125 125 125
CBF protection: Trip L123 End fault protection: Trip phase L123 Trip is blocked by Central Unit CBF protection blocked by Central Unit Failure in communication w.Central Unit Receiving parameters from Central Unit CZ: Differential current phase L1 [%] = CZ: Differential current phase L2 [%] = CZ: Differential current phase L3 [%] = CZ: Stabilising current phase L1 [%] = CZ: Stabilising current phase L2 [%] = CZ: Stabilising current phase L3 [%] =
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-27
Appendix
A.3
A.3.1
Tabular overview of direct addresses - Central unit

System and design data
4900 DESIGN DATA: BB-Configurat. ?
1
Global design data
4901 BB/BZorAuxZ =BZ01/BZ01(min. 0 - max. 4.24) 2 0 non existent, 1-4.01-12 BB01..BB04/BZ01..BZ12, 1-4.13-24 BZ01..BZ04/AB01..AB12) 4902 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4903 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4904 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4905 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4906 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4907 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4908 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4909 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4910 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4911 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4912 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4913 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4914 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4915 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4916 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4917 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4918 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4919 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4920 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4921 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4922 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4923 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent 4924 BB/BZorAuxZ =non existent
1. '$ are evaluated only by DIGSI 2. BB = Busbar no. 01 - 04 BZ = Bus zone no. 01 - 12 AB = Auxiliary bus (bus coupler) section no. 13 - 24
A-28
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Bus-related design data
0100 DESIGN DATA: Config. Bay 01? 0101 TYPE :B01 =feeder bay (section-isolat, bus-coup (2Bay), feeder bay, bus-coup (1Bay) (min. 0.0 - max. 99.9) (existent, non existent) (bus side, line side, non existent) (bus side, line side) (min. 0.001 - max. 1.000) (min. 000.00 - max. 123.24) *1) 0 non existent, 1 ... 12 on BZ01 ... BZ12, 13 ...24 on AB01 ... AB12, 1.2...23.24 on BZ01/BZ02...AB11/AB12 101...124 on BZ01 ON... ...AB12 ON 101.2 ... on BZ01/BZ02ON ... 123.24 on AB11/AB12ON (same as for BB-ISO1) (same as for BB-ISO1) (same as for BB-ISO1) 2 (same as for BB-ISO1, additionally B = outgoing isolator) (out of service, in service, maintenance) (min. 0.00 - max. 25.00)
0102 DESIGNA:B01 =1.0 0103 BAY STA:B01 =existent 0104 CT LOC:B01 =line side 0105 CT POL:B01 =line side 0106 CT NORM:B01 =.001 0107 BB-ISO1:B01 =on BZ01
0108 0109 0110 0111
BB-ISO2:B01 BB-ISO3:B01 BB-ISO4:B01 BB-ISO5:B01
=non =non =non =non
existent existent existent existent
0112 Status :B01 =in service 0113 I>TRIP :B01 =.00 I/IN
3
0114 BFBIMOD:B01 =1-chanelWithSup 0115
0116 0117 0118 0119 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 0125 0126
(1-chanel no Sup, 1-chanelWithSup 2-chanel no Sup, 2-chanelWithSup) BFOPMOD:B01 =BZ unbalance (non existent, external, BZ unbalance, trip rep/unbal, I>query, trip rep/I>quer) 0116 BF I<:B01 =non existent (non existent, existent) TRIPREP:B01 =single-phase (single-phase, three-phase) I>BF :B01 =.50 I/IN 3 (min. 0.10 - max. 2.00) I>BF-EF:B01 =.25 I/IN 3 (min. 0.05 - max. 2.00) T-BF-1P:B01 =.25 s (min. 0.05 - max. 10.00) T-BF-3P:B01 =.25 s (min. 0.05 - max. 10.00) T-BF I<:B01 =.25 s (min. 0.05 - max. 10.00) T-BFIMP:B01 =.50 s (min. 0.05 - max. 10.00) T-CBFAU:B01 =.10 s (min. 0.00 - max. 10.00) T-TRREP:B01 =.12 s (min. 0.00 - max. 10.00) T-CBOPE:B01 =.00 s (min. 0.00 - max. 10.00)
1. For a feeder of the type bus coup (1Bay) the settings mean: 0 = non existent L1 ... L12 on BZ01 CL ... BZ12 CL means left-hand side of coupler; L13 ...L24 on AB01 CL ... BZ12 CL means left-hand side of coupler; R1 ... R12 on BZ01 CR ... BZ12 CR means right-hand side of coupler; R13 ...R24 on AB01 CR ... AB12 CR means right-hand side of coupler; 1.2...23.24 on BZ01/BZ02...AB11/AB12; L101...L124 on BZ01 ON CL... ...AB12 ON CL means left-hand side of coupler; R101...R124 on BZ01 ON... ...AB12ON means right-hand side of coupler; 101.2 ... 123.24 on BZ01/BZ02ON...on AB11/AB12ON 2. Function of isolator 4 depends on the setting of '$ =( 3. IN - Nominal current of the bay current transformer
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-29
Appendix
0127 T-BFMCI:B01 =15.00 s 0128 T-BFFCI:B01 =.06 s 0129 ENDFLTP:B01 =inactive
(min. 0.02 - max. (min. 0.06 - max. (inactive, active)
15.00) 1.00)
0200 ... 4800
--- see 0100
System data
5000 CHANGE
5100 SYST.DATA: 5101 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 5107
SYST/DESGN DATA? System state ? (blocked, released) (blocked, released) (blocked, released) (50 Hz, 60 Hz) 1 (min. 0.20 - max. (min. 0.10 - max. (min. 0.50 - max.
REBOOT =blocked FAULT REACT =released AUT LED ACK =blocked FRECUENCY =50 Hz I>SUM SUPV =.50 I/IN OFFS SUP BU =.10 V 15 V SUP BU =1.50 V
1.00) .50) 2.50)
5200 SYST.DATA: Serial link ? 5201 TERMBAUD CU =19200 Baud
(min.
1.200 - max.
38400)
5300 DESGN DATA: Rel/BI realloc.? Enter the MONITOR function
(Enter Y)
5400 DESGN DATA: Common configur? 5401 PROT TR BUS =blocked 5402 BB-ISOLAT 4 =BB-Isolator
(blocked, released) (BB-Isolator, TR-Isolator, COTR-Isolator)
1. IN - Nominal current of the bay current transformer
A-30
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
A.3.2
Parameters
6000 CHANGE 6100 SETTINGS: 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 SETTINGS ? BB-Diff.Protec ? (min.
1
Global parameters
STAB FAC:BZ =.65 I>DIFF :BZ STAB FAC:CZ I>DIFF :CZ NORM BAS IN TRminDURATI BI TRIPENAB I<STA-EF:SS I>DIF-EF:SS I<STA-EF:CZ I>DIF-EF:CZ =1.00 I/Ino ) =.50 =1.00 I/Ino 1 =1000.0 A 2 =.10 s =non existent =.00 I/Ino 1 =.25 I/Ino 1 =.00 I/Ino 1 =.25 I/Ino 1
0.10 - max.
0.80)
(min. 0.20 - max. 4.00) (min. 0.00 - max. 0.80) (min. 0.20 - max. 4.00) (min. 20.00 - max. 6000.00) (min. 0.02 - max. 1.00) (non existent, existent) (min. 0.00 - max. 25.00) (min. 0.05 - max. 4.00) (min. 0.00 - max. 25.00) (min. 0.05 - max. 4.00)
6200
SETTINGS:
Bkr.Fail Protec?
(min. (min. 0.00 - max. 0.00 - max. 0.80) 25.00)
6201 STAB FAC:BF =.50 6202 I<STA-EF:BF =.00
I/In 3
6300
6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310 6311 6312
SETTINGS:
Supervision
ISO TRA TIM =7.00 s ISO MAL RES =alarm only BAY DC FAIL ISOL ST 1/1 BLOCKING DIFF SUPERV T-DIFF SUPV I>SUPERV:BZ I>SUPERV:CZ DIFF SUP BZ
(min. 1.00 - max. 180.00) (alarm only, blockAutoReleas, block storage, blockStor/rel.) =OLD isol status (OLD isol status,isol CLOSED) =OLD isol status (OLD isol status,isol CLOSED) =block BZ 5 (block BZ, block Protec.) =active (inactive, active) =2 s (min. 1 - max. 10 ) =.10 I/Ino 1 (min. 0.05 - max. 0.80) =.10 I/Ino 1 (min. 0.05 - max. 0.80) = blockAutoReleas(alarm only, blockAutoReleas, block storage)
4
DIFF SUP CZ =alarm only ZERO CR SUP =active
(alarm only, blockAutoReleas, block storage) (inactive, active)
1. Ino - Normalized nominal current referred to the base CT (CT with the highest transformation ratio) 2. Nominal current of the base CT 3. In - Nominal current of the bay CT 4. For runtime, status fault and auxiliary voltage supervision 5. This setting affects the following blockings: '$ (blocking on isolator malfunction), '$ (blocking on pickup of CBF), blocking due to BU failure, blocking due to measured value fault (measured value fault is set in the BU) upon fault detection in '$ to '$ (measured value supervision, offset supervision and 15 V voltage supervision)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-31
Appendix
6313 6314 6315 6316 6317 6318 6319
I> ZERO CR AUTO TEST TEST FAULT I< MAN TRIP
=.50 I/Ino 1 (min. 0.15 - max. 4.00) =active (inactive, active) =alarm only (alarm only, block protect.) =.05 I/IN 2 (min. 0.00 - max. 0.50) (1x0.4 s, auto, 2x0.4s, man, 1x0.8 s, man) 3 (blocked, released) 4 (non existent, existent)
FLTREC RELE =1x0.4 s, auto CONTRREL BU =released BATTERY CU =existent
1. 2. 3.
Ino - Normalized nominal current referred to the base CT IN - Nominal current of the base CT Two fault recording buffers of 400 ms each are available (100 ms before and 300 ms after the fault). [ V DXWR: At the end of each fault, fault recording is switched automatically to the other buffer. Any fault that is still stored there is overwritten. [ V PDQ: After recording two faults, the fault recording function is blocked until it is released again by the control '$ . Both buffers are released, regardless of their content. [ V PDQ: After recording one faults with a duration of 0.8 s, the fault recording function is blocked until it is released again by the control '$ . 4. Release fo the bay unit control refers to the settings ED\ RXW RI VHUYLFH and 0DLQWHQDQFH
A-32
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
A.3.3
Annunciations
7000 READOUT ANNUNCIATIONS ?
Operational events
7100 ANNUNC:
Operational
19.10.00 10:05:28,00 19.10.00 10:05:26,42 19.10.00 09:59:14,62 19.10.00 09:59:14,62 19.10.00 09:59:14,62 19.10.00 09:58:20,62 19.10.00 09:58:04,62 19.10.00 09:58:04,62 19.10.00 09:58:04,62 19.10.00 09:57:57,42 19.10.00 09:57:57,42 19.10.00 09:57:57,42 19.10.00 09:57:57,42 19.10.00 09:57:57,00 End of annuncBuf
RESTART AFT CONF CONFIGURATION BZ 03 blocked BZ 02 blocked Isol 2 OFF:B04 Isol 3 ON:B04 Err: PROT BLOCK BZ 02 blocked Isol 3FltRun:B04 Batt.sup.BU :B08 Batt.sup.BU :B07 Batt.sup.BU :B04 Batt.sup.BU :B02 VOLTAGE FAIL
:C :C :C :G :C :C :C :C :C :C :C :C :C :C
7200 ANNUNC:
Fault indicat. ? 2
19.10.00 11:45:05,42 Transf. Trip:B10 :C 19.10.00 11:45:05,22 TrpBZ04 L1= 1 :C End of annuncBuf
7300 ANNUNC:
7301 Bay 7302 7303 7304 7305 Bay Bay Bay Bay . . . 7344 7345 7346 7347 Bay Bay Bay Bay 44 45 46 47 =not =not =not =not
Isolator replic? 01 =on BZ1 02 03 04 05 =on =on =on =on BZ02 BZ02 BZ03 BZ05 (on BZ01...on BZ12, 3 on AB01...on AB12)
connected connected connected connected
(on BZ01/BZ02...on AB11+AB12) 4
1. 2. 3. 4.
Length of operational events buffer = 99 entries Length of fault events buffer = 40 entries Only bays that have been configured are output (max. 48: '$ ) To be stated for 1-bay bus couplers
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-33
Appendix
7348 7349 7350 7351 7352
7369 7370 7371 7372
Bay 48 =not connected 7349 Sect. isol. =not connected(on BZ01/BZ02...on AB11/AB12) 1 Sect. isol. =open Sect. isol. =open Sect. isol. =open . . . Sect. isol. =open Sect. isol. =open Sect. isol. =open Sect. isol. =open
Commissioning measured values
7400 ANNUNC:
7401 7402 7403 7404 7405 7406 Id Is Id Is Id Is CZ CZ CZ CZ CZ CZ L1 L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 = = = = = =
DI/ST curr CZ
0 0 0 0 0 0 % % % % % % I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino
2 2 2 2 2 2
7500 ANNUNC:
7501 7502 7503 7504 7505 7506 Id Is Id Is Id Is BZ01 BZ01 BZ01 BZ01 BZ01 BZ01
DI/ST curr BSZ2?

0 0 0 0 0 0 % % % % % % I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino
2 2 2 2 2 2
7567 7568 7569 7570 7571 7572
Id Is Id Is Id Is
BZ12 BZ12 BZ12 BZ12 BZ12 BZ12
L1-2 = L1-2 = L2-2 = L2-2 = L3-2 = L3-2 = . . . L1-2 = L1-2 = L2-2 = L2-2 = L3-2 = L3-2 =
0 0 0 0 0 0
% % % % % %
I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino
2 2 2 2 2 2
7600 ANNUNC:
DI/ST curr BSZ3?

0 0 0 % I/Ino 2 % I/Ino 2 % I/Ino 2
7601 Id BZ01 L1-3 = 7602 Is BZ01 L1-3 = 7603 Id BZ01 L2-3 =
1. Output of isolators that have been configured as section isolators (sectionalizers) in bays of the types "feeder bay" or "bus coupler", and of section isolators in bays that have been configured as "sectionalizers" (max. 24 sec.isol.: '$ ). For the output the bays are scanned in ascending order for section isolators, starting with bay no.1/isolator 1. 2. Ino - Normalized nominal current related to base current transformer (transformer with the highest transformation ratio)
A-34
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
7604 Is BZ01 L2-3 = 7605 Id BZ01 L3-3 = 7606 Is BZ01 L3-3 = . . . 7667 Id BZ12 L1-3 = 7668 Is BZ12 L1-3 = 7669 Id BZ12 L2-3 = 7670 Is BZ12 L2-3 = 7671 Id BZ12 L3-3 = 7672 Is BZ12 L3-3 =
0 0 0
% I/Ino 1 % I/Ino 1 % I/Ino 1
0 0 0 0 0 0
% % % % % %
I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino I/Ino
1 1 1 1 1 1
Fault recording
7700 ANNUNC:
7701 7702 7703 7704 7705 7706 7707 7708 7709 7710 7711 7712 7713 7714 7715 7716 7717 7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 7725 7726 7727 7728 7729 FAULT REC. FAULT REC. STOERSCHR. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC. FAULT REC.
Fault record
I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay I-Bay Id/Is Id/Is Id/Is Id/Is Id/Is Id/Is Id/Is Id/Is Id/Is Id/Is Id/Is Id/Is Id/Is
?
2
01-03 ? (inp. */# -> outp. in INT/HEX) 04-06 ? 07-09 ? 10-12 ? 13-15 ? 16-18 ? 19-21 ? 22-24 ? 25-27 ? 28-30 ? 31-33 ? 34-36 ? 37-39 ? 40-42 ? 43-45 ? 46-48 ? Bus Z 01? Bus Z 02? Bus Z 03? Bus Z 04? Bus Z 05? Bus Z 06? Bus Z 07? Bus Z 08? Bus Z 09? Bus Z 10? Bus Z 11? Bus Z 12? CZ ?
1. Ino - Normalized nominal current related to base current transformer (transformer with the highest transformation ratio) 2. Integer output: output only on PC (not with DIGSI; output by shortcut "*" = 2AH HEX output: output with DIGSI (output of block '$ by shortcut "#" = 23H)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-35
Appendix
7800 ANNUNC: I Bay No.

I Bay No. ?
Bay currents
(Enter "Yes")
= 4 04 = 31 31
(Enter 4) (Press Enter) 30 %I/IN 1
A.3.4
Controls
Control / test
8000 CONTROL / TEST ?
8100 TEST: AUTO TESTING Tests 8200 TEST: AN TRIP BAY.PH?
Auto testing
? 2 (Enter Y)
=Cycl test runni! Manual trip ? 3 (Enter Y)
(Enter 4.2) = 4.2 (Press Enter) bay in service ! Manual trip 0420 ?
8200 TEST: Direct address:
0420 STATUS B 04 =active inactive 0420 STATUS B 04 =inactive ---> SETTINGS SETTINGS: - CHANGES COMPL. ?
(Enter N) (bay 4 inactive)
= executed 8200 Manual trip ?(Enter Y) (Enter 4.2) (Press 'Enter') (Enter Y)
Direct address: 8200 8200 TEST: MAN TRIP BAY.PH?
= 4.2 MAN TRIP BAY.PH? = 04.L2 ? MANUAL TRIP = executed ! 8200 TEST: MAN TRIP BAY.PH? = 4 MAN TRIP BAY.PH? = 04.L1L2L3 MANUAL TRIP = executed ! MAN TRIP BAY.PH?bei N Manual trip ?
(Enter Y) (Enter 4) (Press 'Enter') (Enter Y/N) if Y entered
1. Output per phase in the order: L1, L2, L3 2. Automatic testing only possible if $872 7(67 '$ =( is LQDFWLYH 3. Manual trip of CB only possible with bay out of service and bay current < current limit ,0$1 75,3 '$ =(
A-36
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
8300 CONTROL:
ReleasFltRecBuf? 1
(Enter Y)
RELS FLT REC BUF = executed !
8400 CONTROL:
FreezeFltRecBuf?
(Enter Y)
FREEZFLT REC BUF = executed !
8500 CONTROL:
ReleasBloDifSup?
(Enter Y)(Release blocking by pickup of the diff-current supervision ?)
RELS BLO DIF SUP = executed !
8600 CONTROL:
ReleasBloIsoMal?
(Enter Y)(Release blocking by detection of isolator fault (runtime, status, supply voltage failure)?
RELS BLO CB MALF = executed !
8700 CONTROL:
Reset annun buf? 2 (Enter Y) (Applies for operational and fault events)
RESET ANNUNC BUF = executed !
8800 CONTROL:
Blocking
(Block BZ trip / BF)
8801 CONTROL:
BLOCK BZ TRIP =
BLOCK BZ TRIP ? executed !
(Enter Y)
8802 CONTROL:
RELEASE BZ TRIP =
RELEASE BZ TRP? executed !
(Enter Y)
8803 CONTROL:
BLOCK BF =
BLOCK
BF
(Enter Y)
executed !
8804 CONTROL:
RELEASE BF =
RELEASE BF executed !
(Enter Y)
1. If two fault record buffers are frozen, both will be released simultaneously. 2. Applies for operational events and fault events
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-37
Appendix
A.3.5
Date and time

9000 DATE/TIME
(Displays current date and time)
01.04.2010 05:14:24 9002 Date 13.01.2014 = 20.10.2000 9002 Date
(Set date by entering digits and dots)
NOT AUTHORIZED !
Enter Password: @@@ Passw. accepted 9002 Date 13.01.2014 = 20.10.2000 9002 Date Input accepted 9003 Time 05:15:04 = 16.47.23 9003 Time Input accepted 20.10.2000 16:47:29 (Enter password) (Set date by entering digits and dots)
(Set time by entering digits and dots)
A-38
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
A.4
A.4.1
Tabular overview of direct addresses - Bay unit

Parameters of the 7SS521
1000 PARAMETERS
Parameters Power system data
1100 POWERSYSTEM DATA

1101 CT STARPNT TOWARDS LINE TOWARDS BUSBAR 1141 T TRIP min. 0.01 max. 32.00 Current transformer polarity [ ] Towards line [ ] Towards busbar Minimum trip command duration s ----
O/C protection for phase faults
1200 O/C PROT. PHASES 1201 O/C PHASES O/C protection for phase faults ON [ ] on OFF [ ] off 1202 I>> Pick-up value of the high-set stage I>> min. 0.05 I/In max. 25.00 ---1203 T-I>> Trip time delay of the high-set stage I>> min. 0.00 s max. 60.00/ ---1206 MEAS.REPET Measurement repetition NO [ ] no YES [ ] yes 1211 CHARACTER. Characteristic of the O/C stage Ip NORMAL INVERSE [ ] Normal inverse VERY INVERSE [ ] Very inverse EXTREMELY INVERS [ ] Extremely inverse 1212 I> Pick-up value of the overcurrent stage I> min. 0.05 I/In max. 25.00 ---1213 T-I> Trip time delay of the overcurrent stage I> min. 0.00 s max. 60.00/ ---1214 Ip Pick-up value inverse time O/C stage Ip min. 0.10 I/In max. 4.00 ---1215 T-Ip Trip time delay inverse time O/C stage Ip min. 0.00 s max. 10.00/ ---1216 RMS FORMAT RMS format for inverse time O/C protection FUNDAMENTAL [ ] Fundamental TRUE RMS [ ] True rms 1221 MAN.CLOSE Manual close I>> UNDELAYED [ ] I>> undelayed I>/Ip UNDELAYED [ ] I>/Ip undelayed INEFFECTIVE [ ] Ineffective
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-39
Appendix
O/C protection for earth faults
1500 O/C PROT. EARTH

1501 O/C EARTH O/C protection for earth faults ON [ ] on OFF [ ] off 1502 IE>> Pick-up value of the high-set stage IE>> min. 0.05 I/In max. 25.00 ---1503 T-IE>> Trip time delay of the high-set stage IE>> min. 0.00 s max. 60.00/ ---1506 MEAS.REPET Measurement repetition NO [ ] no YES [ ] yes 1511 CHARACTER. Characteristic of the O/C stage IEp NORMAL INVERSE [ ] Normal inverse VERY INVERSE [ ] Very inverse EXTREMELY INVERS [ ] Extremely inverse 1512 IE> Pick-up value of the overcurrent stage IE> min. 0.05 I/In max. 25.00 ---1513 T-IE> Trip time delay of the overcurrent stage IE> min. 0.00 s max. 60.00/ ---1514 IEp Pick-up value inverse time O/C stage IEp min. 0.10 I/In xmax. 4.00 ---1515 T-IEp Trip time delay inverse time O/C stage IEp min. 0.00 s max. 10.00/ ---1516 RMS FORMAT RMS format for inverse time O/C protection FUNDAMENTAL [ ] Fundamental TRUE RMS [ ] True rms 1521 MAN.CLOSE Manual close IE>> UNDELAYED [ ] IE>> undelayed IE>/IEp UNDELAY. [ ] IE>/IEp undelayed INEFFECTIVE [ ] Ineffective
Delay times
2800 DELAYTIMES ANNUNCIATIONS

2801 T-Annunc.1 min. 0.00 max. 10.00 2802 T-Annunc.2 min. 0.00 max. 10.00 2803 T-Annunc.3 min. 0.00 max. 10.00 2804 T-Annunc.4 min. 0.00 max. 10.00 Delay s ---Delay s ---Delay s ---Delay s ---time for 1st user defined annunciation
time for 2nd user defined annunciation
time for 3rd user defined annunciation
time for 4th user defined annunciation
A-40
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
3900 BREAKER FAILURE PROTEC.

3901 B/F PROT. OFF ON 3911 I> B/F min. 0.10 max. 4.00 3912 T-B/F min. 0.06 max. 60.00/ Circuit breaker failure protection [ ] off [ ] on Pick-up threshold of current detector I>B/F I/In ---Delay time T-B/F s ----
A.4.2
Tests CB trip
Tests and Commissioning Aids 7SS521

4000 TESTS
4400 CB TEST LIVE TRIP 4401 4402 4403 4404 CB CB CB CB TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit breaker breaker breaker breaker trip trip trip trip test test test test 1pole L1 1pole L2 1pole L3 3pole
Communication with CU
4500 COMMUNICATI ON CENTRAL UNIT

4501 Com. CU 4502 Com. CU 4503 Com. CU Switching bay out of service Switching bay in service Switching bay in maintenance
Fault recording
4900 TEST FAULT RECORDING

4901 FAULT REC. Initiation of fault recording
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-41
Appendix
A.4.3
Addresses for annunciations and measured values of the 7SS521

5000 ANNUNCIATIONS
Annunciations
5100 OPERATIONAL ANNUNCIATIONS
5200 LAST FAULT
5300 2nd TO LAST FAULT
5400 3rd TO LAST FAULT CB operating statistics 5600 CB OPERAT. STATISTICS

5604 Trip No = 5607 IL1/In= 5608 IL2/In= 5609 IL3/In= 5610 Il1/In= 5611 IL2/In= 5612 IL3/In Number of trip commands issued Summated current tripped IL1/In Summated current tripped IL2/In Summated current tripped IL3/In Last trip current L1 IL1/In= Last trip current L2 IL2/In= Last trip current L3 IL3/In=
Operational measured values
5700 OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES

5701 IL1[%] = 5702 IL2[%] = 5703 IL3[%] = 5704 IE[%]= 5705 IL1 = 5706 IL2 = 5707 IL3 = 5708 IEa = 5709 IDL1[%]= 5710 IDL2[%]= 5711 IDL3[%]= 5712 ISL1[%]= 5713 ISL2[%]= 5714 ISL3[%]= 5715 f [Hz]= Current in phase IL1 [%] = Current in phase IL2 [%] = Current in phase IL3 [%] = IE[%]= Current in phase IL1 = Current in phase IL2 = Current in phase IL3 = Operational measurement: IEa= CZ: Differential current phase L1 [%] = CZ: Differential current phase L2 [%] = CZ: Differential current phase L3 [%] = CZ: Stabilising current phase L1 [%] = CZ: Stabilising current phase L2 [%] = CZ: Stabilising current phase L3 [%] = Frequency f [Hz] =
A-42
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
A.4.4
Marshalling of the 7SS521

6000 MARSHALLING 6100 MARSHALLING BINARY INPUTS
6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY BINARY INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary Binary input input input input input input input input input input input input input input input input input input input input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Marshalling Binary inputs
Signal relays
6200 MARSHALLING SIGNAL RELAYS

6201 SIGNAL RELAY 1 Signal relay 1
LED indicators
6300 MARSHALLING LED INDICATORS

6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310 6311 6312 6313 6314 6315 6316 LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-43
Appendix
Trip relays
6400 MARSHALLING TRIP RELAYS

6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY 1 2 3 4 5 Trip Trip Trip Trip Trip relay relay relay relay relay 1 2 3 4 5
A.4.5
Configuration of the 7SS521

7000 OP. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Configuration
7100 INTEGRATED OPERATION

7101 LANGUAGE ENGLISH DEUTSCH 7120 OPER.1st L. IL1 IL2 IL3 IE I-DIFF. L1 I-DIFF. L2 I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1 I-RESTR. L2 I-RESTR. L3 7121 OPER.1st L. SECONDARY PRIMARY 7122 OPER.2nd L. IL2 IL3 IE I-DIFF. L1 I-DIFF. L2 I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1 I-RESTR. L2 I-RESTR. L3 IL1 7123 OPER.2nd L. SECONDARY PRIMARY 7124 OPER.3rd L. IL3 IE Language [ ] English [ ] German Measured value in 1st display line [ ] Current in phase L1 [ ] Current in phase L2 [ ] Current in phase L3 [ ] Earth current IE [ ] Diff. current in L1 [ ] Diff. current in L2 [ ] Diff. current in L3 [ ] Restr. current in L1 [ ] Restr. current in L2 [ ] Restr. current in L3 Measured value in 1st display line [ ] secondary [ ] primary Measured value in 2nd display line Current in phase L2 Current in phase L3 Earth current IE Diff. current in L1 Diff. current in L2 Diff. current in L3 Restr. current in L1 Restr. current in L2 Restr. current in L3 Current in phase L1
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [
] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
Measured value in 2nd display line [ ] secondary [ ] primary Measured value in 3rd display line [ ] Current in phase L3 [ ] Earth current IE
A-44
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
I-DIFF. L1 I-DIFF. L2 I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1 7125 OPER.3rd L. SECONDARY PRIMARY 7126 OPER.4th L. IE I-DIFF. L1 I-DIFF. L2 I-DIFF. L3 I-RESTR. L1 I-RESTR. L2 I-RESTR. L3 IL1 IL2 IL3 7127 OPER.4th L. SECONDARY PRIMARY
[ [ [ [
] ] ] ]
Diff. current in L1 Diff. current in L2 Diff. current in L3 Restr. current in L1
Measured value in 3rd display line [ ] secondary [ ] primary Measured value in 4th display line Earth current IE Diff. current in L1 Diff. current in L2 Diff. current in L3 Restr. current in L1 Restr. current in L2 Restr. current in L3 Current in phase L1 Current in phase L2 Current in phase L3
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [
] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
Measured value in 4th display line [ ] secondary [ ] primary
PC and system interfaces
7200 PC/SYSTEM INTERFACES

7201 DEVICE ADD. min. 1 max. 254 7202 FEEDER ADD. min. 1 max. 254 7203 SUBST. ADD. min. 1 max. 254 7208 FUNCT. TYPE min. 1 max. 254 7209 DEVICE TYPE min. 0 max. 255 7211 PC INTERF. DIGSI V3 ASCII 7215 PC BAUDRATE 9600 BAUD 19200 BAUD 1200 BAUD 2400 BAUD 4800 BAUD 7216 PC PARITY DIGSI V3 NO 2 STOP NO 1 STOP Device address ---Feeder address ---Substation address ---Function type in accordance with VDEW/ZVEI ---Device type ---Data format for PC-interface [ ] DIGSI V3 [ ] ASCII Transmission baud rate for PC-interface [ ] 9600 Baud [ ] 19200 Baud [ ] 1200 Baud [ ] 2400 Baud [ ] 4800 Baud Parity and stop-bits for PC-interface [ ] DIGSI V3 [ ] No parity,2 stopbits [ ] No parity,1 stopbit
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-45
Appendix
7221 SYS INTERF. Data format for system-interface VDEW COMPATIBLE [ ] VDEW compatible VDEW EXTENDED [ ] VDEW extended DIGSI V3 [ ] DIGSI V3 7222 SYS MEASUR. Measurement format for system-interface VDEW COMPATIBLE [ ] VDEW compatible VDEW EXTENDED [ ] VDEW extended 7224 SYS GAPS Transmission gaps for system-interface min. 0.0 s max. 5.0 ---7225 SYS BAUDR. Transmission baud rate for system-interface 9600 BAUD [ ] 9600 Baud 19200 BAUD [ ] 19200 Baud 1200 BAUD [ ] 1200 Baud 2400 BAUD [ ] 2400 Baud 4800 BAUD [ ] 4800 Baud 7227 SYS-SWITCH Online-switch VDEW-DIGSI enabled NO [ ] no YES [ ] yes 7235 SYS PARAMET Parameterizing via system-interface NO [ ] no YES [ ] yes
Fault recordings
7400 FAULT RECORDINGS

7402 INITIATION STORAGE BY FD. STORAGE BY TRIP START WITH TRIP 7410 T-MAX min. 0.30 max. 5.00 7411 T-PRE min. 0.05 max. 0.50 7412 T-POST min. 0.05 max. 0.50 7431 T-BINARY IN min. 0.10 max. 5.00/ 7432 T-KEYBOARD min. 0.10 max. 5.00 Initiation of data storage [ ] Storage by fault det [ ] Storage by trip [ ] Start with trip Maximum time period of a fault recording s ---Pre-trigger time for fault recording s ---Post-fault time for fault recording s ---Storage time by initiation via binary input s ---Storage time by initiation via keyboard s ----
Scope of functions
7800 SCOPE OF FUNCTIONS

7812 CHARAC. PH DEFINITE TIME INVERSE TIME Characteristic O/C protection phases [ ] Definite time [ ] Inverse time
A-46
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
7815 CHARAC. E DEFINITE TIME INVERSE TIME 7899 FREQUENCY fN 50 Hz fN 60 Hz
Characteristic O/C protection earth [ ] Definite time [ ] Inverse time Rated system frequency [ ] fN 50 Hz [ ] fN 60 Hz
A.4.6
Operational Device Control Facilities 7SS521

8000 DEVICE CONTROL 8100 SETTING REAL TIME CLOCK
8101 DATE / TIME 8102 DATE 8103 TIME Actual date and time Setting new date Setting new time
Device control Real time clock
Reset
8200 RESET
8201 8202 8203 8204 8205 RESET RESET RESET RESET RESET Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset of of of of of LED memories operational annunciation buffer fault annunciation buffer CB operation counters the total of interrupted currents
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-47
Appendix
A.5
Basis for selection of the stabilization factor k

In a first step, the relationship between the point (in time) at which saturation occurs and the stabilization factor ist established. The following condition must be fulfilled in order to prevent bus zone tripping for an external fault (see Figure A-1): 2 IK sin TS . K > IK 2 sin TS K > 1
.
(c1) (c2)
IK
TS Figure A-1 Short-circuit on a feeder with CT saturation
To determine the point in time TS at which saturation occurs, the burden factor u must be considered.
IK = uI sat
Isat
TS Figure A-2 Current/time characteristic
If the CT is burdened with IK=uIsat, it will saturate after time TS, with area A equal to area B ..
Ts
being
i.e.
( I K sin t ) =
( I sat sin t )
(c3)
u (1 - cos TS) = 2 If equations c2 and c4 are combined, then: K > u/4 u - 1
(c4)
(c5)
The stabilization factor must be chosen according to condition c5.
A-48
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
A.6
Connection diagrams
Figure A-3Connection diagram bay unit
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-49
Appendix
Figure A-4Connection diagram central unit
A-50
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Figure A-5
Connection diagram central unit (continued)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-51
Appendix
A.7
A.7.1
Jumper settings (central unit)

Settings of the ZPS modules
The ZPS module is a component of the central unit. It can be used as master (ZBSSBK) or slave (ZPS-BSZ or ZPS-SK) in the multi-processor system. The hardware configuration is unaffected by this selection. For an unequivocal definition of the task, the respective module is coded by means of switches. The codes are listed in Table A-9. The location of the switches S2 to S4 is depicted in Figure A-6.
Figure A-6Location of the coding switches and jumpers on the ZPS module
It is recommended to verify the switch positions and jumpers before fitting the module. All settings are listed in Table A-8 and Table A-9. The locations of the switches and jumpers are shown in Figure A-6.
A-52
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Table A-8 Jumper X20 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 X29 X30 X31 X32 X33 X34
Jumper settings on the ZPS modules (central unit) SBK off off on off 5-6 off on on off off on off on BSZ 1 off off on off off 5-6 on off off off on off off BSZ 2 off off on off off 5-6 on off off off on off off BSZ 3 off off on off off 5-6 on off off off on off off ZPS module SK 1 SK 2 off off on off off 5-6 on off off off on off off off off on off off 5-6 on off off off on off off SK 3 off off on off off 5-6 on off off off on off off SK 4 off off on off off 5-6 on off off off on off off SK 5 off off on off off 5-6 on off off off on off off SK 6 off off on off off 5-6 on off off off on off off
Table A-9 Switch S2 S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4 S2.5 S2.6 S3 S3.1 S3.2 S3.3 S3.4 S3.5 S3.6 S4 S4.1 S4.2 S4.3 S4.4 S4.5 S4.6
Switch settings on the ZPS modules (central unit) SBK off off off off off off BSZ 1 off off off on off off BSZ 2 off off off on off off BSZ 3 off off off on off off ZPS function SK 1 SK 2 off off off on off off off off off on off off SK 3 off off off on off off SK 4 off off off on off off SK 5 off off off on off off SK 6 off off off on off off
off off off off off off
on off on off off on
on on on off off on
on off off on off on
on on off on off on
on off on on off on
on on on on off on
on off off off on on
on on off off on on
on off on off on on
off off off off off off
off off on off off off
off on on off off off
off off off on off off
off on off on off off
off off on on off off
off on on on off off
off off off off on off
off on off off on off
off off on off on off
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-53
Appendix
A.7.2
Settings of the EAZ module
EAZ Cons. No. 200029842
Plug connector for LED control

Figure A-7Jumper layout on the EAZ3 module
Table A-10
EAZ module Jumper empty 1-2 empty empty empty 5-6 1-2 2-3 1-2 1 Jumpers for voltage settings Location see Table 3-2
1 1 1
Connector X9 X10 X11 to X17 X21 to X27 X31 to X37 X38 X39 X40 X41
A-54
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Table A-10
EAZ module Mounting position 1 (Position 11 acc. to Figure 2-2) Mounting position 2 (Position 12 acc. to Figure 2-2)
Schalter S1 S1.1 S1.2 S1.3 S1.4 off on off off off on on off
A.7.3
Jumper settings of the LMZ module
Table A-11
LMZ module Jumper 1-2 1-2
Connector X9 X10
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-55
Appendix
A.8
A.8.1
Jumper settings of the bay unit

Settings of the PFE module
X19
25 26 1 2 1 2
X3
X4
1 2
19 20
A1
B1
X5
15 16
R1
A16 B16
X1 U1
U2
X12 X13 S1 S2 DI uP 80C167 X2

1 144 2 1
U3
U4
X6
X11
144
X9
X14
8 143
Pin 01 Emulator KSES
X10 X15
X18 X17
X16 X8
X7
Figure A-8PFE processor module for bay unit (status on delivery and during storage)
A-56
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
Table A-12
PFE module Jumper 1-2 1-2 empty empty empty
Connector X7 X8 X9 X10 X15
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-57
Appendix
A.8.2
Settings of the SAF module
X70
8 1 2 16
X68
1 2
AUS EIN
X57
X56
X67
Power supply module
X51
8A/8B
Figure A-9SAF power supply module (status on delivery and during storage)
5A/5B
Weidmller voltage connectors
6A/6B
7A/7B
Table A-13
SAF module Jumper empty empty
Connector X68 (wire jumper) X70 (wire jumper)
A-58
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Appendix
A.8.3
Settings of the EFE module
Snap-in modules for external voltage connection
EFE Cons. No. 70873384
Plug connector for device bus
Figure A-10 EFE module
Table A-14
EFE module Jumper Jumpers for voltage setting, location see Table 3-1 empty empty empty
Connector X35 to X94 X2 (wire jumper) X95 (wire jumper) X96 (wire jumper)
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
A-59
Appendix
A.9
Abbreviations
AB
Auxiliary bus (bus coupler) sections (sections which serve exclusively for longitudinal connection of bus zones and to which no outgoing feeders are connected) Circuit breaker failure Protection module Bus zone Circuit breaker Circuit breaker failure protection Commissioning Light emitting diode Coded ordering number Personal computer Control-operation-interface module Sectionalizer Transfer busbar Central processor module protection
BF BSZ BZ CB CBF IBS LED MLFB PC SBK SEC TB ZPS
A-60
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Index
Index
A
Abbreviations A-60 Alarm relays 4-47 Algorithm 4-10 Ancillary functions 4-36, 9-13 Auxiliary voltage supply failure 4-16 Inverse time O/C protection 6-21 Overcurrent protection 6-20 Block 15 Definite time O/C protection 6-24 Inverse time O/C protection 6-25 Overcurrent protection (earth) 6-23 Block 28 Delay times 6-26 Block 39 Circuit breaker failure protection 6-26 Block 40 Circuit breaker test 6-38 Block 45 Control function 6-35 Block 51 Operational annunciations 6-30 Block 52 Last power system fault 6-30 Block 52 to 54 Fault annunciations 6-30 Block 56 CB operating statistics 6-31 Block 57 Operational measured values 6-32 Block 61 Binary inputs 6-7 Marshalling 6-8 Pick-up characteristic 5-28 Block 62 Alarm relay 6-10 Circuit breaker failure protection 5-32 Block 63 CBF protection supervision 5-35 Circuit breaker test 5-34 Differential current supervision 5-30 Isolator supervision 5-32 LED indications 6-13 Linearized current transformers 5-34 Protection test 5-34 Block 64 Command relays 6-14 Marshalling 6-14 Block 71 Integrated operation 6-5 Operational events 5-37 Block 72 Connection of DIGSI V3 6-19 Fault events 5-40
B
Basic principle of busbar protection 4-2 Bay out of service 4-45 Bay unit 1-2 Annunciations A-18, A-42 Annunciations for LSA A-23 Annunciations of binary inputs/outputs A18 Annunciations on LC display A-18 Backup protection function 4-31 CB operating statistics A-42 Communication with CU A-41 Configuration A-44 Cubicle flush mounting 2-21, 7-2 Delay times A-40 Device control A-47 Dimensions 9-14 Fault recording A-41 Jumper settings of the EFE module A-59 Jumper settings of the PFE module A-56 Jumper settings of the SAF module A-58 Marshalling A-43 O/C protection for earth faults A-40 O/C protection of phases A-39 Operating language 3-12 Operating prerequisites 3-12 Operating tree 6-4 Operational measured values A-42 Panel flush mounting 2-21, 7-2 Panel surface mounting 2-21 Parameters A-39 PC annunciations A-18 Power system data A-39 Tests A-41 User password 3-12 Binary inputs 5-20 Block 11 Power system data 6-20 Substation data 6-20 Block 12 Definite time O/C protection 6-22
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Index-1
Index
PC interface 6-18 PC interfaces 6-17 System interface 6-18 System interfaces 6-17 Block 73 Isolator replica 5-41 Block 74 Fault recordings 6-27 Starting the block 5-42 Block 75 Starting the block 5-43 Block 76 Starting the block 5-43 Block 78 Defining the scope of protective functions 6-6 Starting the block 5-44 Block 80 Control/tests 5-46 Block 81 Real-time clock (bay unit) 6-37 Block 82 Reset annunciations 6-36 Block 91 Real-time clock (CU) 5-49 Block XX Breaker failure protection 5-8 Design data 5-5 Block63 Marshalling 6-13 Blocking BZ TRIP commands 4-46 Zone-selective 4-60 Bonding power failure 2-16 Breaker failure protection 4-20, 7-17 Busbar short-circuit 4-29 BZ unbalance 4-26 External initiation 4-27 Feeder short-circuit 4-21 Initiation by external CBF 4-27 Initiation by feeder protection 4-29 Low-current mode 4-27 Pulse mode 4-28 With BZ unbalance 4-26 With I> query 4-25 With TRIP repeat / BZ unbalance 4-27 With TRIP repeat / I>query 4-25 Bus coupler circuit breaker 4-30 Bus coupler variants 1-bay coupler 4-14 2-bay coupler 4-14 Couplers without circuit breaker 4-14 Busbar coupling via isolators 4-15
Busbar protection 4-2 Basic principle 4-2 Evaluation of half-cycles 4-6 Stabilization 4-4 Summary 4-10 BZ unbalance 4-26
C
Central unit 1-2 Alarms A-7 Bus-related design data A-29 Commissioning measured values A-34 Controls A-36 Cubicle version 7-3 Date/time A-38 DIGSI communication software 3-8 Dimensions 9-17 Display panel 3-8, 3-11 Fault recording A-35 Global design data A-28 Global parameters A-31 Jumper settings of the EAZ module A-54 Jumper settings of the LMZ module A-55 Jumper settings of the ZPS modules A52 Keypad 3-8, 3-11 Operating pre-requisites 3-10 Operational events A-33 Password entry 3-10 Subrack ES902C (SIPAC) 2-19 Subrack unit 7-3 System data A-30 Tests A-36 Wall-mounted casing 2-19 Characteristic 4-10 Earth fault 4-6 Normal load line 4-5 Check Auxiliary voltage supply 8-6 LEDs on modules 8-8 Checking Alarms 7-21 Connections 7-21 Trip commands 7-21 Circuit 1-8 Circuit breaker "CB not ready" function 4-43 Interrogation 4-40 Clock management 4-50 CLOSE command Detection 4-40 Configuration examples 5-13 Configuration hints
Index-2
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Index
CT location 5-19 CT polarity 5-19 CTs 5-18 Hardware design 5-18 Isolator location 5-18 Isolators 5-18 Longitudinal sectionalizers 5-18 One-bay coupler 5-18 Reserve bays 5-18 Station configuration 5-18 Connection diagrams A-49 Connection modules 2-18 Connection system 2-27 Connections 7-6 Control 2-16 Control functions 4-44, 5-46 Control voltage 3-4 CT polarity 7-20
Replacement 8-6
G
Guidelines 9-9
I
Initial values 4-9 Initiation by backup protection function 4-31 Input module 2-18 Interchangeability 8-20 Isolator alarm Protection blocked 4-55 Reset 4-54 Isolator replica Auxiliary voltage supply failure 4-16 BZ coupler 4-15 Isolator running status 4-15 Transfer busbars 4-17 Wire breakage 4-16 Isolator running status 4-15 Isolator states in the event of wire breakage 4-16
D
Data Busbar protection 9-6 Circuit breaker failure protection 9-7 Device data 9-3 General 9-2 Overcurrent protection 9-8 Delay time Forced unbalance 7-15 Design 2-22 Device connections 2-23 Devices 8-20 Display Events 5-36 Displays 4-48
L
LED indications 4-47 Linearized current transformers 4-57 Low-current mode 4-27
M
Maintenance 4-46, 4-55 Auto testing 4-54 Protection processing 4-55 Supervision 4-55 Marshalling 5-21 Binary outputs 5-21 LED indications 5-21 Measuring method 4-10 Menus 5-22 Modules 8-20 Monitoring Differential current 4-52 Hardware 4-50 Software 4-52
E
End fault protection 4-42 Event logging 4-47
F
Failures Communication 8-15 Fault analysis 8-5 Fault buffer Analysis 8-10 Display 8-10 Fault events A-6 Fault recording 4-49 Feeder isolator Status 4-19 Feeder-selective TRIP release 4-36 Fiber-optic module 2-18 Fuses
O
Operation 4-48 Operational events 5-37, A-6 Analysis 8-5 Ordering code 3-3 Ordering data A-2 Overcurrent controlled TRIP command 4-36 Overcurrent protection Definite time 4-35 Inverse time 4-35
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Index-3
Index
Overcurrent release Trip command 7-19
P
Panel surface mounting 7-2 Pick-up characteristic Forced unbalance 7-14 Power supply module 2-16 Processor modules 2-18
Standards 9-9 Storage 3-15 Supervision CBF release 4-55, 4-56 Isolators 4-54 Supervisory functions 4-50, 7-18 Switching into service Protection 7-22
R
Rated data 3-4 Recommendations for maintenance 8-3 Repacking the units 3-2 Repair 8-18
T
Testing Cyclic 4-58 Differential current supervision 7-11 Overcurrent limit 7-13 Pick-up characteristic 7-8 Transfer busbar operation 4-17 TRIP command Minimum duration 4-36 Reset 4-57 Trip test 4-44 Two bay units One bus coupler bay 7-4
S
Selection data A-2 Service conditions 8-19 Short-circuit Detection 4-37 Stabilization 4-4 Stabilization factor A-48 Stabilizing current 4-12 Check zone 4-12
U
Unpacking the units 3-2
Index-4
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Corrections To Siemens AG Dept. EV S PSN D13623 Berlin Germany Dear reader, printing errors can never be entirely eliminated: therefore, should you come across any when reading this manual, kindly enter them in this form together with any comments or suggestions for improvement that you may have. Corrections/Suggestions Address: Company/Dept.: From Name:
Phone no.:
Fax no.:
7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691
Subject to technical alteration
Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design. Order-no.: E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691 Available from: LZF Frth-Bislohe Printed in Germany/Imprim en Allemagne AG 1000 0.1 FO 524 En
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Manual 7ss52 V17a3 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual 7ss52 V17a3 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

,QWURGXFWLRQ 'HVLJQ DQG &RQQHFWLRQ 6\VWHP

SIPROTEC Distributed Busbar/Breaker Failure Protection 7SS52 V 1.71

Document No. E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Instructions and Warnings

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Typographic and Symbol Conventions

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

3.4.1 3.4.2 3.5

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

6.7 6.8 6.9

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.4 8.5 8.6

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

General view of the configuration of the protection system 7SS52

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Use and scope of functions

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Pick-up characteristics of the busbar and breaker failure protection (unbalancing)

Normal load line Stabilizing current

Circuit-breaker failure protection

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Relays, LEDs and binary inputs

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Measuring and testing functions

Operational and fault events

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Design and Connection System

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

General Central unit Bay unit Connection system

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Design and Connection System

Bonding power failure

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Design and Connection System

Figure 2-1 Front view of the central unit

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Design and Connection System

Fitting of the modules

Figure 2-2 Fitting of the modules in the central unit

Power supply (SV) Input/output module (EAZ3)

Central processor modules protection (ZPS)

Fiber-optic module (LMZ)

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Design and Connection System

7SS52 Manual E50410-A0012-U501-A3-7691

Design and Connection System

Figure 2-3 Front view of the bay unit

Fitting of the modules